Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCornell Information Technology CORNELL UNIVERSITY 120 MAPLE AVENUE RTU REPLACEMENT FACILITIES CONTRACTS 121 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853-3701 ADDENDUM NO. 01 May 7, 2014 This Addendum contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents and Specifications. Such changes are to be incorporated into the Construction Documents and shall apply to the work with the same meaning and force as if they had been included in the original document. Wherever this Addendum modifies a portion of a paragraph of the specifications or a portion of any Drawing, the remainder of the Paragraph or Drawing shall remain in force. NOTE: Provisions of all Contract Documents apply. Item 1. General Requirements, Section 01 35 29, Item 1.3.A ADD Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report prepared by Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors dated May 2, 2014, attached. Item 2. Drawing A-100: REVISE Detail 1, Second Floor Demolition Plan per the attached drawing AD1 A-100A. ADD Demolition Note 4 to read as follows: “Remove top of brick masonry wall to accommodate new ductwork. Coordinate with Mechanical drawings. Item 3. Drawing A-100, Detail 4: REVISE Detail 4, Second Floor RCP per the attached drawing AD1 A-100B. Item 4. Drawing A-100, Detail 5: REVISE Detail 5, Soffit Detail per the attached drawing AD1 A-100C. Item 5. Drawing A-120, Detail 5: REPLACE Detail 5, Partial Roof Framing Plan with the attached drawing AD1 A-120A. Item 6. Drawing A-120, Detail 6: REPLACE Detail 6, Section at Roof Framed Opening with the attached drawing AD1 A- 120B. Item 7. Drawing H-000: ADD Refrigeration Disposal/New Installation Notes. Refer to sketch AD1-H-000a. Item 8. Drawing H-201: RELOCATE 54x40 duct up to RTU-2 approximately 24" to the north to coordinate with the existing building structure. Refer to sketch AD1-H-201a. REMOVE one fire damper associated with the 36x26 duct that runs to the north from the 54x40. Refer to sketch AD1-H-201a. MODIFY the transition from the 54x40 to the 48x16 duct serving the second floor. Refer to sketch AD1-H-201a. Item 9. Drawing H-202: RELOCATE RTU-2 approximately 24" to the north to coordinate with the existing building structure. Refer to sketch AD1-H-202a. MODIFY the return ductwork that attaches to the north end of RTU-2. Refer to sketch AD1-H-202a. ADD General Note "A". Refer to sketch AD1-H-202b. Item 10. Drawing E-101: ADD Demolition Note #3. Refer to attached sketch AD1 E-101a. ADD 2'x4' recessed troffer to stairwell shown for demolition with demolition note 3 associated with it. Refer to attached sketch AD1 E-101a. ADD Smoke detector to stairwell shown for removal and reinstallation to allow for ceiling removal. Refer to attached sketch AD1 E-101a. Item 11. Drawing E-201: ADD Drawing Note #4. Refer to attached sketch AD1 E-201a. ADD Wall mounted stairwell light fixture with drawing note 4 associated with it. Refer to attached sketch AD1 E-201a. ADD Smoke detector to stairwell shown for reinstallation in new ceiling. Refer to attached sketch AD1 E-201a. Item 12. Drawing E-401: ADD Luminaire schedule to drawing. Refer to attached sketch AD1 E-401a. Attachments: Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report dated May 2, 2014 AD1 A-100A AD1 A-100B AD1 A-100C AD1 A-120A AD1 A-120B AD1 H-000a AD1 H-201a AD1 H-202a AD1 H-202b AD1 E-101a AD1 E-201a AD1 E-401a ****END OF ADDENDUM**** Cornell University Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report Performed at 120 Maple Avenue (Building 3010B) For the RTU Replacement Project Cornell University Ithaca, New York Campus Prepared for: Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University – Project Services Group 119A Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY 14853-3701 Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 www.deltaengineers.com Delta Project No. 2014.030.166 Cornell Work Order No. 6879706 Field work performed by: Michael Staudt & Robert Mosher, April 22nd - 24th, 2014 Report prepared by: Michael Staudt Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky 2 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 3 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS ................. 5 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS......................................................... 12 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS ................................................................................ 13 Appendix A, ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE REPORT FORM .......................................... 14 Appendix B, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS ................................................. 15 Appendix C, DELTA ENGINEERS, COMPANY AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS ....... 16 Appendix D, LABORATORY CERTIFICATIONS ......................................................... 17 Appendix E, BULK SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWINGS................................................. 18 Appendix F, PREVIOUS DELTA BULK SAMPLE INFORMATION .................................. 19 3 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 1.0 INTRODUCTION: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors (Delta) was contracted by Cornell University, to provide a limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey at 120 Maple Avenue (Building 3010B) located on the Cornell Ithaca, New York Campus in support of the upcoming RTU Replacement Project. It should be noted that this “Limited” Pre-Renovation Survey addressed only accessible suspect interior and exterior building materials with the potential to be impacted by the RTU Project. The initial stage included a review of past Delta Survey information for the Building. Bulk sample results through previous Delta sampling services for suspect materials have been incorporated into this Survey and associated Survey Report where applicable. This determination to utilize existing information was based on the following: 1) If sufficient samples of the given suspect material were collected 2) If the samples were analyzed as per “current” Methodology requirements During the period of April 22nd through April 24th, 2014, Delta Certified Inspectors Michael Staudt and Robert Mosher were on site to perform a walkthrough to visually inspect all accessible affected rooms/spaces and to perform sampling of suspect materials. Based on a review of the “90% Construction Document Drawing Set” for the project (dated 4/4/14) and a visual inspection of the spaces, a total of thirty-Six (36) bulk samples were collected representing eighteen (18) separate suspect homogenous building materials. Twenty-eight (28) of the samples collected were non-friable organically bound (NOB) representing fourteen (14) homogenous materials. The remaining eight (8) samples were “friable” non-NOB representing four (4) homogenous materials. In addition to the samples collected above, other suspect homogenous materials were observed but not sampled as they were addressed in previous sampling efforts by Delta. For these materials, the results from Delta’s Surveys have been incorporated into this report. The homogenous building mate rials identified as part of the limited pre-renovation interior/exterior survey included: Homogenous Area (HA) Suspect Building Material 01 Pin Mastic from Fiberglass Duct Insulation 02 Black Vibration Dampener Cloth 03 Gray Caulk from Ductwork to Masonry Wall 04 Red Caulk on Duct Work Plenum 05 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Duct Insulation 06 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Pipe Insulation 07 Black Mastic from Metal Duct Wrap 08 White/Gray Caulk from Metal Duct Work 09 Hot Mop, Roof 004 10 Hot Mop/Vapor Barrier 11 Press Board - Cut # 2, Roof 004, Flashing 12 Masonry Decking, Roof 001/004 13 Black Seam Sealant, Roofs 001/004/005 4 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Homogenous Area (HA) Suspect Building Material (Continued) 14 Repair Patch Seam Sealer, Roof 001/004 15 Vent Pipe Caulk, Roof 001/004 16 Hardware Caulk - Roof 001 17 Skylight Window Caulk - Roof 004 18 White Coping Stone Caulk - Roof 004 2012.010.012-01* 2’ x 2’ Drop-in Heavy Textured Ceiling Tile 2012.010.012-02* Drywall 2012.010.012-03* Joint Compound 2012.010.012-05* 2’ x 2’ Fissured Ceiling Tile 2012.010.012-06* Top Coat Plaster 2012.010.012-07* Base Coat Plaster 2012.010.012-08* 2’ x 2’ Pinhole Ceiling Tile 2012.010.012-09* 4” x 4” Green Ceramic Wall Tile Grout 2012.010.012-10* 4” x 4” Green Ceramic Wall Tile Mortar Bed 2012.010.012-11* 2’ x 2’ Textured Fissured Ceiling Tile 2014.030.097-01* Brown Spray-on 2014.030.097-08* Gray Duct Sealant * - Homogenous Area (suspect material) previously sampled by Delta Specific information required by 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1, (f) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information” to be included in this pre-renovation report is as follows: 1) Building Name/Address: 120 Maple Ave (Building 3010B) Cornell University Ithaca Campus Ithaca, NY 14850 2) Owner’s Name/Address: Cornell University Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY 14853 3) Owner’s Agent: Mr. Dale Houseknecht 4) Survey Performed By: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 5) Certified Inspectors: Michael Staudt Robert Mosher Certificate No. 07-08367 Certificate No. 06-05489 6) Date’s of Survey: April 22nd - 24th, 2014 7) Laboratory: America Science Team New York, Inc. 117 East 30th Street, New York, NY 10016 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS: 2.1 Survey requirements Requirements to perform Pre-Demolition/Pre-Renovation Asbestos Surveys are based on the following State and Federal Regulations. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA survey requirements and sampling protocols are included in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2) & (j)(8) and 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k),(5): 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2), Installed Asbestos Containing Material: Employers and building owners are required to treat installed TSI and sprayed on and troweled-on surfacing materials as ACM in buildings constructed no later than 1980 for purposes of this standard. These materials are designated "presumed ACM or PACM", and are defined in paragraph (b) of this section. Asphalt and vinyl flooring material installed no later than 1980 also must be treated as asbestos-containing. The employer or building owner may demonstrate that PACM and flooring material do not contain asbestos by complying with paragraph (j)(8)(iii) of this section. 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(8), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1910.1001(j)(8)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (j)(8)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (m) of this section. 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii) - An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain asbestos by the following: 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that no ACM is present in the material; or 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1910.1001(j)(8)(iii) -The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k)(5), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1926.1101(k)(5)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of this section. 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii) – An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain more than 1 percent asbestos by the following: 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that the material is not ACM; or 6 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1926.1101(k)(5)(iii) - The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. EPA National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs): (NESHAPs) regulates asbestos under “40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - National Emission Standard for Asbestos”. Subpart M regulates demolition and/or renovation of “facilities” that may contain asbestos-containing materials (ACMs). “Facilities,” as defined by NESHAPs, includes any institutional, commercial, public, industrial, or residential structure or building, except residential buildings having four or fewer units. ACMs are defined in NESHAPs as materials containing more than 1 percent asbestos. Section 61.145 states: 61.145 Standard for demolition and renovation. (a) Applicability. To determine which requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section apply to the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and prior to the commencement of the demolition or renovation, thoroughly inspect the affected facility or part of the facility where the demolition or renovation operation will occur for the presence of asbestos, including Category I and Category II nonfriable ACM. It should be noted that 40 CFR Part 1 Subpart M, NESHAPS has no cut-off date exempting survey requirements. New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL): Guidelines followed for the inspection are those established by the NYS DOL’s Industrial Code Rule 56 (Cited as 12 NYCRR Part 56 , as amended, adopted January 11, 2006; effective September 5, 2006 ). The specific survey, sampling and reporting requirements included in 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1(e) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements” include: 56-5.1 Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling and Repair (a) Asbestos Survey Required. An owner or an owner’s agent, except the owner of one and two- family dwellings who contracts for, but does not direct or control the work, shall cause to be conducted, an asbestos survey completed by a licensed asbestos contractor using ins pectors certified in compliance with Section 56-3.2(d), to determine whether or not the building or structure, or portion(s) thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work, contains ACM, PACM or asbestos material. This asbestos survey shall be completed and submitted as indicated in Subdivision (g) of this Section, prior to commencing work. All such asbestos surveys shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements of Subdivision (e) of this Section. 7 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (b) Exemptions to Asbestos Survey Requirements: The asbestos survey required by this Subdivision (a) of this Section shall not be required for the following classes of buildings or structures: (1) An agricultural building; (2) Buildings or structures for which original construction commenced on or after January 1, 1974; (3) A structure certified in writing to be structurally unsound by a licensed Professional Engineer, Registered Architect, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector or other official of competent jurisdiction. (See Section 56-11.5) (c) Building/Structure Demolition. If a building/structure asbestos survey is not required or performed per Subdivision (b) of this Section, and the building/structure is certified to be unsound or slated for contracted demolition, the building/structure shall be assumed to contain asbestos, and shall be demolished per this Part, unless the building/structure is adequately certified to be free of asbestos containing material. Acceptable documentation for certification shall be a previous thorough building/structure asbestos survey, abatement records or other documentation acceptable to the Commissioner or his or her representative. (d) Responsibility to Comply. No exemption to the requirement to conduct an asbestos survey shall exempt any person, asbestos contractor, property owner or business entity from the inspection or asbestos survey requirements of EPA, OSHA, and any other applicable section of this Part. (e) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements. The asbestos survey shall include a thorough inspection for and identification of all PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or to have repair work. The required inspection shall be pe rformed by a certified asbestos inspector, and, at a minimum, shall include identification of PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material by all of the following methods: (1) The review of building/structure plans and records, if available, for re ferences to asbestos, ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material used in construction, renovation or repair; and (2) A visual inspection for PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or repaired. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56 -4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. (f) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. (1) The asbestos survey shall, at a minimum, identify and assess with due diligence, the locations, quantities, friability and conditions of all types of installations at the affected portion of the building/structure relative to the ACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, PACM or asbestos material contained therein. The following list is not inclusive of all types of ACMs, it only summarizes typical 8 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com ACMs. The certified asbestos inspector is responsible for identification and assessment of all types ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM and asbestos material within the affected portion of the building/structure: PACM (i) Surfacing Treatments: (a) Fireproofing; (b) Acoustical Plaster; (c) Finish Plasters; and (d) Skim Coats of Joint Compound. (ii) Thermal System Insulation: (a) Equipment Insulation; (b) Boiler, Breeching, Boiler Rope, Duct, or Tank Insulation, Cement or Mortar Used for Boilers and Refractory Brick; (c) Piping and Fitting Insulations including but not limited to, Wrapped Paper, Aircell, Millboard, Rope, Cork, Preformed Plaster, Job Molded Plaster and coverings over fibrous glass insulation. SUSPECT MISCELLANEOUS ACM (i) Roofing and Siding Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Insulation Board; (b) Vapor Barriers; (c) Coatings; (d) Non-Metallic or Non-Wood Roof Decking (e) Felts; (f) Cementitious Board (Transite); (g) Flashing; (h) Shingles; and (i) Galbestos. (ii) Other Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Dust and Debris; (b) Floor Tile; (c) Cove Base; (d) Floor Leveler Compound; (e) Ceiling Tile; (f) Vermiculite Insulation (g) Gaskets, Seals, Sealants (including for condensate control); (h) Vibration Isolators; (i) Laboratory Tables and Hoods; (j) Chalkboards; (k) Pipe Penetration Packing or Other Firestopping Materials (l) Cementitious Board; (m) Electrical Wire Insulation; (n) Fire Curtains; (o) Fire Blankets; (p) Fire Doors; (q) Brakes and Clutches; (r) Mastics, Adhesives and Glues; 9 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (s) Caulks; (t) Sheet Flooring (Linoleum); (u) Wallpaper; (v) Drywall; (w) Plasterboard (x) Spackling/Joint Compound; (y) Textured Paint; (z) Grout; (aa) Glazing Compound; and (ab) Terrazzo. (2) All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material reported under Paragraph (1) of this Subdivision shall include the location of the materials, an estimate of the quantities, types, friability and condition of the identified materials to be treated and handled as ACM. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multilayered system s sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. (3) The building/structure asbestos survey shall also include the building/structure name, address, the building/structure owner’s name and address, the name and address of the owner's agent, the name of the firm performing the asbestos survey and a copy of the firm’s current asbestos handling license, the names of the certified inspector(s) performing the survey and a copy of the current asbestos handling certificate for each inspector utilized, the dates of the asbestos survey, a listing of homogeneous areas identifying which ones are ACM, all laboratory analyses reports for bulk samples collected, and copies of the appropriate certifications for the laboratory used for analysis of samples taken during the asbestos survey. (g) Transmittal of Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. One (1) copy of the results of the building/structure asbestos survey shall be immediately transmitted by the building/structure owner as follows: (1) One (1) copy of the completed asbestos survey shall be sent by the owner or their agent to the local government entity charged with issuing a permit for such demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work under applicable State or local laws. (2) The completed asbestos survey for controlled demolition (as per Subpart 56-11.5) or pre-demolition asbestos projects shall also be submitted to the appropriate Asbestos Control Bureau district office. (3) The completed asbestos survey shall be kept on the construction site with the asbestos notification and variance, if required, throughout the duration of the asbestos project and any associated demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project. (h) Removal Required. If the building/structure asbestos survey finds that the portion of the building/structure to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work contains ACM, 10 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material, which is impacted by the work, the owner or the owner’s agent shall conduct, or cause to have cond ucted, asbestos removal performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material impacted by the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project shall be removed as per this Part, prior to access or disturbance by other uncertified trades or personnel. No demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work shall be commenced by any owner or the owner’s agent prior to the completion of the asbestos abatement in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. For multi-phased work, the access restriction for uncertified trades or personnel applies to each intermediate portion of the entire project. Upon completion of the intermediate portion of the asbestos project, other trades or personnel may access that portion of the work site. For demolition projects that are exempt from asbestos survey requirements due to being structurally unsound, the demolition is con sidered an asbestos project and shall proceed as per Section 56-11.5. (1) All building/structure owners and asbestos abatement contractors on a demolition, renovation, remodeling, or repair project, which includes work covered by this Part, shall inform all trades on the work site about PACM, ACM, asbestos material and suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM at the work site. (i) Bidding. Bids may be advertised and contracts awarded for demolition, remodeling, renovation, or repair work, but no work on the current intermediate portion of the project shall commence on the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work by any owner or agent prior to completion of all necessary asbestos abatement work for the current intermediate portion of the entire project, in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. (j) Unidentified and Unassessed Asbestos. When any construction activity, such as demolition, remodeling, renovation or repair work, reveals PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM that has not been identified by the asbestos survey per this Part, or has not been identified by other inspections as per current OSHA or EPA requirements, all activities shall cease in the area where the PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM is found and the Asbestos Contr ol Bureau shall be notified by telephone by the building/structure owner or their representative, followed with a written notice in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. Unassessed PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM shall be treated an d handled as ACM and assumed to be ACM, unless proven otherwise by standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; subsequent analyses performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both NYS ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. 2.2 Sample Analysis Bulk sample analysis was performed by American Science Team New York In c., an independent laboratory approved/accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). 11 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Samples collected during the course of this s urvey fell into one of two categories. The first category includes non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials. These materials are those which have an organic binder in their matrix and include items such as floor tiles, sheet flooring, mastics, glazings, caulks and roofing materials. The second category includes non-NOB “friable” materials including parging, sheetrock, joint compound, wall insulations, and wallboard. Analysis of all “NOB” materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microsco py (PLM) following the New York State Department of Health ELAP 198.6 Gravimetric Reduction Methodology. If a given sample was reported as non -asbestos following this analysis, it was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the N YS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. Analysis of all “non-NOB” materials was performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the EPA 600/M4/82/020 and the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodologies. 2.3 Materials not sampled There were several materials present at the site which were not considered “suspect” by the inspector and were not sampled. These included various fiberglass, foam, vinyl, silicone, wood/cellulose products and concrete/cinder block/brick components. Additionally, No sampling associated with the window systems was performed as a part of this Survey. 12 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS 3.1) 120 Maple Avenue (3010B) RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey, Non-Asbestos Containing Materials – Based on results reported for samples collected during this Survey and a review of the results from previous Delta sampling efforts at 120 Maple Avenue, the following materials with the potential to be impacted by the RTU Replacement Project were identified as non-asbestos: Homogenous Area (HA) Non-Asbestos Material 01 Pin Mastic from Fiberglass Duct Insulation 02 Black Vibration Dampener Cloth 03 Gray Caulk from Ductwork to Masonry Wall 04 Red Caulk on Duct Work Plenum 05 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Duct Insulation 06 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Pipe Insulation 07 Black Mastic from Metal Duct Wrap 08 White/Gray Caulk from Metal Duct Work 09 Hot Mop, Roof 004 10 Hot Mop/Vapor Barrier 11 Press Board - Cut # 2, Roof 004, Flashing 12 Masonry Decking, Roof 001/004 13 Black Seam Sealant, Roofs 001/004/005 14 Repair Patch Seam Sealer, Roof 001/004 15 Vent Pipe Caulk, Roof 001/004 16 Hardware Caulk - Roof 001 17 Skylight Window Caulk - Roof 004 18 White Coping Stone Caulk - Roof 004 2012.010.012-01* 2’ x 2’ Drop-in Heavy Textured Ceiling Tile 2012.010.012-02* Drywall 2012.010.012-03* Joint Compound 2012.010.012-05* 2’ x 2’ Fissured Ceiling Tile 2012.010.012-06* Top Coat Plaster 2012.010.012-07* Base Coat Plaster 2012.010.012-08* 2’ x 2’ Pinhole Ceiling Tile 2012.010.012-09* 4” x 4” Green Ceramic Wall Tile Grout 2012.010.012-10* 4” x 4” Green Ceramic Wall Tile Mortar Bed 2012.010.012-11* 2’ x 2’ Textured Fissured Ceiling Tile 2014.030.097-01* Brown Spray-on 2014.030.097-08* Gray Duct Sealant * - Homogenous Area (suspect material) previously sampled by Delta All visually accessible pipe and duct insulation was observed to be non-suspect fiberglass or foam. All visually accessible wiring was observed to be non-suspect vinyl wrapped. 13 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 3.2) 120 Maple Avenue (3010B) RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey, Non-Asbestos Containing Materials – Based on results reported for samples collected during this Survey and a review of the results from previous Delta sampling efforts at 120 Maple Avenue, NONE of the materials with the potential to be impacted by the RTU Replacement Project were identified as being asbestos containing. 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS The affected RTU Replacement Project Interior and exterior spaces/rooms which were visible and accessible were inspected and sampled as a part of this survey. Inaccessible areas such as wall cavities and enclosed pipe chases could not be inspected without select demolition. Any materials present in those areas not accessible shall be assumed ACM when encountered, until tested. 14 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2014.030.166 -01A 01 2 Pin Mastic from Fiberglass Duct Insulation - Room 200CD Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -01B 01 2 Pin Mastic from Fiberglass Duct Insulation - Room 200CD Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -02A 02 2 Black Vibration Dampener Cloth - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -02B 02 2 Black Vibration Dampener Cloth - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -03A 03 2 Gray Caulk from Ductwork to Masonry Wall - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -03B 03 2 Gray Caulk from Ductwork to Masonry Wall - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -04A 04 2 Red Caulk on Duct Work Plenum - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -04B 04 2 Red Caulk on Duct Work Plenum - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -05A 05 2 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Duct Insulation - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -05B 05 2 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Duct Insulation - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -06A 06 2 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Pipe Insulation - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -06B 06 2 Cloth/Foil Wrap on Fiberglass Pipe Insulation - Room 200UA Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -07A 07 Roof Black Mastic from Metal Duct Wrap - Roof 004 Misc.ND ND ND Work Order No.: 6879706 Date Sampling Performed: 04/22 - 4/24 2014 Date of Report: 05/02/2014 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 36 Number Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 36/ TEM -28 Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Project: 120 Maple Ave. RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2014.030.166 Asbestos Inspector: Mike Staudt / Robert Mosher Building Code: 3010B Cornell University 120 Maple Ave RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 1 of 3 Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos Work Order No.: 6879706 Date Sampling Performed: 04/22 - 4/24 2014 Date of Report: 05/02/2014 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 36 Number Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 36/ TEM -28 Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Project: 120 Maple Ave. RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2014.030.166 Asbestos Inspector: Mike Staudt / Robert Mosher Building Code: 3010B 2014.030.166 -07B 07 Roof Black Mastic from Metal Duct Wrap - Roof 004 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -08A 08 Roof White/Gray Caulk from Metal Duct Work - Roof 004 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -08B 08 Roof White/Gray Caulk from Metal Duct Work - Roof 004 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -09A 09 Roof Hot Mop - Cut #3, Roof 004, Northwest Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -09B 09 Roof Hot Mop - Cut #2, Roof 004, North Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -10A 10 Roof Hot Mop/Vapor Barrier - Cut #3, East Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -10B 10 Roof Hot Mop/Vapor Barrier - Cut #5, Flashing Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -11A 11 Roof Press Board - Cut # 2, Roof 004, Flashing Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -11B 11 Roof Press Board - Cut # 2, Roof 004, Flashing Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -12A 12 Roof Masonry Decking - Cut #6, Roof 001 Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -12B 12 Roof Masonry Decking - Cut #7, Roof 004 Misc.ND ND NA 2014.030.166 -13A 13 Roof Black Seam Sealant Near Cut #5 @ Roofs 005/001 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -13B 13 Roof Black Seam Sealant Near Cut #5, Roof 004, South Misc.ND ND ND Cornell University 120 Maple Ave RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 2 of 3 Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos Work Order No.: 6879706 Date Sampling Performed: 04/22 - 4/24 2014 Date of Report: 05/02/2014 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 36 Number Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 36/ TEM -28 Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Project: 120 Maple Ave. RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2014.030.166 Asbestos Inspector: Mike Staudt / Robert Mosher Building Code: 3010B 2014.030.166 -14A 14 Roof Repair Patch Seam Sealer - Cut #5, Roof 001 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -14B 14 Roof Repair Patch Seam Sealer - Roof 004, East Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -15A 15 Roof Vent Pipe Caulk @ Cut #5, Roof 001 Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -15B 15 Roof Vent Pipe Caulk - Roof 004, South Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -16A 16 Roof Hardware Caulk - Roof 001, Northeast Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -16B 16 Roof Hardware Caulk - Roof 001, North Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -17A 17 Roof Skylight Window Caulk - Roof 004, Northwest Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -17B 17 Roof Skylight Window Caulk - Roof 004, Northeast Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -18A 18 Roof White Coping Stone Caulk - Roof 004, North Misc.ND ND ND 2014.030.166 -18B 18 Roof White Coping Stone Caulk - Roof 004, South Misc.ND ND ND TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop Cornell University 120 Maple Ave RTU Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 3 of 3 15 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX B Laboratory Analytical Results Aur:nrscr Delta Engineers Attn: Stephen Prislupsky 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received 04126/14 Date Examined 04121t14 ELAP #11480 RE: 2014.030.1G0; Cornell University; RTO ACM Survey AmeriSci New york 1,I7 EAST 3OTH ST. NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 . FttX: (212) 679-9114 AmeriSci Job #2L40450s7 P.O. # Page 1of7 120 Maple Ave., Phase 2 Glient No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2014.030.166-01A 1 214045057-01 No Location: Floor 2, Room 200cD - pin Mastic From Fiberglass Duct Unit NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.8 % 2014.030.166-01B 1 214045057-02 A/o Location: Floor2, Room 200cD - pin Mastic From Fiberglass Duct Unit NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: white, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.7 o/o 2014.030.166-02A 2 214045057-03 No Location: Floor 2, Room 200UA - Black Vibration Damper Cloth NAD (by NYS ELAP 198,6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Brack, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 30 %, Non-fibro us 37 o/o 2014.030.166-028 214O4SOST-04 No NAD (by NYS ELAP 1e8.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 2 Location: Froor 2, Room 200UA - Brack Vibration Damper croth Analyst Description: Brack, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Fibrous glass 40 %, Non-fibro us 25.3 o/o 2014.030.166-034 214O4SOS7-OS A/o3 Location: Floor 2, Room 200UA - Gray Caulk From Duct Work To Masonry Wall NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Matertar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrou s i6.7 o/o See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 21404SOS7 Client Name: Delta Engineers Page2 of 7 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 20 1 4.030. 100 ; cornetfu;H,il,{; 1,3? Ma pre Ave., phase 2 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos present Total % Asbestos 2014.030.166-038 3 No NADLocation: Floor 2' Room 200UA - Gray caulk From Duct work To Masonry wa[ (by Nys ELAP 198,6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 214045057-06 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1g.6 % 2014.030.166-04A 214045057_07 No4 Location: Froor 2, Room 200UA - Red caurk on Duct work prenum Analyst Description: Red, Heterogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrou s 27.6 % NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 2014.030.166-048 4 214045057-08 A/o Location: Floor 2, Room 200UA - Red Caulk On Duct Work plenum NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Red, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrou s 11 o/o 2014.030.166-054 5 214045057-09 /Vo NADLocation: Floor2, Room 200UA - Cloth/Foil Wrap From Fibergtass Duct lnsulation (by Nys ELAP 19g.1) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: sirverMhite, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Burk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 50 yo, Non-fibrous 50 % 2014.030.166-0sB 5 No NADLocation: Floor2, Room 200UA - Cloth/FoilWrap From Fiberglass Duct lnsulation (by NyS ELAP 19g.j) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 214045057-10 Analyst Description: SirverMhite, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 55 %, Non-fibrous 45 % 2014.030.166-064 6 No NADLocation: Floor 2, Room 200UA - Cloth/Foil Wrap From Fiberglass pipe lnsulation (by NyS ELAP 1 gg.1 ) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 214045057-11 Analyst Description; sirverMhite, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: other Material: ceilurose 4s o/o, Fibrous grass 5 %, Non-fibrous s0 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 214O4SOS7 Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 3 of 7 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2014.030.166; corneil Ung,il,5,,,],3?Mapte Ave., phase 2 Client No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos2014.030.166-068 214045057_12 No6 Location: Floor 2, Room 200UA - Cloth/Foil Wrap From Fiberglass pipe lnsulation NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: SilverMhite, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Cellulose 50 %, Fibrous glass Trace, Non-fibrous 50 % 2014.030.166-07A 7 214045057-13 Location: Roof 004 - Black Mastic From Metal Duct Wrap No NAD (by NYS ELAP 1e8.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 0.2 o/o 2014.030.166-078 214045057_14 7 Location: Roof 004 - Black Mastic From Metal Duct Wrap A/o NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 0.9 o/o 2014.030.166-08A I 214045057-15 /Vo Location: Roof 004 - White/Gray Caulk From Metal Ductwork NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: white/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 11.5 % 2014.030.166-088 214045057_16 8 Location: Roof 004 - white/Gray caurk From Metar Ductwork A/o NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: White/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 14.7 o/o See Reporting notes on last page /Vo2014.030.166-094 I 21404s057-17 Location: Rool Cut #3, Roof 004, North West - Hot Mop NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Brack, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Materia!: Non-fibrous 1.3 % AmeriSci Job #: 214045057 Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 4 of 7 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2014.030.166; Cornell University; 120 Maple Ave., phase 2 RTO ACM Survey Client No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2014.030.166-098 214045057_18 A/o I Location: Roof, Cut #2, Roof 004, North - Hot Mop Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.7 % NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 2014.030.166-104 214045057-19 1 0 Location: Rool Cut #3, East - Hot MopA/apor Barier Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 0.4 % /Vo NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 2014.030.166-108 10 214045057-20 Location: Roof, Cut #5, Flashing - Hot MopA/apor Barier No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 20.9 % 2014.030.166-1 1A 11 214045057-21 Location: Roof, Cut #2, Roof 004, Flashing - press Board No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 100 o/o, Non-fibrous Trace 2014.030.166-1 1B 11 Location: Roof, Cut #2, 214045057-22 Roof 004, Flashing - Press Board A/o NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 100 %, Non-fibrous Trace 2014.030.166-12A 214045057_23 12 Location: Roof, Cut#6, Roof001 - Masonry Decking No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, cementitious, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 214045052 Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 5 of 7 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2014.030.166; Cornell University; 120 Maple Ave., phase 2 RTO ACM Survey Glient No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos2014.030.166-128 214045057_24 12 Location: Roof,Cut#7,Roof004-MasonryDecking No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Brown, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, cementitious, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2014.030.166-13A 13 214045057-25 /Vo Location: Roof, Near Cut #5, At Roofs 001 & 005 - Black Seam Sealant NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Brack, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 14.3 o/o 2014.030.166-138 214045057_26 13 Location: Roof 004, South - Black Seam Sealant No NAD (by NYS ELAP 1e8.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 10.7 o/o 2014.030.166-14A 14 214045057-27 A/o Location: Roof, Cut #5, Roof 001 - Repair patch Seam Sealer NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 15.6 yo 2014.030.166-148 14 214045057-28 Location: Rool Roof 004, East - Repair patch Seam Sealer IVo NAD (by NYS ELAP 1e8.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1g.4 o/o See Reporting notes on last page A/o2014.030.166-15A 15 Location: Roor At ",, -;H:,ofr1t-'":n9. pipe caurk NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Materia!: Non-fibrous .15.3 % AmeriSci Job #: 214O4SOiT Client Name: Delta Engineers Page 6 of 7 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2014.030.166; Corneil Ung,il,l;,1,,30 Mapte Ave., phase 2 Client No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2014.030.166-158 15 Location: 214045057_30 Roof 004, South - Vent pipe Cautk No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 13.7 oh 2014.030.166-16A 214045057_31 16 Location: Roof 001, North East - Hard Ware Caulk No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrou s 20.5 oh 2014.030.166-168 16 214045057-32 Location: Roof 001, North - Hard Ware Caulk A/o NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 15.6 % 2014.030.166-17A 214045057_33 17 Location: Roof 004, North West - Skytight Window Cautk /Vo NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 13 % 2014.030.166-178 17 214045057-34 Location: Roof 004, North East - Skylight Window Caulk No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Materiar Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrou s 20.5 o/o See Reporting notes on last page /Vo2014.030.166-18A 18 214045057-35 Location: Roof 004, North - White Coping Cap Caulk NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114Analyst Description: white, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Burk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 13.8 % AmeriSci Job #: 214O4SOS7 Client Name: Delta Engineers PageT of7 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2014.030.166; corneil Ung,i,,l;,1,3?Mapte Ave., phase 2 Client No. / HGA Lab No.Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos2014.030.166-188 21404505T_36 /Vo NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Ella Babayeva on 04127114 18 Location: Roof 004, South - White Coping Cap Cautk Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 20.4 o/o Reporting Notes: Analyzed by: Ella Babayeva.NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; ttl,tps=6ot anaryzed/positive stop; pLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EpA 600/M4-82-020 per 40CFR 763 (NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation ofvermiculite o|lg8'6 for NoB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 6oo/M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab lDl 1480); Note:pLM is not consistenuy reliable indetecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by pLM are inconclusive, TEM iscurrently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in Ny State (also seeEPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,s/1/94) National lnstitute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this reportmust not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report retates oNLf to the items tested. AIHA Lab # 102843, RlCert#AAL-094, CT Cerb#pH-0 1 86, Mass Cert#AA000054. Reviewed By:END OF REPORT oo)(!q og co oo o q)c ozozozozzzozozozozozozozozzozozozozoz @F-ocoF-@(OO::;,{jd;;:iiliSS:i ozozozozozozozozozozoz co (o I'- q I c? I i I I I q u, \ o?-oicao5$ilgiiiip;hg \ o? q u?EeEc g ,.E,E,.E,.E., e .o $lO$rfFS+S6ol$!o!o!(,or d, d ,b;3;B R ig i€ ig igN g B ilrF E?EE=.E888q8.8.??gSEE6dE-foooo@c,dsf,EsE*u!:!:tSe iEi,ri,r,$S E s::rEoEciOciOc,EEtstsgE9gETEEg.g.EEffFFoo66eeee;;EEEE??EEEdt'.'-tggEE,l - E ^.E ..E - E - E = 5 * 5 -S*. g, g.$* : " ? . E . E.o .o E E = = ; ; s 5-5-sEE>'>'EEEEEEEE++EF==66;;99€EcEEEI!.E.co600RREEEEee==i ei rT RT s? ss sT eT *e s? s? -t gg g* ggggg sg si s= sE s= E5 g5 A: e5 EJ g= i E ER ER ER ER ER EF ;n ;F ;F =F EF ; E ;5 EE E5 gE EE 3E EE :E 3E EE EE :t :f :: ::oi i( * N "u X * X ".i i( ni X ni N ni & ..i * o.r .r ".i x n; & g R E R g R g E!ooooooo60066bbbbS9ooo66d6666oooonulLrLEtrtrtrtrtrtrtrEddd u? (o o) s o o (o(o ci(',q sf o C.I Ea-cEEsIEEEEEEEE_oqoo.ooo0O666666o " E* E* E* E* E= E= E= E= E= E= E= E= E= E_ E= g os8=7 lJoFlto.e:e;eo!i6=#d o f fi:'"f lt tr E{S!cootrz- s9ot tt'= 9l O<og,o6 E oS -.1 o.E ='=.998*6Poo cf)ooo,oTL -g:!+o;s q) zl @ e?EO EEENo8'6P>dOi <=€oo- o6-o6g€t;F U):: .vi =oo9r'Eofi6oEqo ts ._:,(ooP <i (f)q $ 5N oBr< Eo ED at 0, +g CL E(!o tr .go 'E*og'tr cLoctr6<a oL o)ol\Cit) 'o, OCsr!6(g =6NO #o-oEoo-z'6= 2.bPOE ozoz ozozoz ozozozzzzzozooooozzzzz CO F. $ q ! ! ! ! C?) t- (l) $ (O F- tr) (o - - o a i i i i + o lrj d ri d; d ri(\rN r@(oOtf)Ol-Oic.idc.i d@$i riri'(f)(o(f)NooNo ozozozozozIls8=6uJOFooI.e*;qo!i6iOJ3o.ozozozozozozozozoz o?c!q9iii o E t- o i i i i ; rri o.i co d s c.i olO)O)(olr)(olr)(o.frcltr)'f E -$6q) @(')(oo@^t\I\$oNoE { E i i i i eEq Ia\ I q E qo o o o3o o6obo o c) o qEEE*68o'iao =EF,H,Hee#fi?;6o.'Etg.a.S.E,,XEAr i -i= *=g8= t=# : g-f, =E =f =F =H ==.== *E *= igE$i$flsHEHgi si sEsg gis$gi slsE gl FOFFOF(JrE Rd RE ad R6 R,3 Rd R(3 Rg Rg R6 R& Ri Rg RE RE Q9909o0006666666qoooqo0666665666t t t x. t t n E d. d. d. d E E d. d. EEtrCtr.CECCCCCECtrC.9EEEEEEEESC€EgEE(E(o(!(!(e(ooro(!(o(!ro(Eioro(o Ee 5e !a !r Er EnIx Es Es !x -Hn !* !s !r Es ! @ (o o) lo ct?o o) O)o (o(o ci(?)q <l <)c\l Eo .D c eo c.)lFoNoC,,oTL oo9SE 3.e5tt tr Ef9otr2- s9oE -o'=oJ o<og,od tr Oa\ -.2 o aE .ts '=-99h-69tt, o 97=gE'E FE bO>Dv o ef, U) =e? =o-EE ENoE'6P >6-(Ur €$Oo - OA-e6€.ct O:#as -yi. =ade*'EOf}EoEEOF <-> f(ooS o(aqs H o3r< ,5 :* (,)g'co.6,E E(u< .t, 9. (Dol\ ,C1.) 0)ocro LX3o =6&o #bi-oEoo-rz'6=2b90E co E 0) = o)t :t tE.EFIgB bEHF, 9I.E=Io E$ltHg,o,aE S *:'H2-o trZ$zJ (Efts3 ;EE_=Z. ;F!!Lo-trtri$ f;dpHP :b'E g+r E sEhi ;gtal s =fg$ E9ffiEh ;aesg IZI)EF_ EET?E E.^Iz:o aoE{qg E6 *E$E, .sE.Fir EB gEEB E$:E5; >:R+6K HPrPeE oEY- (oE b cAtE* ET: tU sl! o oSaeE =2o^- O !,0 Y<o E E ar 6g fiE# g HEBT E g P g iggt SEa;;E [:ii E E IEfi;3e E g Eg{s =d=Eg? >€ d E E"€ F'5 F5;E Ef EtsE: s5 ?E s= €; 6EEi = f,<urE= s5 : nE d e 3 aEE:Ei AEE=-"-9o '= \lE-o=- ET PA? E! g E oz gu?oqn(oocoo NN qo?qq ot,-o)@6I { 5N NN $ E o)N Eg orA\\ .r\ilt" I\,\ I\\l\\{ I \'1 '\ I\, \ I\''\ |\r\ I\Nl\t\t\l I og .Y(uo o0- I =;Do6)N 6c qc\a': F-N(O(o@(o@ h9PE;; v 8.Arr;YEE€:€ete? ==8tiP:e E A?=exrs{sEeE =E-\:'=ErgE'frE?E? -cci -cci -cci SE(f)E(9E(f)JoooooooZ9 Z$Z+tr)gHgFgHg Eoooooooottx.tr lr) c; F,. F- (o(o o COI$ oN cECC.o .9 .o .oYPUP(!o66uuu(J<n Qs- Qo Qo Q(0J(f)J(f)JcoJ ozozozozozozoz.os8=6s0)FooI.ct;"q;=OJ30. *fi5f o c Efgz- s.9o!o lt'=(.,i? (E<oo(a6 E oS -.2 o aE .= '=oo:*69 .no (f)rtsocf)oo,(gTL q) eJa e?59 EEENoB'69 >6- G: E€ Oq)oEoE€ -o o:(uoH*{:_ --i JLo9rr'Eo:)l6(EE E6tr ._5(oU'P o(aq\t 5N 9li=o--^ Etr,='OEE;,O)- o3r< +to CL E(, U' c .E6 '6 rtog'tr cL(I,E Er!<ut 2 o)oI\ .Elo c')octO UJEGs6NO #hi-oEo(E-rz ?bo^ E Itt)uN\.*$\{$t0\, LE6! EdlE €i= !t tJ L €(- @ Eo C L a_ Y ;.qu- . =,\-(fl >a IJJ () a).i-; E @ IJ' oa Io{\-n a: LJ e' s Ur; \ .\-.\\ts \ q' @ g \* L.,' {E; (j ,% s, E o L' a "f\s PNNvr Ss\\ \\ \-.N (J..o\ oro(oqryt-oaoGlr-olr.C'c!No€:oFooN Z j 6 =T L].J E6o v. oaooI Ca6 r- IJ? lJ? -+t o -{t FJ ct E @ @ Itln QI E @ ffi dg HfiL\€ @; HE,&"HHr dg*qE oa.(,tnq, a o G(,o o a. Gq \\lntr\$\I \ \ t $ \ N\) I'vl1A)l\$L) \ a\ \)to\ Y .t t J\t\) t a {a\ t, \^l i \\ \ e\.1 \\\ \)t\ o <l r{ 6\2 al=lSlr=r ISNloYln,l b{IB(/)rilsntr. ir, i: E o G T ct =(to'a a. tro o \.\ SYx h o \ tk\( ;*I i,.l \l \ r.J \t- \ o C\.t oo La N N, l :\):t o\) ooo oo U' auav E lr):(o:OY-*croNON.Eo5,-.4OIo>63->Nt-o(ooFo(oroZ;o =cC l-!.1 j GoE o ooIoto6 <EHEL\3 l-{,r FqENEF{: <H troa.'tro aoo a o G(to -Io s GC" \ rtr$ I $l i \\) \d\, \ , \ \i\ \ \i. oN ootrp)ora\ttrIqf,qtr.o i: E o G E E \ uJ:)\ \4 F\d \ t.4 \ \ \ri]\ b,l\i $ \ aN oooEoo o G, (Eo =o. E IE @ : m otrro:(oxcr)o-'coo:o)6sIJ. EOco>(o<o>oqFiii I-Fttr)f.'PO6 \+t EQulrc, -+l GE F-{ g. c\ o :Eo(o 6 <EHEL\3 |r{o rI][NElrr{; <H 16 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX C Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors Company and Personnel Certifications 17 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX D Laboratory Certifications NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH WADSWORTH CENTER E.x pi rr:;s 12 :() I .:l,M /O.pr ii 0 1. ·20 ·15 issue:! .A.pr il 01 . 2014 CERT IF IC ATE OF APPROVAL FOR LABORATORY SERVICE Issued in accor dance wi th and pursuant to sectioli 502 Public J·l eallh Law of Ne w Yo rk Slaii1 MR. F?.AVI KRISHNAPPA AMERICA SCIEN CE TEAM NEW YOF?K INC 117 EAS T 30TH ST NEW YORK. NY 10016 NY Lab ld No : 11480 is hereby APPROVED as an Environmental Labor atory for the c ategory ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSES SOLID Ali/D HAZARDOUS WASTE All approved s ubcate g ories and/or a na lyte ~; are listed belo w: Mi scellaneous Asbestos in Friable Material Item 190.1 o f Manual EPA 6001M418'1./020 As bestos in Non-Fria hle Ma te ri ai -PLM Item 198.6 ot Manual (N OB by PLM) Asbestos in Non-Fria ble Materi at-TEM llem 198.4 of Manual Serial No.: 50653 Property of Lio)e New Yot1< Stale Depanrnenl of ~eaHr.. Cr:r:i fic ates ,;re •ta lid only a( ttte ;odorc.ss shown. must be conspicuously posted. and are pri111M ·~"secure ~,;,;per. Ccntinu ec ~CCfe<ftt~!i :.n :;e,t•~r ·~~ on succe ssfu l ongoing participation in the Proqrfv'"' ~c:~~.:u":'l ct!; ;'IP· ~!1JCd ie c::u: '~~n ·· .1c:::-:::-: ·· ~: . .,.edfy the labora tory's 3Ccre ditat lor ~ta'.US PaQe 1 of 1 June 1 1, 2013 Mr. Paul Mucha Amerioa Science TEAM New York, Inc. DBA: AmeriSci New York 117 E. 30th Street New York, NY 10016 Dear Mr. Mucha: UI{ITED sTATE8 DEPARTMEI{T OF COMMERGE Natlonal Inrtltuto of Stendardr and Tochnoloty Gaithersburg, lVlaryland 20899 NWAP Lab Code:200546-0 ,'s[\o"w; I am pleased to inform you that continuing accreditation for specific test methods in Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis (PLM) is granted to your organization under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (|IWAP). This accreditation is effective until June 30,2014, provided that your organization continues to comply with accreditation requirements contained in the NVLAp Procedures. Your Certificate ofAccreditation is enclosed along with a statement ofyour Scope ofAccreditation. You may reproduce these documents in their entirety and announce your organization's accreditation status using the NVLAP symbol and/or term in business publications, the trade press, and other business-oriented literature. Accreditation does not relieve your organization from observing and complying with any applicable existing laws and/or regulations. We are pleased to have you participate in NVLAP and look forward to your oontinued association with this program. If you have any questions conceming your NVLAP accreditation, please direct them to Hazel M, Riohmond, Program Manager, Laboratory Accreditation Program, National lnstitute of Standards and Technology, 100BureauDr. Stop 2140, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140; (301) 97s-40r6. Sincerely, {41* il.,tft.l$ Wanen R. Merkel, Chief Laboratory Acoreditation Program Enclosure(s) NIST/NVLAP.'100 Bureau Drlve, Stop 2140. Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140 hltp://www,nlst. gov/nvlapNv[Ap Nrsr Nv[aa BULK ASBESTOS FIBER ANALYSIS (PLM) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program SCOPE OF ACCREDITATION TO ISO/IEC 1702522005 AmeriSci New York DBA: AmeriSci New York 117 E. 30th Sheet New York, NY 10016 Mr. Paul Mucha Phone:.212-679-8600 Fax: 212-679-27 1l E-Mail : pmucha@amerisci.com U RL: http://www.amerisci.com .*"on"w""'%u"ffi'-; NVI-zIP CoIIe l8/A0l 18/A03 2013 -07 -01 through 20 1 4-06-30 {4l; fl {,t't"l$ For the National lnstitute of Standards and Technology NVLAP LAB CODE 200546-0 Designation / Des cription EPA 600/M4-82-020: lnterim Method for tle Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples EPA 600/R-93/1 16: Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Buildins Materials Page 1 of 1 Effective dates NVLAP-0'IS (REV. 2005-05-19) Iultr(!zOJe,q)(go!(!q e (! * !) ,P .l#l 1 FSNbVi R€o x6.a Fi * osa'u s*8 € AoNp {slu >..i *g - CsrpI g €F& : a E6,i F > =r' b -.1 ;:Eo Sx <.EEgg # iIzFsFE 5 ES<EFFR )r5. EEfrit,Q H Ei $$Es5t 6 zE F€ rr Rrq :'54 E$3it+T *E !.HE:H8 ;62 *e3:BE t e SEdp;x2 - ;EF VEI: * Ft .sEEt = E8g.e ;sE:o:- c\ ^\=o ^ xxi E i.r8 $ *FEd EE-.E F- lfr)oofl!oNo N F o IJJ I o I o tF, e i- .9+,(E.ts EoLoo rtso o {r,(uo IEtl- E l-oo @/ \lt=lp ___Jl I\-_J I zl ct,o :to o,stroEfl -Qo tF(5oo =E o(EtrE' FSa-u, Q) rroo ^*d--1". AFffi!t*T:-*' 0) (E'c I 'P TU ooots s.Eoo o-E(E CCf.9 (Ez + N bo c\ c'l 18 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX E Bulk Sample Location Drawing 19 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com APPENDIX F Bulk Sample Results from Previous Delta Sampling Efforts Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2012.010.012 - 01A 01 G 2' x 2' Drop-in Heavy Textured Ceiling Tile - Room G00CD Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 01B 01 G 2' x 2' Drop-in Heavy Textured Ceiling Tile - Room G00JA Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 01C 01 1 2' x 2' Drop-in Heavy Textured Ceiling Tile - Room 130 Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 02A 02 G Drywall - Wall, Room G00CD Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 02B 02 G Drywall - Wall, Room 38C Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 02C 02 1 Drywall - Wall, Room 130 Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 03A 03 G Joint Compound - Wall, Room G00CD Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 03B 03 G Joint Compound - Wall, Room 38C Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 03C 03 1 Joint Compound - Wall, Room 130 Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 04A 04 G Black Mastic on Concrete Decking - Room G38 Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 04B 04 G Black Mastic on Concrete Decking - Room G38B Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 04C 04 G Black Mastic on Concrete Decking - Room G50 Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 05A 05 1 2' x 2' Fissured Ceiling Tile - Room 143 Miscellaneous ND ND ND 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2012.010.012 Asbestos Inspector: Robert E. Mosher Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Cornell Contract No.: C12006 Dates Sampling Performed: 02/28/12-02/29/12 Date of Report: 03/07/12 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Project: Cornell Campus Telecommunication Cabling Systems Project - 120 Maple Ave. Phase 1 Wall/Ceiling Systems Limited ACM Survey Number of Samples Collected: 29 Number Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 16/TEM - 13 Campus Telecom Cabling Systems Proj 120 Maple Avenue Bldg 3010B Wall/Ceiling Asbestos Survey 1 of 3 Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2012.010.012 Asbestos Inspector: Robert E. Mosher Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Cornell Contract No.: C12006 Dates Sampling Performed: 02/28/12-02/29/12 Date of Report: 03/07/12 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Project: Cornell Campus Telecommunication Cabling Systems Project - 120 Maple Ave. Phase 1 Wall/Ceiling Systems Limited ACM Survey Number of Samples Collected: 29 Number Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 16/TEM - 13 2012.010.012 - 05B 05 1 2' x 2' Fissured Ceiling Tile - Room 143 Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 06A 06 1 Top Coat Wall Plaster - Room 100TC Surfacing ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 06B 06 1 Top Coat Wall Plaster - Room 100TC Surfacing ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 06C 06 1 Top Coat Wall Plaster - Room 100TC Surfacing ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 07A 07 1 Base Coat Wall Plaster - Room 100TC Surfacing ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 07B 07 1 Base Coat Wall Plaster - Room 100TC Surfacing ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 07C 07 3 Base Coat Wall Plaster - Room 100TC Surfacing ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 08A 08 1 2' x 2' Pinhole Ceiling Tile - Room 100TD Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 08B 08 2 2' x 2' Pinhole Ceiling Tile - Room 100TD Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 09A 09 2 4"x 4" Green Ceramic Wall Tile Grout - Room 100TD Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 09B 09 1 4"x 4" Green Ceramic Wall Tile Grout - Room 100TD Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 10A 10 1 4"x 4" Green Ceramic Wall Tile Mortar Bed - Room 100TD Miscellaneous ND ND NA 2012.010.012 - 10B 10 1 4"x 4" Green Ceramic Wall Tile Mortar Bed - Room 100TD Miscellaneous ND ND NA Campus Telecom Cabling Systems Proj 120 Maple Avenue Bldg 3010B Wall/Ceiling Asbestos Survey 2 of 3 Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2012.010.012 Asbestos Inspector: Robert E. Mosher Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Cornell Contract No.: C12006 Dates Sampling Performed: 02/28/12-02/29/12 Date of Report: 03/07/12 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Project: Cornell Campus Telecommunication Cabling Systems Project - 120 Maple Ave. Phase 1 Wall/Ceiling Systems Limited ACM Survey Number of Samples Collected: 29 Number Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 16/TEM - 13 2012.010.012 - 11A 11 1 2' x 2' Textured Fissured Ceiling Tile - Room 100SE Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 11B 11 2 2' x 2' Textured Fissured Ceiling Tile - Room 200SE Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2012.010.012 - 11C 11 2 2' x 2' Textured Fissured Ceiling Tile - Room 200J Miscellaneous ND ND ND HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Campus Telecom Cabling Systems Proj 120 Maple Avenue Bldg 3010B Wall/Ceiling Asbestos Survey 3 of 3 Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 3010B - 01A 01 1 Brown Spray-on - Room G41 Ceiling, Center Surfacing ND ND NA 3010B - 01B 01 1 Brown Spray-on - Room G41 Ceiling, Center Surfacing ND ND NA 3010B - 01C 01 1 Brown Spray-on - Room G41 Ceiling, Center Surfacing ND ND NA 3010B - 02A 02 1 Tan 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Storage Area, South Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 02B 02 1 Tan 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Storage Area, South Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 03A 03 1 Black Mastic from Tan 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Storage Area, South Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 03B 03 1 Black Mastic from Tan 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Storage Area, South Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 04A 04 1 Gray 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Vestibule, North West Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 04B 04 1 Gray 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Vestibule, North West Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 05A 05 1 Black Mastic from Gray 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Vestibule, NW Misc.Trace 1.5% 3010B - 05B 06 1 Black Mastic from Gray 12"x12" Mottled Floor Tile - 1st Floor Vestibule, NW Misc.Trace NA/PS 3010B - 06A 06 1 Green Sink Counter mastic - Outside Room 170A Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 06B 06 1 Green Sink Counter mastic - Outside Room 170A Misc.ND ND ND 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2014.030.097 Asbestos Inspector: Robert Mosher HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 23 / TEM - 19 Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Work Order No.: 6879706 Dates Sampling Performed: 4/1/14 Date of Report: 4/8/14 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 23 Chrysotile Number Sample Project: 120 Maple Avenue CIT Renovation Project Asbestos Survey Building Code: 3010B Cornell University 120 Maple Ave. CIT Renovations Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey 1 of 2 Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2014.030.097 Asbestos Inspector: Robert Mosher HA*Floor www.deltaengineers.com Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 23 / TEM - 19 Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Work Order No.: 6879706 Dates Sampling Performed: 4/1/14 Date of Report: 4/8/14 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Number of Samples Collected: 23 Number Sample Project: 120 Maple Avenue CIT Renovation Project Asbestos Survey Building Code: 3010B 3010B - 07A 07 1 Black Sink Coating - Outside Room 170A Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 07B 07 1 Black Sink Coating - Outside Room 170A Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 08A 08 G Gray Duct Sealant - Room G37, Central Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 08B 08 G Gray Duct Sealant - Room G37, Central Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 09A 09 G Yellow Carpet Mastic - Room G41, West Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 09B 09 G Yellow Carpet Mastic - Room G41, West Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 10A 10 G Tan Cove base Mastic - Room G41, West Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 10B 10 1 Tan Cove base Mastic - 1st Floor Storage Room, Central Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 11A 11 G Green Carpet Mastic - Room G34, West Misc.ND ND ND 3010B - 11B 11 G Green Carpet Mastic - Room G34, West Misc.ND ND ND HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Cornell University 120 Maple Ave. CIT Renovations Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey 2 of 2 11TOILET200TCJAN200JTOILET200TOCORRIDOR200CDMECHANICALROOMOFFICE SUITE272OFFICE272ASTAIR200SD2243MECHANICALCHASEMECHANICALSHAFTTHESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS ANDPLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY ANDREMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING &LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZEDBY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVEREXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE,ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ©387 East Main StreetRochester, NY 14604-2107Voice: 585.232.8300Fax: 585.232.9221w w w . s w b r . c o mFILE PATH:DRAWING TITLEproj. no.checkedproj. mgr.drawn by ISSUE DATEDRAWING NO.PROJECT:CLIENT:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/6/2014 10:21:34 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvt13465.00SDF05/07/14SECOND FLOORDEMOLITION PLANSDFKMSCORNELL UNIVERSITY120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTUREPLACEMENTAD1A-100A 1/4" = 1'-0"1SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLANDEMOLITION NOTESNO. DESCRIPTION1 REMOVE ACT CEILING TILE ASSEMBLY, GRID SYSTEM, ASSOCIATEDSUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES. SALVAGE LIGHTS AND SMOKEDETECTOR IN CORRIDOR 200CD FOR REINSTALLATION IN NEWCEILING. PROVIDE TEMPORARY HEAT DETECTOR TO MAINTAINCOVERAGE DURING CONSTRUCTION.2 PROVIDE OPENING AND LINTEL IN EXISTING MASONRY WALLCONSTRUCTION FOR NEW DUCT PENETRATION. COORDINATE WITHMECHANICAL DRAWINGS.3 PROVIDE FRAMED OPENING IN EXISTING METAL STUD WALLCONSTRUCTION FOR NEW DUCT PENETRATION. COORDINATE WITHMECHANICAL DRAWINGS.4 REMOVE TOP OF BRICK MASONRY WALL TO ACCOMMODATE NEWDUCTWORK. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS.(1/A-100)NORTH MECHANICALROOMTOILET200TCTOILET200TOJAN200JCORRIDOR200CDSTAIR200SDOFFICE272AOFFICE SUITE27228' - 4"18' - 0"E28' - 4"E28' - 4"E210' - 0"E18' - 4"E18' - 4"210' - 1"+/- 4' - 7 1/2"5A-100MECHCHASEMECHANICALSHAFT5A-100SIMEXISTING SKYLIGHTALIGNREMOVE AND REINSTALLEXISTING SUSPENDEDACT CEILING TILE ANDGRID TO FACILITATEINSTALLATION OFDUCTWORK AND PIPINGTHESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS ANDPLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY ANDREMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING &LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZEDBY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVEREXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE,ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ©387 East Main StreetRochester, NY 14604-2107Voice: 585.232.8300Fax: 585.232.9221w w w . s w b r . c o mFILE PATH:DRAWING TITLEproj. no.checkedproj. mgr.drawn by ISSUE DATEDRAWING NO.PROJECT:CLIENT:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/6/2014 12:32:56 PMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvt13465.00SDF05/07/14SECOND FLOORREFLECTED CEILINGPLANSDFKMSCORNELL UNIVERSITY120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTUREPLACEMENTAD1A-100B 1/4" = 1'-0"4SECOND FLOOR RCP(4/A-100)NORTH 4" 20GA METAL C-HSTUDS @ 24" OCFACE OF EXISTINGMASONRY WALL(NORTH) /FACE OF EXISTINGMETAL STUD & GWBWALL (EAST)2-HR RATEDSHAFTWALL ASSEMBLYPER NER 2581/2" GYPSUM PANELS,FIRECODE C CORE, PAINTLINE OF EXISTINGCONCRETE DECK ABOVECORNERREINFORCEMENT1" GYPSUM LINERPANELPOWER-ACTUATEDFASTENERS 12" OCPOWER-ACTUATEDFASTENERS 12" OCSEALANTMETAL TRIMSUSPENDED ACTCEILING ASSEMBLY,SEE RCP2-HR RATEDSHAFTWALL ASSEMBLYPER NER 258EXISTING ENCASEDSTEEL BEAM+/- 1"THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS ANDPLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY ANDREMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING &LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZEDBY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVEREXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE,ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ©387 East Main StreetRochester, NY 14604-2107Voice: 585.232.8300Fax: 585.232.9221w w w . s w b r . c o mFILE PATH:DRAWING TITLEproj. no.checkedproj. mgr.drawn by ISSUE DATEDRAWING NO.PROJECT:CLIENT:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/6/2014 10:21:09 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvt13465.00SDF05/07/14SOFFIT DETAILSDFKMSCORNELL UNIVERSITY120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTUREPLACEMENTAD1A-100C 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5SOFFIT DETAIL(5/A-100) 6AD1 A-120BCOORD4' - 4"**ENCASED STEEL BEAM****ENCASED STEEL BEAM**C6x8.2C6x8.2C6x8.2COORD5' - 0"10'-0" +/- COORDCOORD2' - 6 3/8"EXIST ROOFOPENINGLOCATIONROOF OPENINGLOCATIONTHESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS ANDPLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY ANDREMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING &LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZEDBY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVEREXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE,ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ©387 East Main StreetRochester, NY 14604-2107Voice: 585.232.8300Fax: 585.232.9221w w w . s w b r . c o mFILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE ISSUE DATEPROJECT:CLIENT:proj. no.checkedproj. mgr.drawn byDRAWING NO.ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/6/2014 9:56:49 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvt05/07/14PARTIAL ROOFFRAMING PLANCORNELL UNIVERSITY120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTUREPLACEMENT13465.00SDFSDFMPWAD1A-120A 1/4" = 1'-0"5PARTIAL ROOF FRAMING PLAN(5/A-120) REMOVE EXISTCONCRETE AS REQ'D TOEXPOSE EXIST STEELFRAMING. UPON CHANNELINSTALLATION, PATCHSOLID W/ REPAIRMORTAR FLUSH W/ EXISTCONCRETE (TYP)INSTALL STEELCHANNEL TIGHT TOEXIST ROOF SLABL3x3x1/4 CLIP ANGLE,TYP EACH ENDEXIST ROOF SLABEXIST CONCRETEENCASED STEEL BEAM,FIELD VERIFY EXACTLOCATIONB.O. ROOF SLABEL = FIELD VERIFY.3/16TYPSAWCUT AND REMOVE EXISTINGCONCRETE ROOF SLAB FORSUPPLY DUCT. COORD SIZE ANDLOCATIONS W/ MECH DRAWINGSVIFSTEEL CHANNELSHIM TIGHT TOSUPPORT EDGEOF CLOSURE PLSEE 3/A-120 FORCLOSURE PL ANDATTACHMENTINFORMATION.3/16 2@12THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS ANDPLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY ANDREMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING &LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZEDBY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVEREXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE,ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ©387 East Main StreetRochester, NY 14604-2107Voice: 585.232.8300Fax: 585.232.9221w w w . s w b r . c o mFILE PATH:DRAWING TITLEproj. no.checkedproj. mgr.drawn by ISSUE DATEDRAWING NO.PROJECT:CLIENT:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/6/2014 9:56:31 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvt13465.00SDF05/07/14SECTION AT ROOFFRAMED OPENINGSDFMPWCORNELL UNIVERSITY120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTUREPLACEMENTAD1A-120B 1" = 1'-0"6SECTION AT ROOF FRAMED OPENING(6/A-120) ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' EXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY AND THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS AND 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE ISSUE DATE PROJECT: CLIENT: proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn byDRAWING NO. ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/2/2014 9:44:15 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTU 13465.00 JAD REFRIGERANT DISPOSAL/NEW INSTALLATION: CORNELL UNIVERSITY DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTOIN STANDARDS SECTION 15650 REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS. ANSI/ASHRAE 147-2002: REDUCING THE RELEASE OF HALOGENATED REFRIGERANTS FROM ANSI/ASHRAE 15-2010: SAFETY STANDARD FOR REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS CONTROL SUBCHAPTER 6, STRATOSPHERIC OZONE PROTECTION (EPA CLEAN AIR ACT). UNITED STATES CODE (USC) TITLE 42, CHAPTER 85: AIR POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFP) TITLE 40: PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT 5.) 4.) 3.) 2.) 1.) EQUIPMENT CONTAINING REFRIGERANTS, INCLUDING THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COMPLETE EQUIPMENT DOCUMENTATION FOR EACH PIECE OF REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS: 9.) 8.) 7.) 6.) 5.) 4.) 3.) 2.) 1.) ACTUAL SYSTEM CHARGE, PER CIRCUIT (IN POUNDS) TYPE OF REFRIGERANT EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER, MODEL NUMBER, SERIAL NUMBER TYPE OF EQUIPMENT TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION LEVEL, WITH A COPY OF CERTIFICATION CARD NAME OF EPA CERTIFIED TECHNICIAN DATE OF INSTALLATION/ACCEPTANCE (FOR WARRANTY) EQUIPMENT LOCATION EQUIPMENT ID TAG NUMBER C. B. A. EPA CERTIFIED RECLAIMER. PROJECT BY THE CONTRACTOR WAS DISPOSED OF APPROPRIATELY OR RECLAIMED BY AN OTHER DOCUMENTATION DEMONSTRATING THAT ANY REFRIGERANT REMOVED FROM THE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO PROVIDE A COPY OF COMPLETE MANIFESTS, INVOICES, OR INSTALLATION NOTES DISPOSAL/NEW REFRIGERATION H-000a AD1 CEF CEF 05/07/14 ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' EXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY AND THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS AND 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE ISSUE DATE PROJECT: CLIENT: proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn byDRAWING NO. ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/2/2014 9:44:15 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTU 13465.00 JAD 1 36x26TAP BELLMOUTH 45 DEG. HWP-1 23 FDFD TO 1ST FLOOR 36x26 DN UP TO RTU-2 2" GS & GR 48x16 RISER TO 54x40 CONNECTION 40x20 200SD 272A 200CD 200TD DN (E)48x16 NORTH 0SCALE: 1/4"=1’-0"2’4’8’ PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC NEW WORK HVAC NEW WORK FLOOR PLAN - PARTIAL SECOND H-201a AD1 CEF CEF 05/07/14 TO RTU-2 54x40 UP ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' EXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY AND THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS AND 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE ISSUE DATE PROJECT: CLIENT: proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn byDRAWING NO. ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/2/2014 9:44:15 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTU 13465.00 JAD H-202a AD1 CEF CEF 05/07/14 D 60x36 ROOF OPENING DOWN THROUGH EXISTING NEW 50x24 RA DUCT PIPING RL & RS RTU-2 1 2 3 4 5 36x60 FAN (E)EXHAUST (E)42x16 LOUVER (E)72x66 DN (E)42x16 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’0 16’4’8’ PARTIAL ROOF PLAN - HVAC NEW WORK NEW WORK PLAN - HVAC PARTIAL ROOF ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' EXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY AND THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS AND 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE ISSUE DATE PROJECT: CLIENT: proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn byDRAWING NO. ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/2/2014 9:44:15 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTU 13465.00 JAD H-202b AD1 CEF CEF 05/07/14 GENERAL NOTES GENERAL NOTES: FULLY FUNCTIONAL BEFORE DISCONNECTING/REMOVING RTU-2. TO STARTING WORK ON RTU-2. THE RTU-1 SYSTEM SHALL BE WORK ASSOCIATED WITH RTU-1 SHALL BE PERFORMED PRIORA. ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' EXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY AND THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS AND 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE ISSUE DATE PROJECT: CLIENT: proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn byDRAWING NO. ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/2/2014 9:44:15 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTU 13465.00 JAD DEMOLITION NOTES: 1 2 3 SALVAGE CIRCUIT FOR EXTENSION TO NEW LIGHT FIXTURE. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE FROM DROP CEILING AND FEEDERS AND CONTROL DEVICES BACK TO SOURCE. AHU-2 IS FED FROM PANEL PP. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL POWER FEEDERS AND CONTROL DEVICES BACK TO SOURCE. AHU-3 AND RF-3 ARE FED FROM PANEL PP. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL POWER 1 M HWP-1 SDDSD RTS 3 1 200J 200SD 200CD 200TD DN E-101a AD1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION & SECOND FLOORS - PARTIAL GROUND, FIRST MRG MRG 05/07/14 S (ER) ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' EXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY AND THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS AND 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE ISSUE DATE PROJECT: CLIENT: proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn byDRAWING NO. ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/2/2014 9:44:15 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTU 13465.00 JAD ELECTRICAL FLOOR & ROOF PL AN - PARTIAL SECOND MRG MRG 05/07/14 E-201a AD1 DRAWING NOTES: 1 2 3 4 LIGHTING CIRCUIT TO NEW WALL MOUNTED FIXTURE LOCATION. PROVIDE NEW WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE. EXTEND EXISTING STAIRWELL DEVICES BEING REMOVED AND INSTALL IN THEIR PLACE. COORDINATE LOCATION OF NEW DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS WITH EXISTING SMOKE DAMPER LOCATION TO NEW SMOKE DAMPER LOCATIONS. SPARE ON SECOND FLOOR. PROVIDE NEW CONDUIT AND WIRING FROM EXISTING CONNECT NEW SMOKE DAMPERS INTO EXISTING SMOKE DAMPER CIRCUIT MADE PROVIDE NEW 20A-1P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING SQUARE D PANEL BOARD. 1 M HWP-1 DSD SD 2 FS1 4 1 200SD 200CD 200TD DN RTS S (ER) ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' EXCEPT WITH THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, ENGINEERING & PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE OWNED BY AND THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS AND 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by ISSUE DATE DRAWING NO. PROJECT: CLIENT: ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K5/2/2014 9:43:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvt13465.00 CORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE AVENUE - RTU JAD SCHEDULELUMINAIRE TYPE DESCRIPTION AND SIZEFIXTURE LAMP BALLAST VOLTAGE/ RDIFFUSE REFLECTOR/ NUMBER MODEL AND MANUFACTURERAPPROVED NOTES FS1 BACKUP BATTERY AND SENSOR MOTIONULTRASONIC WITH LUMINAIRE STAIRWELL MOUNTED WALL1’X4’(2)-32WT8 BALLASTELEC 120/277V STL2-5-UNV MODEL:SURE-LITES 1 NOTES:GENERAL 3500K. BE SHALL LAMPS ALLA. NOTES:REFERENCE COLOR. FOR ARCHITECT WITH COORDINATE1. 1 & DETAILS SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL E-401a AD1 05/07/14 MRG MRG H-000 JRM CEF SCHEDULES - HVAC SYMBOLS LIST, & GENERAL NOTES, GENERAL PIPING NOTES: GENERAL DUCTWORK NOTES: REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR. PIPING AS NECESSARY TO AVOID RIBS. ANY RIBS DAMAGED BY CONTRACTOR WILL NEED TO BE PIPE PENETRATIONS MUST FALL WITHIN CONCRETE BLOCKS, AVOID CONCRETE BEAM RIBS. OFFSET SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. FIRESTOP ALL PENETRATIONS. CONSTRUCTION, OFF SITE IN PROPER LEGAL MANNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION AND/OR OTHER WASTE MATERIALS CAUSED BY WITH SHEETMETAL, EQUIPMENT AND ALL OTHER TRADES. AROUND DUCTWORK AND OTHER SERVICES. COORDINATE ALL WORK PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION PIPING IS SHOWN SCHEMATICALLY. RUN PIPING WITHIN JOIST SPACING AND OFFSET AS REQUIRED COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. CLEARANCES AND ENSURE NO OTHER SERVICES OR TRADES RUN THROUGH SERVICE AREA. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. ADVISE OTHER TRADES OF SERVICE F. E. D. C. B. A. R. Q. P. O. N. M. L. K. J. I. H. G. F. E. D. C. B. A. RIBS DAMAGED BY CONTRACTOR WILL NEED TO BE REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR. DUCTWORK AS NECESSARY TO AVOID RIBS. DUCTWORK MAY NEED TO BE SPLIT AS REQUIRED. ANY DUCT PENETRATIONS MUST FALL WITHIN CONCRETE BLOCKS, AVOID CONCRETE BEAM RIBS. OFFSET ALL TRANSFER DUCTWORK TO BE LINED WITH ACOUSTIC THERMAL DUCT LINING. ALL DUCT DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE INSIDE DIMENSIONS. WITHIN CEILING GRIDS. REFER TO "A" SERIES DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS OF REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS MAINTENANCE OR ADJUSTMENT ABOVE GYPSUM CEILINGS. DO NOT LOCATE VOLUME DAMPERS, VALVES OR ANY OTHER DEVICES REQUIRING VOLUME DAMPER HANDLE. LET RIBBON HANG ABOVE CEILING. PROVIDE 1" WIDE x 2’-0" LONG RED RIBBON AT EACH VOLUME DAMPER. TIE RIBBON TO WHEN FAN IS ENERGIZED, DAMPER OPENS FULLY. ALL AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPERS SHALL BE WIRED THROUGH MOTOR STARTER SUCH THAT WHERE DUCTS PASS ABOVE EACH OTHER, OFFSET AS REQUIRED INTO BEAM SPACE. FOR PIPING REQUIREMENTS REFER TO PIPING PLANS. MOUNT ALL SENSORS 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. OFF SITE IN A PROPER LEGAL MANNER. DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLITION AND/OR OTHER WASTE MATERIALS CAUSED BY CONSTRUCTION ACCORDANCE WITH FIRE DAMPER DETAIL AND MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER AT ALL LOCATIONS WITH "FD". INSTALL FIRE DAMPER IN STRICT THROUGH ACCESS AREA. MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. ENSURE NO OTHER SERVICES RUN DUCT. FLEXIBLE DUCT MAXIMUM LENGTH IS 48", AS PER THE SPECIFICATIONS. DIFFUSER CONNECTIONS TO BRANCH DUCT TO BE FULL NECK SIZE INSULATED FLEXIBLE TURNING VANES. TURNING VANES SHALL BE OMITTED FROM TRANSFER DUCT ELBOWS. ALL 90 DEGREE RECTANGULAR ELBOWS AND DUCTWORK TEES TO BE HARD MITRE WITH SHUT DOWN FEES. COORDINATE ALL SHUT DOWNS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. PAY ALL REQUIRED WITH OTHER SERVICES. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL DUCTWORK ROUTES, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES ALL PENETRATIONS. SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRE STOPPING FOR DUCT CONTINUED DOUBLE LINE RECTANGULAR T T E PNEUMATIC/ELECTRIC THERMOSTAT AIR FLOW NTS NOT TO SCALE PIPE ANCHOR (DBL) PIPE GUIDE CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE EXPANSION COMPENSATOR WITH GUIDES AD ACCESS DOOR PRE-FAB EXPANSION LOOP P.C.PLUMBING CONTRACTOR STRAINER N.O.NORMALLY OPEN PRESSURE GAUGE DSD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR THERMOMETER H HUMIDISTAT UNION AIR VENTV ROUND DUCT - IN INCHES12" TT THERMOSTATIC TRAP SQUARE TO ROUND TRANSITION FT FLOAT & THERMOSTATIC TRAP UP OR DOWN RETURN DUCT TURNING 24x12 10x8 DN UP DN UP TD THERMODYNAMIC TRAP10"14" TEE CONICAL 8"18"ROUND BRANCH ROUND MAIN SUPPLY/RETURN BT BUCKET TRAP REGISTER OR GRILLE RETURN OR EXHAUST DIRECTION OF FLOW VOLUME DAMPER BBD BOILER BLOW DOWN CWS CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CWR CHILLED WATER RETURN D DRAIN FUEL OIL FILLFOF FUEL OIL GAUGEFOG FOS FUEL OIL SUPPLY FOR FUEL OIL RETURN FOV FUEL OIL TANK VENT G GAS GLYCOL SUPPLYGS GLYCOL RETURNGR HWS HOT WATER SUPPLY HWR HOT WATER RETURN HG HOT GAS LPS LOW PRESSURE STEAM LPC LOW PRESSURE CONDENSATE MPS MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM MPC MEDIUM PRESSURE CONDENSATE HPS HIGH PRESSURE STEAM HPC HIGH PRESSURE CONDENSATE PC PUMPED CONDENSATE RD REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE RL REFRIGERANT LIQUID RS REFRIGERANT SUCTION VAC VACUUM CW DOMESTIC COLD WATER EXISTING WORK TO BE REMOVED SINGLE LINE PIPE OR DUCT CONTINUED ROUND DUCT CONTINUED DOUBLE LINE PIPE OR MBH THOUSAND BTU/HOUR (E)EXISTING FPM FEET PER MINUTE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR G.C.GENERAL CONTRACTOR E.C.ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR N.C.NORMALLY CLOSED S TEMPERATURE SENSOR DUCT TAKEOFFSSINGLE LINE DOUBLE LINE UP OR DOWN SUPPLY DUCT TURNING 24x12 10x8 DN UPUPDN 10x88x6 24x1214x8 TAP 6" BOOT RECTANGULAR BRANCH RECTANGULAR MAIN SUPPLY/RETURN 10"14" 8"18"ROUND BRANCH ROUND MAIN SUPPLY/RETURN LATERAL SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK COMPRESSED AIRA CAP OR PLUG ELBOW DOWN ELBOW UP AAD AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER FD FIRE DAMPER SD SMOKE DAMPER BDD BACK DRAFT DAMPER M MOTORIZED DAMPER BALL VALVE GATE VALVE CHECK VALVE BALANCING VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE SAFETY RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVEPRV CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUG HVAC SYMBOL LIST (L)ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING - 1" THICK (2L)ACOUSTIC THERMAL LINING - 2" THICK M.C.MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR W/W WALL TO WALL T G S THERMOSTAT/SENSOR WITH GUARDG DUCT SECTION - SUPPLY DUCT SECTION - RETURN WIDTH A x DEPTH B A B R R DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW RISE IN DUCT - IN D D DIRECTION OF AIRFLOW DROP IN DUCT - IN 10x824x1214" TAP 6" BOOT ROUND BRANCH RECTANGULAR MAIN SUPPLY/RETURN8" BG BLAST GATE FIN TUBE RADIATION VALANCE A B C C = CFM B = NECK SIZE A = TYPE REGISTER, GRILLE OR DIFFUSER TAG A B C D D = HEATING GPM C = COOLING GPM B = COIL SIZE A = TYPE VALANCE TAG POINT OF CONNECTION POINT OF DISCONNECTION BOTTOM TAP TRIPLE DUTY VALVETD GLOBE VALVE THREE WAY CONTROL VALVE SUCTION DIFFUSERSD CAP AND CHAIN DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE CONNECTION, FC FLEX CONNECTOR - DUCTWORK DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL DESCRIPTIONSYMBOL FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR - PIPING A B C C = MINIMUM CFM B = MAXIMUM CFM A = UNIT NO. AIR TERMINAL UNIT TAG (OPTION 2) FO AxB DUCT SECTION - FLAT OVAL (FO) V VENT WATER FLOW SENSOR VSD BASE MOUNTED PUMP IN LINE PUMP WELL PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR AVERAGING SENSOR VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE COOLING COIL C C PROBE SENSOR E ELECTRIC ACTUATOR AIR FLOW SENSOR FS A S F R P DO DI AI AO DIGITAL INPUT (GENERAL) DIGITAL OUTPUT (GENERAL) ANALOG INPUT (GENERAL) ANALOG OUTPUT (GENERAL) ALARM STATUS FLOW SWITCH RELAY PRESSURE SWITCH DIFFERENTIAL STATIC FZ EXHAUST AIR OUTSIDE AIR RETURN AIR SUPPLY AIR FREEZE-STAT EA OA RA SA (OPPOSED BLADE) AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER HUMIDIFIER DISPERSIAN TUBE REGISTER OR GRILLE THREE WAY THROW SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE TWO WAY THROW SUPPLY DIFFUSER, REGISTER OR GRILLE ONE WAY THROW SUPPLY DIFFUSER, E P PE CT C O S S D E H F P P I E I CURRENT TRANSDUCER START/STOP ENABLE/DISABLE ELECTRICAL INTERFACE H C HEATING COIL FILTER S TRANSDUCER ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER ELECTRONIC/ELECTRIC OR RELAY ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC SWITCH OR RELAY PNEUMATIC/ELECTRIC SWITCH PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (DUCT MOUNTED) HUMIDITY SENSOR FLOW TRANSMITTER G B GAS BURNER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DIFFERENTIAL STATICP OPEN/CLOSE OR PIPE MOUNTED) TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DUCT (PARALLEL BLADE) AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER M MAIN CONTROL AIR (TEMP. CONTROL) I ELECTRONIC INTERFACE H HUMIDIFIER ES END SWITCH SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION FD/SD COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER DOUBLE WALL LINED DUCT- 3" THICK MTHWS MEDIUM TEMPERATURE HOT WATER SUPPLY (COGEN) MTHWR MEDIUM TEMPERATURE HOT WATER RETURN (COGEN) CO2 CARBON DIOXIDE TRANSMITTER M FLOW METER OS OCCUPANCY SENSOR M MOISTURE SENSOR SW SOFTEN WATER HPWS HPWR HEAT PUMP WATER SUPPLY HEAT PUMP WATER RETURN TCS FAN COIL UNIT COOLING SUPPLY TCR FAN COIL UNIT COOLING RETURN THS FAN COIL UNIT HEATING SUPPLY THR FAN COIL UNIT HEATING RETURN SF RF EF SUPPLY AIR FAN RETURN AIR FAN EXHAUST AIR FAN CO CARBON MONOXIDE TRANSMITTER E E ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE (3-WAY) ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE (2-WAY) B C D D = GPM C = ENCLOSURE LENGTH B = FIN TUBE LENGTH FT-A = TYPE RADIANT CEILING PANEL TAG FIN TUBE RADIATION/ FT-A RADIANT CEILING PANEL PS TS TEMPERATURE SENSOR PRESSURE SENSOR A AIR TERMINAL UNIT AND TAG (OPTION 1) AIR TERMINAL UNIT X"LAB AIR VALVE FACTORY ATTENUATOR AIR TERMINAL UNIT WITH X" FACTORY SOUND ATTENUATOR LAB AIR VALVE WITH SERVICE CLEARANCE P PRESSURE SWITCH CO CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR CONDENSING UNIT WATER SUPPLYCS CR CONDENSING UNIT WATER RETURN FILTER BANK PS PUMP SPEED CO2 DIOXIDE SENSOR WALL MOUNTED CARBON FS FAN SPEED SW SPEED SWITCH WALL MOUNTED FAN COIL DS DRIVE SPEED SCHEDULEPUMP NO.PUMP LOCATION SERVICE DESCRIPTION & TYPEUNIT CAPACITYPUMP CHARACTERISTICSMOTOR In.)(DIA. SIZE IMPELLER BHP MAX. SIZES DISCHARGE &SUCTION No. MODEL &MANUFACTURER REMARKS (GPM) FLOW FEETIN HEADTOTAL RPM HP VOLTS PHASE STARTER HWP-1 200TD RMTOILET COIL HEATINGRTU-2 INLINE 72 20 1750 1 480 3 26 DIVBY 4.625 0.8 2"/2" 2x5-1/4 SIZE 60 SERIES GOSSETT &BELL WATER /HOT DX - SCHEDULE UNIT HANDLING AIR ROOFTOPPACKAGED NO.UNIT LOCATION SERVICE FANSUPPLY FAN EXHAUST]RETURN/[POWER (DX) COILCOOLING (CFM) FLOW AIR (CFM) O.A. MIN WC)(In. STATIC EXT. WC)(In. STATIC TOTAL CHARACTERISTICSFAN (CFM) FLOW AIR WC)(In. STATIC EXT. WC)(In. STATIC TOTAL CHARACTERISTICSFAN (MBH) CAPACITY TOTAL (MBH) CAPACITY SENS F) (DEG.EAT F) (DEG.LAT (FPM) VEL FACE ROWS INCH PER FINS WC)(In. P.D.AIR TYPE DIA.MIN & NO.FAN BHP MAX HP MOTOR RPM FAN DRIVE TYPE DIA.MIN & NO.FAN BHP MAX HP MOTOR RPM FAN DRIVE DB WB DB WB RTU-1 ROOFLOWER FLOOR 1ST &GND 17,950 2.0 3.84 DWDIAF 30" /1 15.38 20 1211 FIXED 17950 1.0 1.0 AFSWSI 40" /1 5.4 10 648 FIXED 779.2 533.7 80 67 52.8 52.7 454 5 12 0.70 RTU-2 ROOFUPPER FLOOR 2ND & 1ST,GND,22,000 2.0 3.49 DWDIAF 33" /1 17.11 20 1069 FIXED 22000 1.0 1.0 AFSWSI 44" /1 6.76 10 593 FIXED 899.2 629.8 80 67 53.8 53.7 408 5 10 0.50 WATER) (HOT COILHEATING FILTERFINAL UNITCONDENSING CHARACTERISTICS ELEC.UNIT No. MODEL &MANUFACTURER REMARKS TYPE (MBH) CAPACITY SIDEAIR SIDEWATER WIDTH RATING MERV WC)(In. P.D.FINAL TONS CAPACITY REFRIGERANT F)(DEG. TEMPAIR AMBIENT PERFORMANCE VOLTS PHASE FLA MCA MOP F)(DEG. TEMP. AIRENT. F)(DEG. TEMP. AIRLVG. (FPM)VEL. FACEMAX. WC)(In. P.D.AIR (GPM) FLOWWATER F) (DEG.TEMP. WATERENT. F) (DEG.TEMP. WATERLVG. HD)(Ft. P.D.WATER FLUID EFFICIENCY MINIMUM PROCEDURE TEST -520.3 56 82.5 604 0.22 53 180 160 0.7 20"/25"MERV 13 0.13 65 R410A 95 EER9.8 360AHRI 460 3 -163.5 175 RPS071D MODELDAIKIN -711.8 56 85.6 521 0.17 72 180 160 0.6 20"/25"MERV 13 0.10 76 R410A 95 - -460 3 -44.2 RTU / 128.8 RCU RCU 150 / RTU60 RCS081D / RFS081D MODELDAIKIN GLYCOL GLYCOL ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION NORTH 0SCALE: 1/4"=1’-0"2’4’8’ (E)10x10 (E)" GS/R (E)1" TO FIN TUBE (E)GS/R UP (E)2" GS/R (E)2" GS/R FIN TUBE (E)1" UP TO (E)1" (E)1" GROUND FLOOR " DN TO CONVECTOR ON (E)1" GS/R DN TO FIN TUBE UP (E)" TUBE (E)FIN EXHAUST UP (E)9x9 (E)6" DN DISCHARGE PIPE (E)6" RELIEF VALVE GS/R UP (E)2" GS UP (E)1" UP (E)40x18 CH-1 HEATER (E)CABINET UP (E)10x10 GS/R (E)2" GS/R DN (E)2" GS/R UP (E)" 1 H100 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC DEMOLITION H-100 JRM CEF HVAC DEMOLITION PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR - (E)6x6 (E)RHC (E)12x8(E)10x8(E)VAV-2(E)8x8(E)12x10 (E)12x8(E)VAV-3 (E)10x8 (E)10x8(E)16x8(E)24x10 (E)24x8 (E)20x10(E)8" (E)8"(E)8" (E)36x16 (E)28x16(E)28x14(E)24x10 (E)16x8 (E)50x14(E)36x18(E)AHU-2 (E)UH-1 T T T T T TT (E)VAV-1 SECOND FLOOR AHU-3 ON THE (E)24x18 UP TO (E)24x10 DEMOLITION NOTES: PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. RECOVER/EVACUATE EXISTING REFRIGERANT PIPING PER EPA REGULATIONS THE RISER FROM THIS LEVEL TO THE ROOF SHALL REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING 40x18 DUCT RISER SO THAT IT IS FLUSH TO THE CONCRETE SLAB. BE SURE THAT PNEUMATIC TUBING IS SEALED AIRTIGHT. PNEUMATIC TUBING UP TO THE CEILING LEVEL AND CAP WITH BRASS PLUGS. MOUNTING HARDWARE, PIPING, AND CONTROL COMPONENETS. REMOVE REMOVE EXISTING AHU-2 IN ITS ENTIRETY. THIS SHALL INCLUDE ALL ACCESSORIES, CEILING. RISER FROM THIS LEVEL TO THE ROOF SHALL REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING 22x12 EXHAUST RISER SO THAT IT IS FLUSH TO THE CONCRETE 4 3 2 1 1 4 3 2 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION NORTH 0SCALE: 1/4"=1’-0"2’4’8’ 1 H101 (E)FD/SD (E)ACCESS DOOR (E)RETURN FAN (E)36x12 TO (E)24x18 DN (E)12x36 DN (E)22x24 1" RS UP (E)" RL & (E)60x24 UP (E)84x24 DN TO AHU (E)36x24 DOOR (E)ACCESS INTAKE LOUVER (E)72"L x 66"H x 4"D OF PLENUM 72x18 OFFSET TO BOTTOM (E)24x18 TRANSITION TO PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC DEMOLITION DN (E)18x24 (E)40x14(E)48x16 SW OVERRIDE SWITCH (E)RTU OCCUPANCY FLOOR TO GROUND (E)40x14 DN (E)AD DEMOLITION NOTES: & HWR (E)1"HWS & HWR DN (E)1"HWS H-101 JRM CEF HVAC DEMOLITION PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR - (E)HWP (E)AIR HANDLING UNIT AHU-3 TO (E)RTU-2 (E)SUPPLY UP 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 & GR DN (E)2" GS GS & GR (E)2" REMOVE SUPPLY AIR DUCT RISER SERVING (E)RTU-2 IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMOVE SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK AS SHOWN HATCHED, AND REMOVE DUCTWORK RISER SERVING (E)AHU-3 IN ITS ENTIRETY. CONTROL WIRING BACK TO AHU CONTROLLER. REMOVE EXISTING RTU OCCUPANCY OVERRIDE SWITCH AND ASSOCIATED TUBING IS SEALED AIRTIGHT. PNEUMATIC TUBING WITH BRASS PLUGS. MAKE SURE PNEUMATIC SHALL BE REMOVED WITHIN THE MECHANICAL ROOM. CAP/SEAL ACCORDANCE WITH EPA REGULATIONS. PNEUMATIC TUBING ACCESSORIES. REFRIGERANT PIPING SHALL BE EVACUATED IN REMOVE AHU-3 AND ALL ASSOCIATED PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND RISER TO REMAIN FOR NEW PIPING TO CONNECT TO. REMOVE 2" GS & GR PIPING BACK TO PIPING RISER. PIPE TO FIRST FLOOR. REMOVE EXISTING RETURN AIR RISER SERVING (E)RTU-2 DOWN WITH DIVISION 26. REMOVE EXISTING HOT WATER PUMP SERVING (E)RTU-2. COORDINATE (E)RTU-2. REMOVE EXISTING PIPING AND PIPING ACCESSORIES SERVING 270 200TC 200J 200SD 272A 200CD 272 200TD 2OOEA 200UA DN ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION D H102 1 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’ UNIT (E)CONDENSING (E)RTU-1 (E)RTU-2 DRAIN (E)ROOF DRAIN (E)ROOF FAN (E)EXHAUST UNIT (E)CONDENSING (E)42x16 (E)42x16DN (E)42x16 (E)VENT UNIT (E)CONDENSING LOUVER (E)72x66 1ST FLOOR DN TO (E)AHU ON (E)RL & RS PIPING DEMOLITION NOTES: H-102 JRM CEF DEMOLITION ROOF PLAN - HVAC ROOF PLAN - HVAC DEMOLITION 1 2 3 4 4 5 5 1 FAN EF-3 (E)EXHAUST FAN EF-2 (E)EXHAUST 6 7 REMOVE EXISTING RELIEF HOOD AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK. FAN REMOVAL WITH DIVISION 26. CHASE DOWN BELOW ROOF LEVEL AND CAP/SEAL AIRTIGHT. COORDINATE REMOVE EXISTING EXHUAST FAN. REMOVE EXISTING DUCTWORK IN THE ROOFING CONTRACTOR. TO THE ROOF LEVEL. COORDINATE FAN REMOVAL WITH DIVISION 26 AND REMOVE EXISTING EXHAUST FAN AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK DOWN DRAIN PIPING AS REQUIRED TO REMOVE AND REPLACE RTU. DISCONNECT EXISTING DRAIN PIPING FROM RTU, AND REMOVE IN ACCORDANCE TO EPA REGULATIONS. ACCESSORIES. THE REFRIGERATION SYSTEM MUST BE EVACUATED ALL ASSOCIATED REFRIGERANT PIPE AND REFRIGERATION REMOVE THE EXISTING ROOFTOP UNIT AND CONDENSING UNIT AND DISCONNECT EXISTING DUCTWORK FROM EXISTING O.A. LOUVER. DEMO RETURN DUCT RISER DOWN TO FIRST FLOOR. TO EPA REGULATIONS. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM MUST BE EVACUATED IN ACCORDANCE REFRIGERANT PIPE AND REFRIGERATION ACCESSORIES. THE REMOVE THE EXISTING CONDENSING UNIT AND ALL ASSOCIATED 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 EXIST. ROOF HATCH CANOPY CANOPY EXIST. CONDENSING UNIT EXIST. CAPPED CURBS , TYP. EXIST. MECH. EQUIP. EXIST. SMOKE VENT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION NORTH 0SCALE: 1/4"=1’-0"2’4’8’ 1 H200 H-200 JRM CEF TO REMAIN. THE GROUND FLOOR DUCT DOWN TO (E)40x14 SUPPLY PIPING TO REMAIN (E)1" HWS&R DSD FD/SD30x1638x16 DSDDSDFD/SD UP 36x26 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - HVAC NEW WORK HVAC NEW WORK PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR - DRAWING NOTES: CAP AND SEAL EXISTING 8" DUCT AIRTIGHT. FLOOR. 50x24 RETURN AIR RISER UP TO RTU-2, 42x16 DOWN TO THE GROUND AREA AROUND DUCT WITH MINERAL WOOL AND FIRE CAULK. CAP AND SEAL EXISTING DUCT RISER AT CONCRETE CEILING. PACK 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 36x26 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION 0 2’4’8’ (E)10x10 (E)" GS/R (E)1" TO FIN TUBE (E)GS/R UP (E)2" GS/R (E)2" GS/R FIN TUBE (E)1" UP TO (E)1" (E)1" GROUND FLOOR " DN TO CONVECTOR ON (E)1" GS/R DN TO FIN TUBE UP (E)" TUBE (E)FIN EXHAUST UP (E)9x9 (E)6" DN DISCHARGE PIPE (E)6" RELIEF VALVE GS/R UP (E)2" CH-1 HEATER (E)CABINET UP (E)10x10 GS/R (E)2" GS/R DN (E)2" GS/R UP (E)" (E)6x6 (E)RHC (E)12x8(E)10x8(E)VAV-2 (E)12x10 (E)12x8(E)VAV-3 (E)10x8 (E)10x8(E)16x8(E)24x10 (E)8" (E)8"(E)8" (E)36x16 (E)28x16(E)28x14(E)24x10 (E)16x8 (E)50x14(E)36x18(E)UH-1 T T T T T TT (E)24x10 NORTH 0SCALE: 1/4"=1’-0"2’4’8’ 2 H201 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - HVAC NEW WORK DRAWING NOTES: TO RTU-2 (E)54x40 UP136x26FUTURE USE CAPPED FOR DN 50x24 FD/SD UP 50x24 50x24 DSD TAP BELLMOUTH 45 DEG. H-201 JRM CEF & GR DN (E)2" GS HWP-1 48x16TO SERVE FUTURE FIRST FLOOR DUCTWORK. SERVING GROUND FLOOR. PROVIDE 20x50 DUCT TAP AT FIRST FLOOR TRANSITION AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO EXISTING DUCTWORK PROVIDE NEW RETURN DUCT RISER DOWN TO FIRST FLOOR AND AIR OPENING IN ROOF. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECT. RETURN AIR RISER TO BE ROUTED THROUGH EXISTING RELIEF CONNECT NEW 2" HWS & HWR PIPING TO EXISTING PIPE RISER. CAP AND SEAL EXISTING 1" HWS & HWR PIPING. AS REQUIRED. ROUTE 2" HWS & HWR PIPING TO CONNECT TO NEW RTU-2 PROVIDE NEW 3-WAY VALVE. TRANSITION DUCTWORK TO CONNECT TO RTU-2. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 23 4 5 6 7 FDFD FD FD/SDDSDHVAC NEW WORK PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR - TO 1ST FLOOR 36x26 DN & GR 2"GS UP TO RTU-2 2" GS & GR (E)40x14(E)48x16 FLOOR TO GROUND (E)40x14 DN & HWR DN (E)1"HWS ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION 270 200TC 200J 200SD 272A 200CD 272 200TD 2OOEA 200UA DN H202 1 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’ D 60x36 DRAWING NOTES: ROOF OPENING DOWN THROUGH EXISTING NEW 50x24 RA DUCT JRM CEF NEW WORK ROOF PLAN - HVAC H-202 ROOF PLAN - HVAC NEW WORK PIPING RL & RS RTU-1 RTU-2 1 2 6 3 4 5 5 DISTRIBUTION. TO CONNECT SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK TO EXISTING DUCTWORK RTU TO FIT ON EXISTING ROOF CURB. PROVIDE TRANSITIONS AS REQUIRED PROVIDE NEW DRAIN PIPING AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO EXISTING DRAIN. SUPPORT STEEL. COORDINATE LOCATION AND MOUNTING WITH ARCHITECT. NEW CONDENSING UNIT SERVING RTU-2 TO BE MOUNTED ON STRUCTURAL PROVIDE NEW ROOF CURB FOR RTU. COORDINATE RETURN DUCT RISER OPENING WITH ARCHITECT. WITH EXTERIOR GRADE SEALANT. SEALANT SHALL BE PAINTABLE. SEAL THE PERIMETER OF THE BLANK-OFF PANEL FROM THE OUTSIDE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF 16 GUAGE GALVANEAL READY FOR PAINT. BLANK-OFF PANEL WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 72"x66". THE PANEL BOARD INSULATION THAT HAS AN R-VALUE OF 5 PER INCH. THE EXISTING LOUVER. THE PANEL SHALL BE INSULATED WITH RIGID PROVIDE A 2" INSULATED BLANK-OFF PANEL THE SAME SIZE AS THE 6 5 4 3 2 1 EXIST. ROOF HATCH CANOPY CANOPY EXIST. CONDENSING UNIT EXIST. CAPPED CURBS , TYP. EXIST. MECH. EQUIP. EXIST. SMOKE VENT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION 0 16’4’8’ UNIT (E)CONDENSING DRAIN (E)ROOF DRAIN (E)ROOF FAN (E)EXHAUST (E)42x16 DN (E)42x16 (E)VENT UNIT (E)CONDENSING LOUVER (E)72x66 H-500 JRM CEF HVAC CONTROL DRAWINGS - R DI BACnet/MSTP AV: POWER (Kw) AV SPEED (RPM) R AOM COM TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VFDDODO AO I S S M SF C H AO COIL VALVE HEATING PUMP COIL R DI M S S DO S S C C P AI DIA S AI P DI HIGH LIMIT STATIC PRESSURE TEMPERATURE DISCHARGE AIR AI P LOCATION SHOWN ON PLANS PRESSURE SENSOR. PROVIDE AT REMOTE SUPPLY AIR STATIC F AI FZ DI S FAN CIRCUIT WIRE TO SUPPLY RESET SWITCH FREEZE STAT P DI P DI SA E DODO "OFF" FOR ANY REASON. SHALL CLOSE IF SUPPLY FAN IS SUPPLY AIR DUCT. ALL DAMPERS TYPICAL SMOKE DAMPER IN THE R DO STG-1 CLG R DO STG-2 CLG R DO STG-3 CLG R DO STG-4 CLG R DO STG-5 CLG R DO STG-6 CLG R DI BACnet/MSTP AV: POWER (Kw) AV SPEED (RPM) R AOM COM TO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VFDDODO AO I S S M RF F AI E AO E AO F AI E AO E AO OA RELIEF RA E DODO "OFF" FOR ANY REASON. SHALL CLOSE IF SUPPLY FAN IS RETURN AIR DUCT. ALL DAMPERS TYPICAL SMOKE DAMPER IN THE S AI S AI S AI AI S TEMPERATURE OUTSIDE AIR P DI P DI R DI DELAY SWITCH EXISTING TIMED EQUIPMENT POINTS HARDWARE POINTSSOFTWARE GRAPHIC ONSHOW NOTES AV BV SCH TREND ALARM DI DO AI AO BACS EMCS DESCRIPTION SHED LOADSTEAM X(6) EMCS FROM INPUTS NETWORKBINARY COMMAND POSITION DAMPER AIROUTSIDE X X STATUS DAMPER AIROUTSIDE X X X TEMPERATURE AIROUTSIDE X X X FLOW AIROUTSIDE X X X PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL RACK FILTERFINAL X X X X LIMITHIGH X TRANSMITTER INDICATINGMAGNEHELIC COMMAND POSITION VALVE COILPRE-HEAT X X X X CLOSED COMMANDED VALVE WITH COIL ACROSS T DELTA F DEG5 X OPENNORMALLY TEMPERATURE AIR DISCHARGE COIPRE-HEAT X X X SENSORAVERAGING START/STOP PUMP COILPRE-HEAT X X STATUS PUMP COILPRE-HEAT X X X FAILUREMOTOR X SENSOR CURRENTVIA STATUS TEMPERATURE LIMITLOW X LIMITLOW X AIRFLOW FANSUPPLY X X X FEASIBLE WHERE CONE INLET ININSTALL START/STOP MOTOR FANSUPPLY X X X X SYSTEM FA WITHINTERLOCK COMMAND SPEED FANSUPPLY X X PRESSURE STATIC DOWNSTREAM FANSUPPLY X X X X SETPOIN FROM DEVIATION10%X SETPOINT PRESSURE STATIC DOWNSTREAM FANSUPPLY X X X STATUS DETECTOR SMOKE DUCT FANSUPPLY X X STATUS FANSUPPLY X X X FAILURE X DRIVE ON CONTACTVIA (kW) POWER FANSUPPLY X X X POINT NETWORKBACnetMSTP (RPM) SPEED FANSUPPLY X X X POINT NETWORKBACnetMSTP STATUS SWITCH PRESSURE DISCHARGE FANSUPPLY X X X LIMITHIGH X TEMPERATURE AIR DISCHARGERTU X X X LIMITLOW X SETPOINT TEMPERATURE AIR DISCHARGERTU X X X X SETPOINT FROMDEVIATION X SENSOR POINTSINGLE COMMAND POSITION DAMPER AIRRETURN X X STATUS DAMPER AIRRETURN X X X AIRFLOW FANRETURN X X X START/STOP MOTOR FANRETURN X X X FEASIBLE WHERE CONE INLET ININSTALL COMMAND SPEED FANRETURN X X X SYSTEM FA WITHINTERLOCK PRESSURE STATIC DOWNSTREAM FANRETURN X X X X SETPOIN FROM DEVIATION10%X SETPOINT PRESSURE STATIC DOWNSTREAM FANRETURN X X X STATUS DETECTOR SMOKE DUCT FANRETURN X X STATUS FANRETURN X X X FAILURE X DRIVE ON CONTACTVIA (kW) POWER FANRETURN X X X POINT NETWORKBACnetMSTP (RPM) SPEED FANRETURN X X X POINT NETWORKBACnetMSTP STATUS SWITCH PRESSURE DISCHARGE FANRETURN X X X LIMITHIGH X STATUS SWITCH PRESSURE SUCTION FANRETURN X X X LIMITLOW X TEMPERATURE AIRMIXED X X POSITION DAMPER AIRRELIEF X X SENSOR PRESSURE STATIC REMOTE AIRSUPPLY X X START/STOP STG-1COMPRESSOR X X START/STOP STG-2COMPRESSOR X X START/STOP STG-3COMPRESSOR X X START/STOP STG-4COMPRESSOR X X START/STOP STG-5COMPRESSOR X X START/STOP STG-6COMPRESSOR X X DESCRIPTIONSYSTEM RTU-2 AND -RTU-1 AVE MAPLE120 GENERAL (BACS) SYSTEMCONTROL AND AUTOMATION BUILDING THE THROUGH CONTROLLED BE SHALLSYSTEM ADJUSTABLE BE SHALL SETPOINTSALL SETPOINTS SCHEDULE: FOLLOWING THE ON BASED RESET TO ALLOWED BESHALL TEMPERATURE AIR DISCHARGE THE RESET: TEMPERATURE AIRDISCHARGE F DEG 55 = DAT => ABOVE AND F DEG 75 =OAT F DEG 65 = DAT => BELOW AND DEF 55 =OAT RTU-1: MAX CFM 5400 / MIN CFM 18000 RATE: AIRFLOWSUPPLY MAX CFM 5400 / MIN CFM 18000 RATE: AIRFLOWRETURN MIN CFM 3600 RATE: FLOW DAMPER AIROUTSIDE RTU-2: MAX CFM 6600 / MIN CFM00022 RATE: AIRFLOWSUPPLY MAX CFM 6600 / MIN CFM00022 RATE: AIRFLOWRETURN MIN CFM 4400 RATE: FLOW DAMPER AIROUTSIDE SAT-SUN 8PM TO AM 8 AND MON-FRI PM, 9 TO AM 7 SCHEDULE: OCCUPANCYZONE OCCUPANCYSPACE SCHEDULE. DAY OF TIME AOF COMBINATION A ON BASED DETERMINED BE SHALL OCCUPANCYZONE SWITCH. OVERRIDE THE ON EXPIRED HAS TIME WHENUNOCCUPIED TO BACK INDEX SHALL ZONE THE OCCUPANCY, OFDURATION THE FOR OCCUPIED TO INDEXED BE SHALL UNIT THE,SWITCH OVERRIDEOCCUPANCY THE BY DETERMINED AS PERIOD,UNOCCUPIED SCHEDULED THE DURING OCCUPIED BECOMES ZONE THEIF START/STOP MINUTES. 30 OF MINIMUM A FOR OPERATEINITIALLY SHALL IT STARTS, SYSTEM THE WHEN OCCUPANCY.SCHEDULED THE TO PRIOR TIME OF AMOUNT THE AND SETPOINT OCCUPIEDTHE AND TEMPERATURE SPACE BETWEEN DIFFERENCE THE OFFUNCTION A BE MINIMUM, A AS SHALL, ALGORITHM THE ALGORITHM.CONTROL START OPTIMUM AN AND SCHEDULE DAY OF TIME A ON BASEDSTART SHALL SYSTEM THE PERIOD, OCCUPANCY SCHEDULED THEDURING SETPOINTS. TEMPERATURE UNOCCUPIED OR SETBACK OCCUPIED THEMAINTAIN TO NEEDED IS SYSTEM THE UNLESS MODE, UNOCCUPIED ORSETBACK UNOCCUPIED IN IS SPACE THE WHEN OFF BE SHALL SYSTEMTHE CONTROL: DAMPERSHUTOFF OPEN. BE SHALL DAMPER AIR MIXED THE CLOSED. BESHALL DAMPERS RELIEF AND AIR OUTSIDE THE OFF, ARE FANS SYSTEM THEWHEN SAFETIES SWITCH.TEMPERATURE LIMIT LOW THE OF ACTIVATION UPON OPEN SHALLVALVE CONTROL HEATING THE AND CLOSE, SHALL DAMPER AIROUTSIDE THE DOWN, SHUT SHALL FAN AIR SUPPLY THE PROTECTION:FREEZE SWITCH. PRESSURE STATIC DISCHARGEFAN HIGH THE OF ACTIVATION UPON CLOSE SHALL DAMPER AIROUTSIDE THE AND DOWN SHUT SHALL FAN AIR SUPPLY THE STATIC: FANHIGH SWITCH. PRESSURE STATIC SUCTIONFAN LOW THE OF ACTIVATION UPON CLOSE SHALL DAMPER AIROUTSIDE THE AND DOWN SHUT SHALL FAN AIR SUPPLY THE STATIC: FANLOW DETECTOR.SMOKE DUCT A OF ACTIVATION UPON CLOSE SHALL DAMPERAIR/RELIEF OUTSIDE THE AND DOWN SHUT SHALL FAN THE DETECTION:SMOKE ONTROLC PEED SFAN SETPOINT. PRESSURE STATIC DOWNSTREAM THE MAINTAIN TOREQUIRED AS DRIVE FREQUENCY VARIABLE A VIA MODULATE SHALL FANSUPPLY SETPOINT. FAN AIR RETURN THE MAINTAIN TOREQUIRED AS DRIVE FREQUENCY VARIABLE A VIA MODULATE SHALL FANRETURN CONTROL TEMPERATURE AIRSUPPLY SATISFIED.BEEN HAS SETPOINT HEATING THE WHEN "OFF" BE SHALL PUMP COILTHE HEAT. FOR CALL A IS THERE WHENEVER "ON" INDEXED BE SHALLPUMP COIL THE POSITION. MINIMUM AT BE SHALL DAMPER AIR OUTSIDETHE SETPOINT. THE MAINTAIN TO REQUIRED AS MODULATE SHALLVALVE CONTROL COIL PRE-HEAT THE AND "OFF" INDEXED BE SHALLSYSTEM COOLING DX THE INITIATED. BE SHALL MODE HEATINGSETPOINT, BELOW FALLS TEMPERATURE AIR DISCHARGE WHEN MODE:HEATING POSITION. MINIMUM AT BE SHALL DAMPER AIR OUTSIDETHE SETOPINT. MAINTAIN TO REQUIRED AS "ON/OFF" COMPRESSORSSTAGE SHALL SYSTEM COOLING DX THE "OFF". COMMANDED BE SHALLPUMP COIL THE AND CLOSED BE SHALL VALVE CONTROL COILPREHEAT THE INITIATED. BE SHALL MODE COOLING THE SETPOINT, THEABOVE RISES TEMPERATURE AIR DISCHARGE THE WHEN MODE:COOLING CONTROL VENTILATIONMINIMUM SETPOINT. MAINTAIN TO NEEDED AS CLOSEDMODULATE SHALL DAMPER AIR RETURN THE (CFM), SETPOINT BELOW ISAIRFLOW VENTILATION THE AND OPEN FULLY IS DAMPER AIR OUTSIDE THEMODE, ECONOMIZER IN NOT IS UNIT THE OPERATING, IS SYSTEM THEWHEN SETPOINT. MAINTAIN TO NEEDED AS CLOSEDMODULATE SHALL DAMPER AIR OUTSIDE THE (CFM), SETPOINT ABOVE ISAIRFLOW VENTILATION THE AND OPEN FULLY IS DAMPER AIR RETURN THEMODE, ECONOMIZER IN NOT IS UNIT THE OPERATING, IS SYSTEM THEWHEN CONTROLECONOMIZER SEQUENCES. CONTROL ECONOMIZER INTEGRATED BULBDRY DIFFERENTIAL AND MODULATED BOTH WITH EQUIPPED BE SHALL SYSTEMTHE CONTROL): (MAT MODE ECONOMIZERMODULATED INITITATED. BE SHALL CONTROL) (MAT MODE ECONOMIZERMODULATED »¿ 55 THAN LESS IS TEMPERATURE AIR OUTSIDE THE ANDSETPOINT, COOLING THE ABOVE RISES TEMPERATURE AIR RETURN THEWHEN »¿55 OF SETPOINT TEMPERATURE AIR MIXED THE MAINTAIN TOMODULATE SHALL DAMPERS AIR RELIEF AND RETURN DAMPER, AIR OUTSIDETHE INITITATED. BESHALL MODE HEATING SYSTEM THE AND CONTROL CO2 TO INDEXSHALL DAMPERS AIR RETURN AND AIR RELIEF AIR, OUTSIDE THESETPOINT, BELOW FALLS TEMPERATURE AIR MIXED THE WHEN LIMIT:LOW INITITATED. BE SHALL MODEEONOMIZER INTEGRATED AND CLOSE SHALL DAMPER AIR RETURN THE OPEN,FULL TO INDEX SHALL DAMPERS AIR RELIEF AND AIR OUTSIDE THESETPOINT, ABOVE RISES TEMPERATURE AIR MIXED THE WHEN LIMIT:HIGH MODE: ECONOMIZERINTEGRATED SETPOINT.TEMPERATURE AIR DISCHARGE THE MAINTAIN TO REQUIRED AS MODULATESHALL VALVE CONTROL WATER CHILLED THE CLOSED, BE SHALLDAMPER AIR RETURN THE AND OPEN SHALL DAMPERS RELIEF AND OUTSIDETHE INITITATED. BE SHALL MODE ECONOMIZER INTEGRATED»¿ 60BELOW IS TEMPERATURE DEWPOINT AIR OUTDOOR THE ANDTEMPERATURE AIR OUTDOOR THE ABOVE IS TEMPERATURE AIR RETURN THEWHEN »¿ 55 BELOW FALLS TEMPERATURE AIR OUTSIDETHE WHEN INITITIATED BE SHALL ECONOMIZER MODULATED ANDDISABLED BE SHALL CONTROL ECONOMIZER INTEGRATED SHUTOFF: LIMITLOW INITITIATED. BESHALL MODE COOLING AND CONTROL CO2 TO INDEX SHALL DAMPERSAIR RETURN AND AIR RELIEF AIR, OUTSIDE THE TEMPERATURE. AIRRETURN THE EXCEEDS TEMPERATURE AIR OUTDOOR THE WHENDISABLED BE SHALL CONTROL ECONOMIZER INTEGRATED SHUTOFF: LIMITHIGH POINT SCHEDULE - RTU-1 & RTU-2 H500 1 SCALE: NONE CONTROL DIAGRAM RTU-1 & RTU-2 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION ,DASHED LIGHT IS EXISTING TO BE REMOVED. EXISTING ELECTRICAL OR EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE, ,RELOCATED. EXISTING TO REMAIN OR EXISTING TO BE EXISTING WIRING OR EQUIPMENT, SOLID LIGHT IS HEAVY SOLID IS NEW, SYMBOL DESCRIPTION GENERAL CONSTRUCTION SYMBOLS EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN(E) EXISTING DEVICE TO BE RELOCATED (ER) PANELBOARD ONE LINE DIAGRAM SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH MTS = MANUAL ATS = AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH, RATING AS INDICATED. GROUND CONNECTION CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC MOLDED CASE TRANSFORMER SYMBOL DESCRIPTION AND CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION T AND TYPE AND TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE FOR SIZE TRANSFORMER, REFER TO ONE LINE DIAGRAM 208/120 VOLT PANELBOARD 480/277 VOLT PANELBOARD SYMBOL DESCRIPTION FIRE ALARM MANUAL PULL STATIONF WIRE GUARD SMOKE DETECTOR SUBSCRIPT "WG" INDICATES S RATE OF RISE HEAT DETECTOR H VISUAL SIGNAL DEVICEF TS TAMPER SWITCH SPRINKLER WATERFLOW SWITCHWF FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELFACP FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATION PANELFAAP REMOTE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR TEST STATIONRTS FSD FAN SHUT DOWN SPEAKER/STROBE ALARM SIGNALF INDIVIDUAL ADDRESSABLE MODULEIAM FIRE ALARM TRANSPONDER NODEFATN SYMBOL DESCRIPTION LUMINAIRES SWITCHING DESIGNATION. SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE TYPE ON CEILING MOUNTED LUMINAIRE. UPPER CASE SWITCHING DESIGNATION. SCHEDULE, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES LETTERS INDICATE FIXTURE TYPE ON WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE. UPPER CASE NL CEILING MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE WALL MOUNTED EXIT LUMINAIRE FA d FA d ’NL’ DENOTES UNSWITCHED LUMINAIRE CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY CIRCUIT SYMBOL DESCRIPTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LIST J JUNCTION BOX COMPLETE CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT LP-404 FOR RACEWAY TYPE. TO MATCH HOMERUN. REFER TO SPEC’S BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SIZE AND NUMBER EG., IN " C, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. SHALL BE 20 AMP, 120 VOLT, 2-#12, 1-#12 EQUALS NUMBER OF CIRCUITS. CIRCUIT INDICATE CIRCUITS. NUMBER OF ARROWS NUMBERS INDICATE PANEL. NUMBERS HOME RUN TO PANELBOARD. LETTERS/ X - MATCH EQUIPMENT CAP T - TWISTLOCK SUBSCRIPT INDICATES TYPE: PROVIDE CORD AND CAP. EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED BY OTHERS. BRANCH CIRCUIT AND/OR MATCH CAP ON AND NEMA CONFIGURATION AS REQUIRED BY PROPER VOLTAGE, CLASS, CURRENT RATING SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE. PROVIDE SWITCHES LETTERS EQUALS NO. OF GANGED a,b,c - SWITCHING DESIGNATIONS NUMBER OF OS - OCCUPANCY SENSOR 3 - THREE WAY SWITCH INDICATE TYPE: ON FIXTURE SCHEDULE, SUBSCRIPTS TOGGLE SWITCH, VOLTAGE AS INDICATED 3 a,b,c UC - UNDER THE COUNTER GFI - GROUND FAULT INTERUPT WP - WEATHER PROOF OC - OVER COUNTER SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 20 AMP, 125 VOLT OS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CIRCUIT TO SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), SOLID HALF ARROW(S) INDICATES 120 VOLT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CIRCUIT TO MULTI-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER, SOLID FULL ARROW INDICATES 208 VOLT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CIRCUIT TO SINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER(S), OPEN HALF ARROW(S) INDICATES 277 VOLT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CIRCUIT TO MULTI-POLE CIRCUIT BREAKER, OPEN FULL ARROW INDICATES 480 VOLT ABOVE. DDC ALARM WIRING BY DIV 15A. PROVIDE"C STUBBED TO CEILING SPACE SINGLE GANG BOX WITH BLANK COVER PLATE. DDC SURFACE RACEWAY WITH DEVICES AS INDICATED COMBINATION POWER AND COMMUNICATION POWER RACEWAY WITH DEVICES AS INDICATED INTELLIGENT MONITOR MODULEIMM S IMM INTELLIGENT MONITORING MODULE SMOKE DETECTOR WITH "IMM" INDICATES POLE MOUNTED SITE LUMINAIRE DUCT SMOKE DETECTORDSD SCHEDULE ON ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL MAGNETIC STARTER AMP RATING AS INDICATED COMBINATION FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH AND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION AND CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE FOR SIZE. MOTOR CONNECTION. REFER TO ELECTRIC M AND CONTROL SCHEDULE INDICATED ON ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT DISCONNECT SWITCH AMP RATING AS VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVEVFD 208/120 VOLT PANELBOARD 480 VOLT PANELBOARD SMOKE DAMPER GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: GENERAL NOTES: P. O. N. M. L. K. J. I. H. G. F. E. D. C. B. A. EQUIPMENT WILL OPERATE PROPERLY. AFTER RENOVATING EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSURE THAT ALL REMAINING AND NEW OUTSIDE OF THE SCOPE OF WORK. OF DEMOLITION, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS AND MAINTAIN THOSE CIRCUITS THAT EXTEND DISCONNECT AND REMOVE PANEL, FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE PRIOR TO THE START BUT ARE AFFECTED BY THE DEMOLITION OR NEW CONSTRUCTION. WALLS AND CEILINGS. MAINTAIN THE CONTINUITY OF BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO ANY AREAS WHICH ARE TO REMAIN COMPLETELY BACK TO THE PANELBOARD. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT ABANDON BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING IN EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING TO DEVICES IN AREAS OF DEMOLITION SHALL BE DISCONNECTED, MADE SAFE AND REMOVED DISCONNECT, MAKE SAFE AND REMOVE ALL TEMPORARY AND ABANDONED WIRE WITHIN THE SPACE. PROPERTY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE. INDICATED TO BE REMOVED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. ALL ITEMS REJECTED BY THE OWNER SHALL BECOME THE OF ITEMS TO BE RETAINED. TURN OVER TO OWNER THE EXISTING ZONED "FACP" AND EXISTING FIRE ALARM DEVICES INVENTORY MAJOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS THAT ARE REMOVED AND PROVIDE A LIST TO THE OWNER FOR THEIR SELECTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLANS AND/OR AS DIRECTED AFTER COMPLETION OF OTHER TRADE’S WORK IN THAT AREA. AND STORE ANY OR ALL ELECTRICAL ITEMS IN PATH OF WORK, REINSTALLING AND RECONNECTING SAME AS REQUIRED, IN ANY AREA REQUIRING THE PERFORMANCE OF ANY TRADE’S WORK, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY REMOVE TO BE REUSED, SHALL BE CUT OFF FLUSH WITH SLAB LEVEL WITH CONCRETE. ALL EXISTING CONDUITS STUBBED THROUGH FLOOR SERVING ITEMS TO BE REMOVED AND NOT SHOWN OR REQUIRED AND FEEDERS PASSING THROUGH AND SERVING UNDISTURBED AREAS (SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN). MAINTAIN AND RESTORE, IF INTERRUPTED BY REMOVALS OR IN PATH OF NEW CONSTRUCTION, ALL CIRCUITS, CONDUITS DEMOLITION. SAFE ANY EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS. COORDINATE REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO SHALL BE REUSED AS DETERMINED BY CONTRACTOR. ALL UNUSED CONDUITS SHALL BE REMOVED. DISCONNECT AND MAKE DRAWINGS SHALL BE DISCONNECTED AND REMOVED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WALLBOXES, BACKBOXES AND CONDUIT FEEDERS AND CONDUITS BACK TO POINT OF SOURCE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL ITEMS SHOWN ON THE DEMOLITION THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITHIN DEMOLITION AREA SHALL BE DEMOLISHED ALONG WITH ALL OTHER PERIODS. APPROVAL TO BE IN WRITING. DISCRETION OF THE FIRE DEPARTMENT AND THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, BUT MUST BE PLACED BACK ON LINE DURING RENOVATION MAY BE DISCONNECTED FROM SERVICE DURING THE HOURS THE CONTRACTOR IS WORKING, AT THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE KEPT OPERATIONAL DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD THE BUILDING UNDER THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. EQUIPMENT BEING ABANDONED OR REMOVED, WHICH WILL REQUIRE DE-ENERGIZATION, REMOVAL AND BLANK-OFF BY REFER TO PLUMBING CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR EXACT QUANTITIES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL PLUMBING NOT ALL DEVICES TERMINATIONS, JUNCTION BOXES AND WIRING HAVE BEEN SHOWN. WORK. PARTICULAR CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO AVOID CREATING HAZARD OR CAUSING DISRUPTION IN ADJOINING AREAS. AND CAP ALL SERVICE LINES TO BE DISCONNECTED FOR THOSE SERVICES WHICH NORMALLY ARE INCLUDED IN HIS FIELD OF CONTRACTOR SHALL PARTICIPATE IN SURVEY OF THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DISCONNECT UNFAMILIARITY WITH SITE CONDITIONS THAT ARE VISIBLE OR READILY CONSTRUED BY EXPERIENCED OBSERVERS. THIS THAT WILL AFFECT THE DEMOLITION WORK. NO COMPENSATION WILL BE GRANTED FOR ADDITIONAL WORK CAUSED BY AND ARE NOT GUARANTEED. PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID, VISIT SITE AND IDENTIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIFFICULTIES EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TAKEN FROM FIELD OBSERVATIONS AND PRIOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WHEN AVAILABLE COORDINATE ALL SHUTDOWNS WITH UNIVERSITY PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. COORDINATE PHASING OF WORK WITH OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. NEW WORK. PROTECT BUILDING AND FURNISHINGS FROM DAMAGE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IN THE WAY OF AS POSSIBLE, SUBJECT TO THE OWNERS APPROVAL. OF THE CONTRACTOR’S WORK, IT SHALL BE REPAIRED AND/OR REPLACED WITH SIMILAR OR LIKE MATERIALS, AS MUCH WHEN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION, WHICH IS TO REMAIN, IS DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF DEMOLITION AS A RESULT MOUNTING HEIGHT & MISC. INFO. 1 DESIGNATION PANEL TYPICAL FOR ALL DEVICES AND HOMERUNS GFI NUMBER INDICATES CIRCUIT NUMBER NUMBER CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION BRANCH CIRCUITING SWITCH LEG FIXTURE TYPE a B NUMBER INDICATES CIRCUIT2 NOTE: 1 NLGP-B PANELBOARD AND GEAR LEGEND CIRCUIT BREAKER GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING MLO MAIN LUG ONLY MICRO AFF CB GFI MCB EG EQUIPMENT GROUND FCU FAN COIL UNIT AFG AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAGE ABOVE FINISHED GRADE ABBREVIATIONS UOI OFCI WP TSP UC OC TWISTED SHIELDED PAIR UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED CLG.CEILING A.AMPERE EXIST.EXISTING MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER GND. KW. GROUND KILOWATT ABBREV. C. HP. CONDUIT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR PH.PHASE PNL.PANEL REFRIG. TYP. SP.SPACE POLE SW. 4 W.WIRE 3P.15A. ABBREV. P. PP REFRIGERATOR POWER PANEL SWITCH TYPICAL WEATHERPROOF MOUNTED UNDER COUNTER HEIGHT MOUNTED OVER COUNTER HEIGHT P = POLE A = AMPERE DESCRIPTION NIC NOT IN CONTRACT LS LIFE SAFETY BRANCH CR EQ CRITICAL BRANCH EQUIPMENT BRANCH HORSEPOWER MICROWAVE DESCRIPTION VOLTV. VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME K. J. I. H. G. F. E. D. C. B. A. TMGB TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAIN GROUND BAR BMGB BUILDING MAIN GROUND BAR PROVIDE PULLBOX FOR EVERY 180 OF BENDS FOR TEL/DATA AND 360 OF BENDS FOR POWER CONDUITS. ALL CONDUITS AND SUPPORTS SHALL BE AS TIGHT TO DECK AS POSSIBLE. NEW YORK STATE, BUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE AND CORNELL UNIVERSITY DESIGN STANDARDS. ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF NFPA CODES, FIRE CODE OF TO CIRCUIT(S) AS INDICATED. PROVIDE CONDUIT/WIRING (CIRCUITING) AND REQUIRED EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS TO ALL DEVICES/EQUIPMENT. CONNECT SEPARATE NEUTRALS (CIRCUITS SHALL NOT SHARE NEUTRALS). SAME EQUIPMENT GROUND) FOR EACH 20 AMPERE CIRCUIT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE CIRCUITING TO DEVICES/EQUIPMENT SHALL BE 2-#12AWG & 1-#12EG (MULTIPLE HOME RUNS IN SAME CONDUIT MAY SHARE AND NOT GREATER THAN 96 INCHES ABOVE THE FINISHED FLOOR. FIRE ALARM SIGNALING APPLIANCES SHALL BE MOUNTED SUCH THAT THE ENTIRE LENS IS NOT LESS THAN 80 INCHES PROVIDE NYLON PULLSTRING IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE " FOR POWER CIRCUITS UOI. TO CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL CONDUIT ROUTES, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR MAINTAIN SERVICE CLEARANCES OF ALL EQUIPMENT. NON RATED PENETRATIONS. ALL FIRE RATINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED. UTILIZE REMOVABLE FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL AT CABLE TRAY PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE ACOUSTICAL SEALANT FOR ALL SLEEVE AND SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE FIRESTOPPING FOR ALL FIRE-RATED PENETRATIONS. U - ULTRASONIC SUBSCRIPTS INDICATE TYPE: (DUAL TECHNOLOGY WITH 360 VIEW) CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR 9" C/T W FACEPLATE AND BDF. CAT 6 UTP CABLE, TERMINATE IN OTHERWISE NOTED). PROVIDE ONE(1) NEAREST CABLE TRAY (UNLESS BOX. 1" EMT CONDUIT EXTENDED TO WAP - WALL MOUNT AT 90"AFF 4"x2"x 1-3/4" BDF. 46"AFF. PROVIDE (1) CAT 6 CABLE TO FOR DATA/VOICE. WALL MOUNT AT CABLE TRAY (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) AND 1" CONDUIT EXTENDED TO NEAREST W - SINGLE GANG BACK BOX WITH MUD RING TERMINATE AT PATCH PANEL IN BDF. CONDUIT BUSHING. PULL (3) CAT 6 CABLES TERMINATE CONDUIT AT CABLE TRAY WITH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) FOR DATA/VOICE. EXTENDED TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY OR BDF FACEPLATE WITH TRIPLEX DESIGN. 1" CONDUIT 4"x4"x2.5D" BOX WITH A 2-GANG MUD RING & ON DRAWINGS CABLE TRAY: SIZE AS CALLED FOR B IF MORE THAN ONE) QUANTITY (ONLY LP - LIGHTING PANEL GP - GENERAL PURPOSE E - EMERGENCY POWER DP - DIST. PANEL EQ- EQUIPMENT LS - LIFE SAFETY N - NORMAL POWER (-) - BLANK FOR NORMAL EHDP-EQGA L - 208Y/120 VOLT H - 480Y/277 VOLT G- GROUND 1- FIRST 2- SECOND 3- THIRD 4- FOURTH 5- FIFTH AIR TERMINAL SMOKE DETECTOR, BEAM TYPE TRANSMITTERSTX SMOKE DETECTOR, BEAM TYPE RECEIVERSRX EXISTING FLOOR BOX WITH POWER ONLY FAR FIRE ALARM RELEASE RELAY SD HH UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC HANDHOLE TERMINATE AT BDF & RJ45 JACKS. RJ45 JACKS TO BDF. PULL CAT 6 CABLE RECEPTACLES AND (4) CAT 6 CABLES WITH PATCH PANEL. PROVIDE (2) DUPLEX TEL/DATA BACK TO NEAREST CABLE TRAY OR DRAWINGS AND (1) 1-1/4’’ CONDUIT FOR PANELBOARD, CONDUIT(S) FOR A/V PER CONDUITS FOR POWER BACK TO DESIGNATED FLOORING SELECTION). PROVIDE (2)3/4’’ COVER(VERIFY FINAL COVER WITH FINAL FLOOR BOX FSR FL-500P-6 WITH FL-500P-B-C DH DOOR HOLD OPEN E-000 MRG MRG LIST & GENERAL NOTES ELECTRICAL SYMBOL ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION M M E-101 MRG MRG (E) PP DEMOLITION NOTES: 1 1 2 3 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’ 2 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’ 1 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’ ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION & SECOND FLOORS - PARTIAL GROUND, FIRST T T HELP HPPG MDP LPPG2 LPPG1 LPPGA-1 LPPGA-2 LPPGB (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) (E) E-101 E-101 E-101 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PARTIAL GROUND FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION (E) (E) (E) (E) LDP1A LPP1-2 LPP1-1 HPP1 FACP (E) M HWP-1 FLOOR BELOW. FACP MOUNTED IN VESTIBULE ON EXISTING FCI 7200 ADDRESSABLE 2 DSD RTS M RF-3 SD SD DSD DSD RTS RTS SD RTS DSD(E)(E) (E) C. B. A. GENERAL NOTES: SALVAGE EXISTING SMOKE DAMPER POWER CIRCUITS FOR REUSE. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS FEEDING EQUIPMENT SHALL REMAIN AND BE LABELED SPARE. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN AS BEING DEMOLISHED SHALL HAVE ALL AHU-2 FEEDERS AND CONTROL DEVICES BACK TO SOURCE. AHU-2 IS FED FROM PANEL PP. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL POWER FEEDERS AND CONTROL DEVICES BACK TO SOURCE. AHU-3 AND RF-3 ARE FED FROM PANEL PP. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ALL POWER AHU-1 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTIONREF.SUITE OFFICE 136 SUITE OFFICE 132 OFFICE 132B OFFICE 132A 170A 170B 170C STAIR 100SD 100CG 170E 170 170G 160A 170F 160 LOADING 160B STAIR 100SE RECEPTION/WAITING 100LA VEST 100CE CONFERENCE 156 OFFICE 130 BREAK RM CONFERENCE MAIN 135 MEN WOMEN SHIP/RECEIVE MAIL, 152 TRAINING 150 HVAC SUITE OFFICE 148 OFFICE 143 OFFICE 145 SERVER 143 CONFERENCE 139 STAIR 100SB OFFICE 146 OFFICE 144 OFFICE 142 OFFICE 140 OFFICE 138 4’-3 3/8 " 270 266 200CF 200CE 260 200TC 200J 200SD 264 272A 267 200CD 272 263 263A 268 267A 200TD 2OOEA 200UA DN DN 262 200SE GROUP SERVICE G38 SUPPORT TECH G38A ELECTRICAL G00UB ROOM STOCK G44 OFFICE G48 ROOM CONFERENCE G50 SUITE OFFICE G41 STORAGE G40 KITCHEN G00UAG35 SUITE OFFICE G37 OFFICE G30 OFFICE KITCHEN WOMENS G00TC MENS G00TD COATS SUITE OFFICE G62 ROOM BOILER G00UD SUITE OFFICE G60 OFFICE G67 OFFICE G65 OFFICE G65A STAR G00SB JAN M M M M M MRG MRG E-102 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PARTIAL ROOF PLAN - M EF-3 M FOR SF-1 CONDENSING UNIT RTU-2 RTU-1 MDP MDP PP PP 1 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’E-102 PARTIAL ROOF PLAN - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION DSD RTS FSD DSD RTS DSD RTS FSD DSD RTS DSD RTS PP C. B. A. GENERAL NOTES: ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS FEEDING EQUIPMENT SHALL REMAIN AND BE LABELED SPARE. UPDATING OF PROGRAMMING OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. ASSOCIATED WITH THE REMOVAL OF RTU-1, RTU-2 AND AHU TO COINCIDE WITH THE COORDINATE WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR FOR REMOVAL OF FIRE ALARM CONNECTIONS ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHOWN AS BEING DEMOLISHED SHALL HAVE ALL FOR AHU-2 CONDENSING UNIT M EF-2 PP ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION EXIST. ROOF HATCH CANOPY CANOPY EXIST. CONDENSING UNIT EXIST. CAPPED CURBS , TYP. EXIST. MECH. EQUIP. EXIST. SMOKE VENT M M RTU-2 ACCU-2 WP GFI M RTU-1 WP GFI CONNECTIONS 120V CONNECTIONS 120V LPP1-2 LPP1-2 LPP1-2 LPP1-2 1 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’E-201 ROOF PLAN - ELECTRICAL MRG MRG E-201 DRAWING NOTES: 1 1 1 1 1 2 NORTH 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’E-201 - ELECTRICAL FLOOR & ROOF PL AN PARTIAL SECOND M HWP-1 DSD RTS FSD FSD DSD RTS DSD RTS SD SD DSD RTS DSD RTS DSD RTS 2 2 2 PARTIAL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL 3 0 16’SCALE: 1/8"=1’-0"4’8’E-201 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL NORTH 3 3 DEVICES BEING REMOVED AND INSTALL IN THEIR PLACE. COORDINATE LOCATION OF NEW DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS WITH EXISTING SMOKE DAMPER LOCATION TO NEW SMOKE DAMPER LOCATIONS. SPARE ON SECOND FLOOR. PROVIDE NEW CONDUIT AND WIRING FROM EXISTING CONNECT NEW SMOKE DAMPERS INTO EXISTING SMOKE DAMPER CIRCUIT MADE PROVIDE NEW 20A-1P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING SQUARE D PANEL BOARD. 3 SD 2 DSD RTS SD 2 FSD FSD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION EXIST. ROOF HATCH CANOPY CANOPY EXIST. CONDENSING UNIT EXIST. CAPPED CURBS , TYP. EXIST. MECH. EQUIP. EXIST. SMOKE VENT 270 266 200CF 200CE 260 200TC 200J 200SD 264 272A 267 200CD 272 263 263A 268 267A 200TD 2OOEA 200UA DN DN 262 200SE 170A 170B 170C STAIR 100SD 100CG 170E 170 170G 170F 130 (SUPPLY) POWER PANEL TRANSFORMER CONTROL HC (EQUIPMENT) CONNECTION MOTOR SWITCH (CONTROL UNIT) STARTER/DISCONNECT COMBINATION MAGNETIC WIRING SYSTEM FIRE ALARM MECHANICAL WORK PROVIDED UNDER CONTROL WIRING OL OL OL HC H O A OL BOND EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR TO MOTOR FRAME. BOND EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR TO ENCLOSURE. DISCONNECT SWITCH PROVIDED UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK. CONTROL DEVICES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK. MOTOR STARTER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK POWER WIRING AND CONNECTIONS PROVIDED UNDER ELECTRICAL WORK. 6 5 4 3 2 1 INDICATED) SWITCH (WHERE LOCAL DISCONNECT 1 1 1 4 5 3 DETAIL NOTES: SCALE: NONE TYPICAL THREE PHASE MOTOR CONNECTION1 E-401 SCALE: NONE TYPICAL RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION PANEL NUMBER BRANCH BREAKER NUMBER 1-CBLP-2-SHB#32 THE PLANS. NUMBER AS SHOWH ON THE SAME CIRCUIT AND NOT NECESSARILY SHALL BE AS INSTALLED CIRCUIT INFORMATION SUFFICIENT. ACTUAL WILL NOT BE FACTORY ADHESIVE USING CONTACT CEMENT. ADHERE TO COVERPLATE COLOR WITH OWNER, DYMO LABEL, VERIFY RECEPTACLES HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED OR TO LEFT OF OUTLET ON GROUNDING PIN ON TOP 1-CBLP-2-SHB#32TYPICAL 2 E-401 C. B. A. DETAIL NOTES: ENGRAVING ON THE RECEPTACLE COVERPLATE STATING "UPS POWER". FOR RECEPTACLES WHICH ARE FED FROM UPS POWER ALSO PROVIDE TO REDUCE SOUND TRANSMISSION. OUTLETS BACK TO BACK. INSTALL IN ADJACENT STUD CAVITIES, DO NOT INSTALL RECEPTACLES, COMPUTER OR TELEPHONE CONNECT TO GROUND BUS IN PANEL. PROVIDE GREEN GROUND WIRE IN ALL RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS. ARCHITECT FOR ALL OTHERS. 2. AS SELECTED BY 1. RED FOR EMERGENCY SHALL BE: RECEPTACLE COLOR & DETAILS SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL E-401 MRG MRG FIRE ALARM NOTES: J. I. H. G. F. E. D. C. B. A. elevator controller. Addressable monitor devices shall be located adjacent to monitored device. Addressable control devices shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled device, such as ventilation fan or accessible and conspicuous location. Remote Test Stations for Duct Detectors and Beam Detectors: Mount approximately 5 feet high in an 5 feet in height to panel display readout. All panels shall have 36 inches of working clearance in front of panel. Fire Alarm Control Panels, Annunciator Panels, Warden Stations, etc.: Mount in accessible location approximately below ceiling. Audible Notification Appliances: Top of device not less than 90 inches above floor or not less than 6 inches visible to persons entering the floor from the exit stair. appliances in corridors. Locate an appliance opposite each access door to an exit stair so that it will be not more than 15 feet from end of the corridor, with a separation not greater than 100 feet between above the floor. Depending on ceiling height, higher mounting is preferred. Visible appliances shall be located Visual and Combination Audible/Visual Notification Appliances: The entire lens shall be within 80 inches-96 inches detector shall be installed within 2 feet of each sprinkler head. Elevator Shutdown: If sprinkler heads are located in the elevator machine room or hoistway top, one heat elevator recall are only required where the top of the hoistway is sprinklered.) detectors shall be no more than 21 feet from centerline of elevator door. (Hoistway smoke detectors for Elevator Recall: Elevator recall shall be by lobby, machine room, and hoistway smoke detectors only. Lobby not more than 5 feet from door. release. Smoke detectors, which are provided for door release only, shall be on the centerline of doorway and Door Release: Smoke detection providing area coverage on either side of the doors may be used for door conditions and give reasons for coverage design.) (If design conditions other than smooth ceilings or ceiling heights over 12 feet are encountered, show reflected ceiling plan. Provide a spacing of 3 feet or more from supply and return diffusers. Coordinate trades by means of the 0.7 times the detector spacing. Spacing is 30 feet for smoke detectors and 50 feet for heat detectors. Spot Type Heat and Smoke Detectors: For smooth ceilings, all points on the ceiling shall have a detector within and accessible. entrance to an exit. Locate on the latch side of door, if possible. Boxes are to be conspicuous, unobstructed, Manual Fire Alarm Boxes: Mounting height 42-48 inches to handle. Locate no more than 5 feet from the Fire Alarm Mounting and Spacing Guide 10. 9. 8. 7. 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. MARKERS". IN CONDUIT CONTAINING MORE THAN ONE WIRE SHALL BE LABELED ON EACH END WITH "E-Z TRANSPOSING OR CHANGING COLOR CODING OF WIRES IS NOT PERMITTED. ALL CONDUCTORS TO ENSURE POSITIVE GROUNDING THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE SYSTEM. ALL CONDUIT, MOUNTING BOXES AND PANELS SHALL BE HUNG AND FASTENED WITH FITTINGS ANY OTHER FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WIRING IN A COMMON CONDUIT. AND CONTROL WIRING (FAN SHUTDOWN, ETC.) IN SEPARATE CONDUIT. DO NOT RUN WITH ALL LOW VOLTAGE FIRE ALARM CIRCUITS MAY OCCUPY A COMMON CONDUIT. RUN AC POWER PROVIDE ADDITIONAL DETECTORS WHERE REQUIRED. SPACE DETECTORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED DISTANCE. DIRECTORY. BREAKER SHALL BE CLEARLY MARKED "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL" IN THE PANELBOARD PANELBOARD TO CONTROL PANELS, TERMINAL CABINETS, ETC. AS REQUIRED. THE CIRCUIT PROVIDE 120V, 20A DEDICATED BRANCH CIRCUITS FROM THE LOCAL AREA LIFE SAFETY IDENTIFICATION. TESTING. ALL OTHER FIRE ALARM JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE MARKED FOR FACP AND OTHER PANELS SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH CLEARANCES FOR OBSERVATION AND WRAP OVER ITSELF, PROTECTING THE WRITING. TAPE. THE TAPE SHALL BE LONG ENOUGH SO WHEN WRAPPED ROUND THE CABLE IT WILL INSTALLATION. LABELING IS TO BE DONE WITH PERMANENT MARKERS ON CLEAR MYLAR RECORD OF THE IDENTIFICATION AND USE OF EACH ABLE MUST BE MADE AT THE TIME OF CABLING MUST BE UNIQUELY IDENTIFIED AND LABELED, AND A PERMANENT, ACCURATE APPLY. ACCORDANCE WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS AND ALL CODES THAT MAY ALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM RACEWAY SIZES AND CIRCUITRY REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE IN SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. ALL WIRING SHALL BE CLASS B WIRING. REFER TO SECTION 283102 OF THE SEE FLOOR PLANS. DEVICES SHOWN ARE DIAGRAMMATICALLY ONLY. FOR EXACT LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES PROVIDED. NOT ALL EXISTING DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT ARE SHOWN FOR CLARITY OF NEW WORK TO BE REFER TO FLOOR PLANS FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS. SMOKE DETECTORS AND ELEVATOR CONTROLLER, ETC. NOT ALL INTERCONNECTING WIRING IS INDICATED, i.e. AS BETWEEN ELEVATOR LOBBY COMPLETE SYSTEM AS REQUIRED BY SYSTEM MANUFACTURER. TO INDICATE ROUTING OR QUANTITY OF WIRES REQUIRED. PROVIDE WIRING FOR A WIRING INDICATED ON THE RISER DIAGRAM IS DIAGRAMMATIC ONLY. IT IS NOT INTENDED LETTERING INDICATING "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM". ALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE PAINTED RED WITH STENCIL AND OPERATIONAL SYSTEM. ADDITIONAL TERMINAL CABINETS, BOOSTERS, ETC. AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE DEVICES AND MINIMUM QUANTITIES OF TERMINAL CABINETS & POWER BOOSTERS. PROVIDE THE FIRE ALARM RISER DENOTES THE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYSTEM WITH TYPICAL CIRCUITS. FOR EASY IDENTIFICATION OF INITIATING, INDICATING AND AUXILIARY CONTROL WIRING COLOR CODES SHALL BE CONSISTENT THROUGHOUT THE SYSTEM AND SHALL ALLOW OPENS, OR SHORTS. ALL WIRING SHALL BE CHECKED AND TESTED TO ENSURE THAT THERE ARE NO GROUNDS, DIRECTLY OPPOSITE ITS TERMINAL. CONDUCTORS IN CABINETS SHALL BE FORMED AND HARNESSED SO THAT EACH DROPS OFF S. R. Q. P. O. N. M. L. K. (E) BATTERIES TROUBLE TROUBLE IN CASE OF FIRE EVACUATE BUILDING AND CALL THE FIRE DEPARTMENT!!! ALARM 1 ALARM 2 PREALARM TROUBLE PREALARM ALARM 2 ALARM 1 ALARM ALARMALARMALARM ALARM ALARMALARM FACP ALARM TROUBLE TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE TROUBLE TROUBLE TROUBLE TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM PREALARM ALARM 2 ALARM 1 ALARM 1 ALARM 2 PREALARM TROUBLE TROUBLETROUBLETROUBLE TROUBLETROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARMALARM TROUBLE TROUBLE TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM TROUBLE ALARM ALARM ALARM (E) FHS FHS FHS ICM DSD RTS FF F DH DH DH DH FSD FSD ICM IMM AED FF FSD FSD FARFAR F F FAR FAR ICM DSD RTS SCALE: NONE 3 E-401 120 MAPLE FIRE ALARM RISER 2. 1. SCHEDULE NOTES: THERE WILL BE TWO ASD’S FOR EACH RTU. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM CONNECTIONS TO ASD’S(ASD’S PROVIDED BY HVAC CONTRACTOR). PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING SQUARE D PANEL. ADDRESSABLE 7200 FCI SCHEDULE CONTROL AND EQUIPMENT ELECTRIC NOTES:GENERAL 1. CONTRACTOR. 26 DIVISION THE BY PROVIDED DEVICESALL 2. NUMBER EQUIPMENT INDICATES NUMBERITEM 3. NOTED. OTHERWISE UNLESS MOUNTED SURFACE BE SHALL DEVICESALL 4. CONTRACTOR. 23 & 22 DIVISION THE BY REQUIRED, AS SIZE OVERLOADS,PROVIDE 5. UNIT. THE AT LOCATED IS DEVICES CONTROL INDICATES"AU" 6. NON-FUSED. INDICATES"NF" 7. UNIT. WITH INTEGRAL INDICATES"IU" EQUIPMENT WIRING & PROTECTION SOURCE,POWER DESIGNATION ITEM BY PLANS THE ON SHOWN AS DEVICESCONTROL ID ITEM NAME LOCATIONROOM HP KW PHASE VOLTS SYSTEM AMPS SYSTEM orMCA CENTER CONTROL orPANEL FUSE FOR "FU"or RBREAKE CIRCUIT UNIT CONTROLTO PANEL FROM WIRINGPOWER EQUIPMENT TO UNITCONTROL FROM WIRINGPOWER STARTER SIZENEMA TYPENEMASTARTER MOTORMANUAL RELAY WITHSTARTER MOTORMANUAL STARTERMAGNETIC RELAY WITHSTARTER MAGNETICCOMBINATION STARTERVOLTAGE REDUCEDCOMBINATION SIZE (F)MP/FUSE STARTERCOMBINATIONDRIVE SPEEDADJUSTABLE BYPASSWITH DRIVE SPEEDADJUSTABLE ASD REDUNDANTWITH DRIVE SPEEDADJUSTABLEOTHERS BY FURNISHEDUNIT CONTROLPACKAGEDOTHERS BYCONTROLLER PUMPDUPLEX REQUIREDSHUTDOWN FAN ALARMFIRE STATIONTEST REMOTE W/DETECTOR SMOKE DUCTSUPPLY STATIONTEST REMOTE W/DETECTOR SMOKE DUCTRETURN STATIONTEST REMOTE W/DETECTOR SMOKE DUCTEXHAUSTCONNECTIONTHERMOSTAT CONNECTIONAQUASTATCONNECTION DAMPERMOTORIZEDPUSHBUTTONSSTART/STOP SWITCHSELECTORHAND/OFF/AUTOLOCATION DEVICECONTROL SWITCHSAFETY ID ITEM AMPS SWITCH SIZE FUSE LOC. PROOF WEATHER SNOTE REF. PHASE GROUND CONDUIT PHASE GROUND CONDUIT RTU-1 UNIT TOPROOF ROOF 3 480 162.9 MDP 175/3 3#3/0 1#6 2-1/2"C 3#3/0 1#6 2-1/2"C X X X X ROOF 200 NF AU WP 1,2 RTU-1 ACCU-2 UNIT CONDENSING COOLEDAIR ROOF 3 480 128.8 MDP 150/3 3#1/0 1#6 2"C 3#1/0 1#6 2"C X ROOF 200 NF AU WP 1 ACCU-2 RTU-2 UNIT TOPROOF ROOF 3 480 44.2 MDP 60/3 3#6 1#10 1"C 3#6 1#10 1"C X X X X ROOF 60 NF AU WP 1,2 RTU-2 HWP-1 PUMP WATERHOT CLG FLOOR2ND 1 3 480 2.1 MDP 15/3 3#12 1#12 1/2"C 3#12 1#12 1/2"C X X AU 1 HWP-1 ICM SD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C.. SPECIFIC WRITTEN PERMISSION OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, CORPORATION FOR ANY PURPOSE WHATSOEVER EXCEPT WITH THE THEREOF SHALL BE UTILIZED BY ANY PERSON, FIRM, OR ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE, P.C. AND NO PART OWNED BY AND REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF SWBR ARCHITECTURE, AND PLANS INDICATED THEREON OR PRESENTED THEREBY ARE THESE DOCUMENTS AND ALL THE IDEAS, ARRANGEMENTS, DESIGNS 387 East Main Street Rochester, NY 14604-2107 Voice: 585.232.8300 Fax: 585.232.9221 w w w . s w b r . c o m FILE PATH:ROCHESTER, N E W Y O R K CONSULTANT PROJECT: CLIENT: DRAWING TITLE proj. no. checked proj. mgr. drawn by STATUS: DRAWING NO. ISSUE DATE:3/26/2014 9:49:24 AMC:\1-Local Revit Models 2014\13465.00_120Maple RTU Replacement_Central_kristins.rvtCORNELL UNIVERSITY REPLACEMENT 120 MAPLE RTU 13465.00 REVISIONS no.date by description ENGINEERING P.C. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14604 (585) 288-5590 FAX: (585) 288-0233 M/E Project 130267 150 NORTH CHESTNUT STREET ROCHESTER BUFFALO SYRACUSE CAPITAL DISTRICT JAD 04/18/2014 DOCUMENTS 100% CONSTRUCTION CORNELL 00 01 10 - 1 Ithaca, New York TABLE OF CONTENTS 120 Maple Ave TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 52 16 ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 53 23 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 21 16.23 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES NOT APPLICABLE CORNELL 00 01 10 - 2 Ithaca, New York TABLE OF CONTENTS 120 Maple Ave TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 04 ELECTRIC WIRING 23 05 13 MOTORS 23 05 23 VALVES 23 05 50 WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 07 10 INSULATION 23 09 23 BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 20 10 PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 21 10 WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 23 31 00 SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 23 33 13 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 23 41 00 AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 23 73 13 AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) CORNELL 00 01 10 - 3 Ithaca, New York TABLE OF CONTENTS 120 Maple Ave TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 01 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 20 00 ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 31 02 POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS CORNELL SECTION 02 41 19 Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 120 Maple Ave SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. C. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. CORNELL SECTION 02 41 19 Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 120 Maple Ave SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 E. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. CORNELL SECTION 02 41 19 Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 120 Maple Ave SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. CORNELL SECTION 02 41 19 Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 120 Maple Ave SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. CORNELL SECTION 02 41 19 Ithaca, New York SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 120 Maple Ave SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. C. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA- approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 CORNELL 04 20 00 - 1 Ithaca, New York UNIT MASONRY 120 Maple Ave UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Clay face brick. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. 2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. CORNELL 04 20 00 - 2 Ithaca, New York UNIT MASONRY 120 Maple Ave UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Grade: SW . 2. Type: FBS. 3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. 4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 5. Size: Match existing brick. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. CORNELL 04 20 00 - 3 Ithaca, New York UNIT MASONRY 120 Maple Ave UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. Use Type N mortar. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. B. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. C. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. CORNELL 04 20 00 - 4 Ithaca, New York UNIT MASONRY 120 Maple Ave UNIT MASONRY 04 20 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 COMPOSITE MASONRY A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together as follows: 1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place. C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless otherwise indicated. D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 1. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T- shaped units. 3.5 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. B. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 3.7 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 CORNELL 05 31 00 - 1 Ithaca, New York STEEL DECKING 120 Maple Ave STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." CORNELL 05 31 00 - 2 Ithaca, New York STEEL DECKING 120 Maple Ave STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch. 5. Span Condition: As indicated. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon- steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. CORNELL 05 31 00 - 3 Ithaca, New York STEEL DECKING 120 Maple Ave STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 incheslong, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter and Spacing: As indicated on the Drawings. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, as indicated on the Drawings. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1- 1/2 inches with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inchesminimum. D. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 31 00 CORNELL 05 50 00 - 1 Ithaca, New York METAL FABRICATIONS 120 Maple Ave METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Metal plate. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not spec ified in other Sections. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. CORNELL 05 50 00 - 2 Ithaca, New York METAL FABRICATIONS 120 Maple Ave METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. CORNELL 05 50 00 - 3 Ithaca, New York METAL FABRICATIONS 120 Maple Ave METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 2.6 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. CORNELL 05 50 00 - 4 Ithaca, New York METAL FABRICATIONS 120 Maple Ave METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 CORNELL 05 52 16 - 1 Ithaca, New York ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM 05 52 16 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 05 52 16 - ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes freestanding roof edge railing system, including pipe railings, uprights, bases, counterweights, and fittings. 1.3 REFERENCE A. OSHA: 29 CFR 1910.23 (e) (1) - (e) (3) (iv); 29 CFR 1926.502 (b) (1) - (b) (14), all applicable state, local and regional codes. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Railing shall consist of top rails, mid rails, uprights, counterweights and connections. B. All pipe connections to be structural pipe fittings manufactured to the requirements of ASTM A47-77-32510. C. Railing assembly shall be capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point on the top rail. Test in accordance with OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.23 (e) (1) ; (e) (3) (iv). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for railing system. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Verify field measurements prior to assembly and/or ordering. CORNELL 05 52 16 - 2 Ithaca, New York ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM 05 52 16 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Kee Industrial Products, Inc., Model: KeeGuard Roof Edge Fall Protection System. 2. Phone: (800) 851-5181 3. Fax: (716) 896-5696 4. URL: http://www.keeguard.com. B. Product/Manufacturer: 1. KeeGuard, manufactured by Kee Industrial Products Inc. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Pipe: ASTM A53 1-1/2 inch schedule 40, galvanized. B. Rails and Posts: 1-1/2 inch diameter steel pipe, galvanized. C. Kee Klamp fittings: Elbows, Crossovers, Wall flanges, Tees, Couplings, galvanized. D. Mounting Bases: Steel bases are galvanized and are supplied with a rubber pad on underside of the component. E. Counterweights: Steel Counterweights are supplied with a rubber pad on the underside of the component. F. Fasteners: All Fasteners shall be 304 or 305 stainless steel. 2.3 FINISH A. Pipe for handrails, mid-rails, uprights and counterweight connection is to be galvanized mill finish to the requirements of ASTM A53. B. Kee Klamp Fittings shall be galvanized to meet ASTM A153. 2.4 ASSEMBLY A. Fit and shop-assembled components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. B. Upright tops shall be plugged with weather and light resistant material. C. Assemble components with joints tightly fitted and secured with set screws tightened to 29 foot pounds of torque. D. Accurately form components to suit installation. CORNELL 05 52 16 - 3 Ithaca, New York ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave ROOF EDGE GUARDRAIL SYSTEM 05 52 16 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. For all connections with fittings, each set screw is to be tightened to 29 foot pounds of torque. B. Placement of uprights and counterweights to meet manuf acturer specifications as stated in the manufacturer’s installation instructions. C. Uprights to be vertical (90 degrees from horizontal) and top rail shall be level. D. Provide a 60 mil EPDM slip sheet under all mounting bases and counter weights. Slip sheets shall extend minimum 3” beyond the edge of the mounting base and counter weight. E. Terminate the run as stated in the manufacturer’s installation instructions. F. Freestanding counterweighted guardrail system with 42" nominal height to provide a pedestrian egress barrier on the roof which withstands a minimum load of 200 lbs. in any direction applied to the top rail per OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1910.23 (e) (1) ; (e) (3) (iv)); 29 CFR 1910.502 (b) (1) - (b) (14). END OF SECTION 05 52 16 CORNELL 06 10 00 - 1 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY 120 Maple Ave ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. CORNELL 06 10 00 - 2 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY 120 Maple Ave ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules- writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. CORNELL 06 10 00 - 3 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY 120 Maple Ave ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species: 1. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure- preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. CORNELL 06 10 00 - 4 Ithaca, New York ROUGH CARPENTRY 120 Maple Ave ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 CORNELL 07 53 23 - 1 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 1 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 SECTION 07 53 23 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) roofing system. 2. Vapor retarder. 3. Roof insulation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including: 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing. 4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 2 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 2 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other components of roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 3 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 3 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners, for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures: 1. Uplift Pressures: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.3 EPDM ROOFING A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products. 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Black. 2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 4 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 4 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 c. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. d. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. e. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. f. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. g. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. h. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil-thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard. D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 6- inch-wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. E. Lap Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, single-component sealant, colored to match membrane roofing. F. Water Cutoff Mastic: Manufacturer's standard butyl mastic sealant. G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products; Dens Deck Prime. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber-reinforced, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. United States Gypsum Company; Securock Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board. C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 5 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 5 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 2.6 VAPOR RETARDER A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 1970, polyethylene film laminated to layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive, minimum 40-mil-total thickness; maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm; cold applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. 2.7 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by EPDM roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick, factory primed. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products;Dens Deck Prime. D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber reinforced, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. United States Gypsum Company; Securock Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board. 2.9 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 6 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 6 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking." B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition. 3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers' written instructions. 3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install self-adhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Seal laps by rolling. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 7 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 7 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system. 3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.7 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhereroofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 8 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 8 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing. E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters. F. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing terminations. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements. I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. 3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. CORNELL 07 53 23 - 9 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 9 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements. 3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. 3.12 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: _________________. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: __________________. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 mph; c. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and CORNELL 07 53 23 - 10 Ithaca, New York ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 120 Maple Ave ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER 07 53 23 - 10 RTU Replacement (EPDM) ROOFING April 18, 2014 g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of ___________________, ________________. 1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________. 2. Name: ______________________________________. 3. Title: _______________________________________. END OF SECTION 07 53 23 CORNELL 07 62 00 - 1 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 05 31 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing. 2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials. B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 3. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 4. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 5. Include details of special conditions. 6. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. CORNELL 07 62 00 - 2 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 05 31 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. CORNELL 07 62 00 - 3 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 05 31 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface. 1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. 2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick. 2. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 3. Accessories: a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge. 4. Finish: Mill. CORNELL 07 62 00 - 4 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 05 31 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Sealant Joints: W here movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.6 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch-wide, concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. CORNELL 07 62 00 - 5 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 05 31 00 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch-wide, concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a. Aluminum: 0.063 inch thick. C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. CORNELL 07 62 00 - 6 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 05 31 00 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch centers. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch centers unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. CORNELL 07 62 00 - 7 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 05 31 00 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean off excess sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 CORNELL 09 21 16.23 - 1 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 21 16.23 - 1 RTU Replacement SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES April 18, 2014 SECTION 09 21 16.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For shaft wall assemblies, from ICC-ES. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. CORNELL 09 21 16.23 - 2 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 21 16.23 - 2 RTU Replacement SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES April 18, 2014 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated. B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. C. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. D. Room-Side Finish: As indicated. E. Shaft-Side Finish: Gypsum shaftliner board, Type X. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent by weight. B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. C. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces. 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Long Edges: Double bevel. D. Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board." 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Recycled Content of Steel: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. CORNELL 09 21 16.23 - 3 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 21 16.23 - 3 RTU Replacement SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES April 18, 2014 D. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing requirements. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing. D. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction. CORNELL 09 21 16.23 - 4 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 21 16.23 - 4 RTU Replacement SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES April 18, 2014 F. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies. G. Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. H. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 21 16.23 CORNELL 09 29 00 - 1 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. CORNELL 09 29 00 - 2 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire- resistive capability. 1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. CORNELL 09 29 00 - 3 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. CORNELL 09 29 00 - 4 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. B. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. CORNELL 09 29 00 - 5 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. U-Bead: Use where indicated. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. CORNELL 09 29 00 - 6 Ithaca, New York GYPSUM BOARD 120 Maple Ave GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 CORNELL 09 91 23 - 1 Ithaca, New York INTERIOR PAINTING 120 Maple Ave INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Gypsum board. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Coronado Paint. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). CORNELL 09 91 23 - 2 Ithaca, New York INTERIOR PAINTING 120 Maple Ave INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As indicated on the Drawings or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 40-7210 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Flat 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 28 Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Flat Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W2600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel 274; Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Coronado; 30-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W2600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. CORNELL 09 91 23 - 3 Ithaca, New York INTERIOR PAINTING 120 Maple Ave INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. CORNELL 09 91 23 - 4 Ithaca, New York INTERIOR PAINTING 120 Maple Ave INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. END OF SECTION 09 91 23 CORNELL SECTION 23 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 05 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. B. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. C. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. D. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain from Owner and other Contractors, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each trade shall include their required cutting and patching work unless shown as part of the General Construction Contract. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, for additional requirements. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying. Patch cut or abandoned holes left by removals of equipment or fixtures. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering, other finished surfaces. Patch openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.4 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.5 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Contract. Mechanical and Electrical Contracts shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.7 SUPPORTS A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support contract work. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For precast panels/planks and metal decks, support mechanical/electrical work as determined by manufacturer and the Engineer. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity. B. Equipment, piping, conduit, raceway, etc. supports shall be installed to minimize the generation and transmission of vibration. C. Materials and equipment shall be solely supported by the building structure and connected framing. Gypboard, ceilings, other finishes, etc. shall not be used for support of materials and equipment. 1.8 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective Contract work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each Contract. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide Contractor for General Trades with a set of architectural plans with size and approximate locations of access panels shown. 1.9 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final hot water, glycol and drain connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 05 00 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 05 04 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC WIRING 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC WIRING 23 05 04 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 05 04 - ELECTRIC WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services for the complete installation of motor control wiring and temperature control wiring as required in Contract Documents. Provide wiring and conduit, required to connect devices furnished as part of or adjunctive to the automatic temperature control system and for motor control regardless of the source of supply. Control wiring includes 120 volt and lower voltage wiring for control signals directing equipment operation. Control circuits shall be 120 volt maximum. Provide wiring in accordance with requirements specified in Division 26, "Electrical" and the National Electrical Code. Provide devices required for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, disconnect switches, relays, and circuit breaker protection. B. Coordinate all work with Division 26, "Electrical". 1.2 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Power wiring for motors, motor starters and associated starting and control equipment, as well as the motor starters (except in the case of equipment specified to have packaged control/starters), are included in Division 26, "Electrical", unless otherwise called for. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Wiring installed in compliance with all requirements of Division 26, "Electrical". 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete wiring diagrams for equipment systems. Deliver wiring diagrams to proper trades in time for roughing of conduit, equipment connections, and avoid delay in construction schedule. Wiring diagrams and roughing information to be wired as part of the Work of Division 26, "Electrical", shall be clearly indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Refer to Division 26 specifications for required wiring materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Check electrical wiring pertaining to equipment for completeness and correctness of connections. Correct any misapplied motor and/or motor starter, improper thermal overload device, or device which fails to function and resultant damage, whether due to incorrect connections or improper information on wiring diagrams. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 04 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC WIRING 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC WIRING 23 05 04 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.2 WIRING FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Provide motor control and temperature control wiring for equipment. All wiring shall be in conduit, unless otherwise noted. Refer to Section 260501 for type of conduit to be used in specific applications. Provide 18 in. length flexible conduit at motors and devices subject to vibration. Conduit supported on 5 ft. centers. Do not attach directly to hot surfaces, piping, or ductwork. Control wiring shall be in separate conduit from all other wiring. Provide green grounding wire circuited from starter, and run ground wire through conduit to each remote auxiliary relay, pushbutton station, remote panel heating device, thermostat, or device with potentials in excess of 50 volts. Size ground wire as required by NEC. B. All temperature control wiring shall be plenum rated type, meeting the requirements of NEC Article 300. C. Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, selector switches, auxiliary starter contacts, and other devices required to provide specified functions. D. Where allowable by Code and contract documents, temperature control wiring may be installed without conduit. Installation and wire insulation types shall be as described by NEC, Article 725. All low voltage wiring circuits 50 volt and under shall: 1. Be adequately supported using bridle rings spaced a maximum of 3 ft. on centers or other approved method when installed horizontally above accessible ceilings or run exposed in unfinished areas. 2. Be installed in conduit when run in wall cavity or surface metal raceway where no access is available to wall cavity, in finished areas. 3. Be installed in conduit when installed vertically in Mechanical Rooms from panels and devices up to ceiling. 4. Be installed in conduit in all cases not specifically covered by the above cases, or where subject to physical damage. 3.3 EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide power and control wiring between sections of electrical radiation units, between shipping splits, and between remote panels, thermostats, disconnect switches, and their respective units. Provide control wiring from the package control system, to each respective electric heat coil, reheat coil or motor. Properly mount control package. Power wiring to and including disconnect switch shall be by Division 26 "Electrical". CORNELL SECTION 23 05 04 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC WIRING 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC WIRING 23 05 04 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.4 FIELD WIRING IN STARTERS, CONTROLLERS AND PANELS A. Wiring within starters, controllers, and temperature control panels, shall be routed neatly in gutter space, away from moving and/or heat producing parts. Provide 30 ampere, 600 volt rated terminal blocks. Do not place more than two wire connections on pilot device or relay terminal. Where more than two circuit connections are required, use terminal blocks. Provide nylon self insulated-insulated, locking type spade lugs for all control wires. Cables and wires shall be neatly bundled and lashed with nylon cable straps. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 05 13 Ithaca, New York MOTORS 120 Maple Ave MOTORS 23 05 13 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 05 13 - MOTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data on all motors. B. Product Data: For each motor, provide dimensions; mounting arrangements; frame type, enclosure type, location for conduit entries; shipping and operating weights; and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings and characteristics. C. Motor Performance Data: For each motor, include the following manufacturers' data: 1. Motor Performance: Percent Efficiency, Power Factor, Torque, RPM, Duty Rating and Design Category. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Motor manufacturer shall be based and headquartered in the United States of America and shall design and manufacture motors in the United States. 2. Motor manufacturer shall have over fifteen (15) years-experience in the motor industry and shall maintain active company-wide quality assurance program. 3. Motor manufacturer shall maintain an authorized service center within 60 miles of the project site, capable of providing training, parts and emergency maintenance and repairs. B. Motor performance shall be warranted against material and workmanship defects by manufacturers limited warranty and service policy for the period of at least 18 months from the day of shipment from the factory or the manufacturer's warehouse. 1. Premium efficiency motors shall be warranted for 36 months. 2. Extended warranty shall be offered for certain products or as agreed by additional terms and specified elsewhere. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 13 Ithaca, New York MOTORS 120 Maple Ave MOTORS 23 05 13 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. General Requirements: 1. Motors built for 60 Hz operation, three phase for 1/2 HP and larger; single phase for 1/3 HP and smaller. a. In compliance with NEMA Standards, wound specifically for nameplate voltage, and selected for appropriate duty and environment. b. 1.15 minimum service factor at rated voltage and frequency. c. Bearings: Bearings shall have a rated fatigue life of L-10 (B-10) of 150,000 hours for direct-coupled applications and 50,000 hours for belted applications minimum. Belted rating shall be based on radial loads and pulley sizes called out in NEMA MG 1-14.43. The calculation will be determined from the pulley centerline being at the end of the motor shaft. d. V-belt connected motors with adjustable slide rail bases and pulleys. e. Motors shall have Class F insulation system, with Class B temperature rise, insulation meeting NEMA MG 1 Part 31. Maximum allowable motor temperature rise for open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type at 1.15 service factor shall be 105°C above 40°C ambient with a total temperature rating of 155°C. f. NEMA locked rotor kVA code as required to match unit equipment torque characteristics. g. Single-phase motors shall be capacitor start, induction run, or split phase type. h. Polyphase motors shall be constant speed, squirrel cage, unless otherwise specified. i. Nameplates shall have as a minimum, all information as described in NEMA Standard MG-1-20.60. Motor nameplate shall be mounted on enclosure with stainless steel fastening pins. 2. Motors for use with adjustable speed drive applications shall be premium efficiency inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA and be capable of a 20:1 turndown. a. These motors shall meet NEMA corona inception voltage requirements, withstanding peak voltages up to 1600 volts, and be manufactured in accordance with NEMA MG-1 Part 30 and 31. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 13 Ithaca, New York MOTORS 120 Maple Ave MOTORS 23 05 13 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 b. All motors controlled by adjustable speed drives shall be equipped with circumferential micro-fiber shaft grounding rings to meet NEMA MGI 3.4.4.4.3 AEGIS Shaft Grounding Kit, installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Three phase motors rated 1 HP and greater shall be copper winding, relubable ball bearings, 1.15 service factor, premium efficiency, energy-saver type with a guaranteed NEMA nominal full-load efficiency, by IEEE Standard 112 Test Method "B". Efficiency rating shall appear on nameplate, and shall be not less than as follows; per NEMA MG 1 Part 12, Table 12-12, nominal minimum efficiencies: MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL-LOAD MOTOR EFFICIENCY HP ODP MOTORS (RPM) TEFC MOTORS (RPM) 1200 1800 3600 1200 1800 3600 1.0 82.5 85.5 77 82.5 85.5 77.0 1.5 86.5 86.5 84 87.5 86.5 84 2.0 87.5 86.5 85.5 88.5 86.5 85.5 3.0 88.5 89.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 5.0 89.5 89.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 7.5 90.2 91.0 88.5 91.0 91.7 89.5 10 91.7 91.7 89.5 91.0 91.7 90.2 15 91.7 93.0 90.2 91.7 92.4 91.0 20 92.4 93.0 91.0 91.7 93.0 91.0 25 93.0 93.6 91.7 93.0 93.6 91.7 4. Nominal Motor Voltage Table: Nominal System Voltage Motor Nameplate 480V - 3 phase 460 volt 208V - 1 phase and 3 phase 200 volt 120V - 1 phase 115 volt 5. Motor Application; Provide the following enclosure types unless noted otherwise: Environment/Location Motor Enclosure Type General Purpose Open drip-proof, TEFC with cast iron frame, or encapsulated Outdoors, below grade or high humidity TEFC with cast iron frame Packaged Refrigeration Compressors Hermetic or semi-hermetic 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: Motors need not all be of the same manufacturer. Subject to the requirements of this section provide products by the following: a. General Electric Energy & Saver NEMA Premium Efficiency/(ODP); General Electric X$D Ultra NEMA Premium Efficiency (TEFC). b. Century/A.O. Smith Speed Plus CORNELL SECTION 23 05 13 Ithaca, New York MOTORS 120 Maple Ave MOTORS 23 05 13 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 c. Baldor-Reliance Super E. d. Lincoln Ultimate E CTAC. e. Marathon XRI. f. Siemens GO100A. g. Nidec Motor Co. (U.S. Motors) Premium Efficient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTORS A. Furnished by equipment manufacturer and especially manufactured and/or selected, mounted, and installed for intended use. Install motors accessible for maintenance and belt adjustment. END OF SECTION 23 05 13 CORNELL SECTION 23 05 23 Ithaca, New York VALVES 120 Maple Ave VALVES 23 05 23 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 05 23 - VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation and related Work designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Valves and accessories. 1.3 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted, all valves for shut-off and bypass service shall be ball valves, 2" and below, and butterfly valves 2-1/2" and above. Ball valves are acceptable in 2-1/2" and 3" copper only. B. Valves for balancing operations shall not be ball or butterfly. C. End connections for NPS 2” and below shall be the same as is used for fittings. Use flanged valves for NPS two and one half inches (2-1/2") and above. Solder joints are also acceptable in 2-1/2" and 3" copper piping systems. D. A manufacturer's valve tag shall be on all valves identifying the valve type and major component materials. E. Install valves after welding adjacent to valve is complete to protect seat and disk. F. Insulated valves shall have extended handle stems. G. All valves for all services shall be fully bi-directional and suitable for dead end service. H. On all valves the packing compression is to be independent of the stem, ball or handle systems. All valve stems are to be blowout proof. Packing shall be accessible without disturbing the insulation. I. Plug or gate valves shall not be used on any services. J. All valves used for vent or drain service on water systems shall have a brass hose connection with cap and chain. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 23 Ithaca, New York VALVES 120 Maple Ave VALVES 23 05 23 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BALL VALVES A. For all water services, ball valves shall be: 1. Body Bronze 2. Body Style Standard Port 3. Trim 316 Stainless Steel Ball and Stem, with stem extension to raise handle out of insulation 4. Seat Reinforced Teflon (RTFE), 15% glass filled double seal 5. Seat Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 250°F Minimum 6. Body Working P/T Rating 300 psig @ 300°F Minimum 7. WOG Rating 300 psig Minimum 8. Saturated Steam Rating 150 psig Minimum 2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. General: For special applications, obtain approval from Facilities Engineering. 2. All lugged butterfly valves shall be fully bi-directional and bi-directionally dead-endable to the full pressure rating of the seat. This is defined to mean that the seat rating is not reduced when pressure is applied in either direction and the valve is capable of serving as a blank flange, when bolted to the end of a line from either side of the valve body and no mating flange is attached. The means of attaching the body to the pipe flange, and of attaching the seat ring to the body shall meet the ANSI class rating of the valve without mechanical failure. This requirement normally results in partially lugged butterfly valves not being acceptable. 3. Packing shall be able to be tightened without removing the insulation. 4. External disc position indicators shall be provided. 5. Valves must be fully factory assembled, set and tested. 6. Gear operators on steam valves shall be spaced 4" (four inches) above packing assembly. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 23 Ithaca, New York VALVES 120 Maple Ave VALVES 23 05 23 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 7. Install all steam valves with the stem at least 30˚ off vertical to protect the bottom bearing from debris. 8. On all butterfly valve actuators located greater than 5' (five feet) above the floor, install chain wheels to 5' (five feet) above the floor when the design engineer determines valve service is critical. B. Standard Butterfly Valves: For all water services and all other normal non- corrosive services, butterfly valves shall have the following requirements: 1. Body: Ductile Iron or Cast Iron 2. Body Style: Fully lugged 3. Trim: 316 or 17-4 pH Stainless Steel 4. Disc: Stainless Steel 5. Seat: Resilient Seat, fully bi-directional, dead-endable, EPDM 6. Seat Working P/T Rating: 150 psig @ 250F Minimum 7. Body Working P/T Rating: ANSI 150 8. Actuator: Under 4" – Locking Lever Handle 4" and Above – Handwheel Gear Operator 2.3 GAUGE VALVES A. Provide ball valves for shut-off on all pressure gauges at the gauge and separate 1/2" (one half inch) ball valves for the various taps to the gauge on a manifold gauge. 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Two inches (2") and under: 45" swing check, screwed end. B. Two and one half inches (2-1/2") and over: Non-slam type globe style lift check, non- slam type tilting disc or wafer body non-slam type lift check. Double disc or bi-folding disc type valves are not acceptable. 2.5 AIR VENT VALVES A. On glycol service use manual vents only. Do not use automatic vent valves. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 23 Ithaca, New York VALVES 120 Maple Ave VALVES 23 05 23 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide valves of type called for and where required to service equipment. 2. Provide at major building and systems sections. 3. Provide chain wheels, guides, and chain loops for valves, where called for or in Mechanical Rooms where valves are mounted higher than 8’-0” AFF. 4. Locate valves with handles at horizontal position when 5 feet or more above the floor, for greater visibility. Otherwise, locate valves with handles at or above horizontal position. Swing check valves in upright position only. 5. Butterfly valves may be used for water service over 2 in. unless otherwise noted. 6. Ball valves may be used for water service through 3 in., unless otherwise noted. 7. Provide hose threaded valves at low points, strainers, equipment, and as called for. END OF SECTION 23 05 23 CORNELL SECTION 23 05 50 Ithaca, New York WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 120 Maple Ave WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 50 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 05 50 - WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and brace mechanical and electrical systems, as called for, to resist directional wind forces (lateral, longitudinal and vertical). 1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Provide work in compliance with the following codes and standards: B. Building Code of New York State, Section 1613. C. Mechanical Code of New York, Section 301. D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures - Standard ASCE/SEI 7-05. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. The contractor shall provide professional engineer stamped and signed calculations, and details of wind restraint systems to meet total design lateral force requirements for support and restraint of mechanical and electrical systems. 2. Systems requiring wind restraint: a. Air handling units. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit wind force level (Fp) calculations from applicable building code. Submit pre- approved restraint selections, installation details, and plans indicating locations of restraints. B. Calculations, plans, restraint selection, and installation details shall be stamped and signed by a professionally licensed engineer experienced in wind restraint design. C. Submit manufacturer's product data. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 50 Ithaca, New York WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 120 Maple Ave WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 50 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. For each piece of equipment that requires wind restraint as outlined in this section, include the following: 1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify the center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchoring provisions. 2. Anchorage: Provide detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the calculations are based and their installation requirements. Identify anchor bolts, studs and other mounting devices. Provide information on the size, type and spacing of mounting brackets, holes and other provisions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CODE INFORMATION A. This project is subject to the wind bracing requirements of the Building Code of New York State, International Building Code and American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE 7. The following criteria are applicable to this project: 1. Basic Wind Speed (V) (Per ASCE 7-05): 90 mph. 2. Importance Factor (I) (Per ASCE 7-05): 1.00 3. Exposure Category (Per ASCE 7-05): B 4. Height and Exposure Adjustment Coefficient (Per ASCE 7-05): 5. The mean height of the structure (h MEAN ) shall be determined thru coordination with Architectural plans and the General Contractor. 2.2 WIND BRACING AND SUPPORT OF SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, wind loads, and capacity of materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the structure. 2. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, and embedment depth. 3. All wind restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces calculated per the applicable building code and as summarized in Section 2.1. B. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to wind forces. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 50 Ithaca, New York WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 120 Maple Ave WIND RESTRAINT FOR HVAC SYSTEMS 23 05 50 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wind Restraint of Ductwork and Equipment: 1. All restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's restraint guidelines and all certified submittal data. 2. The interaction between mechanical and electrical equipment and the supporting structures shall be designed into the restraint systems. 3. Friction clips shall not be used for anchorage attachments. 4. Expansion anchors shall not be used for non-vibration isolated equipment rated over 10 HP. 5. Components mounted on vibration isolation systems shall have a bumper restraint or snubber in each horizontal direction and vertical restraints shall be provided to resist overturning. 6. Installation of restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment. 7. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified. 8. Do not install any equipment or duct that makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. 9. Prior to installation, bring to the Architect's/Engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specifications and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific equipment selection. 10. Bracing may occur from flanges of structural beams, upper truss cords of bar joists, cast in place inserts, or wedge-type concrete anchors. Consult Structural Engineer of record. 11. Overstressing of the building structure shall not occur from overhead support of equipment. Bracing attached to structural members may present additional stresses. The Contractor shall submit loads to the Structural Engineer of record for approval in this event. 12. Brace support rods when necessary to accept compressive loads. Welding of compressive braces to the vertical support rods is not acceptable. 13. Provide reinforced clevis bolts where required. 14. Do not brace a system to two independent structures such as a roof and wall. END OF SECTION 23 05 50 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 05 53 Ithaca, New York MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 120 Maple Ave MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 53 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 05 53 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATION A. All identification devices shall comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors and viewing angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device. Submit valve schedule for each piping system typewritten on an 8-1/2 in. x 11in. (Minimum) indicating valve number, location, and valve function. Submit schedule of pipe, equipment and name identification for review before stenciling or labeling. 1.4 MAKES A. Allen Systems, Inc.; Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.; Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.; Seton Name Plate Corp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. In cases where this is more than one type specified for an application, selection is installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B. All adhesives used for labels in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Types: 1. Pressure Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent adhesive, color coded, pressure sensitive vinyl pipe markers complying with ANSI A13.1. Provide a 360° wrap of flow arrow tape at each end of pipe label. O.D. Pipe or Covering Letter Size 3/4 in., 1 in., 1-1/4 in. 1/2 in. 1-1/2 in., 2 in. 3/4 in. 2-1/2 in. and over 1 in. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 53 Ithaca, New York MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 120 Maple Ave MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 53 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Lettering: 1. Piping labeling shall conform to the following list: Pipe Function Identification Cold Water CW Heating Water Supply HWS Heating Water Return HWR Refrigerant Suction RS Refrigerant Liquid RL Glycol Supply GS Glycol Return GR 2.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Standard brass valve tags, 2 in. diameter with 1/2 in. high numerals. Identify between heating and plumbing services with 1/4 in. letters above the valve number. Lettering to be stamped and in-filled black. Seton, or equal. a. Valve-tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Chart: 1. Provide valve chart for all valves tagged as a part of this project. Frame and place under clear glass. Hang in Mechanical Room. 2. Valve chart to include as a minimum, valve #, valve size, valve type, valve service description, valve location. 2.4 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, phenolic (micarta) labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 in. thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 in. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 53 Ithaca, New York MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 120 Maple Ave MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 53 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 in. for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 in., 1/2 in. for viewing distances up to 72 in., and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-in. bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. D. Provide for the following equipment: 1. Air handling units PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide valve tags for all valves provided on project, except for service valves at terminal equipment. B. Provide equipment tags for all equipment listed above. C. Provide above ceiling equipment locator stickers on ceiling grid for all equipment listed above. D. Provide piping identification with directional flow arrows for all piping on project, at maximum intervals of 20 feet. For piping installed through rooms, provide at least one pipe label in each room, for each pipe function. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for complete adjusting and balancing Work as required in Contract Documents. B. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures of, mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results. C. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems: 1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges; including constant volume and variable volume systems. 2. Return air systems. 3. Hydronic systems; including constant flow and variable flow systems. D. This Section does not include: 1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes; 2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems; 3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must be added to achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation requirements. 4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Provide information in report form listing items required by specifications. Results shall be guaranteed. Contractor shall be subject to recall to site to verify report information before acceptance of the report by the Owner's Representative. B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit testing and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Section 3.1.B, "Preparation", and consistent with those listed in Part 3 of this specification. C. System Readiness Checklists: Within thirty (30) days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, AABC agency shall provide system readiness checklists as specified in Section 3.1.C, "Preparation", to be used and filled out by the installing contractors verifying that systems are ready for Testing and Balancing. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. Examination Report: Provide a summary report of the examination review required in Section 3.1.D to the Engineer, documenting issues that may preclude the proper testing and balancing of the systems. E. Certified report format shall consist of the following: 1. Title sheet with job name, contractor, engineer, date, balance contractor's name, address, telephone number and contact person's name and the balancing technician's name. 2. Individual test sheets for air handlers, terminal units, air distribution, exhaust fans, duct traverses, pumps, air handling coils, reheat coils, radiation, convectors, cabinet unit heaters and unit ventilators. 3. Manufacturer's pump and fan curves for equipment installed with design and actual operating conditions indicated. 4. One complete set of reproducible record contract drawings marked up with terminal unit numbers, room numbers, testports locations, register, grille and diffuser numbers to correlate test sheet. Data shall be provided with reports. 5. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System testing, adjusting and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes: 1. The balance of air and water distribution; 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 3. Electrical measurement; 4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls. B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment. C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design quantities. E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 F. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. This data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing. G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. There are supply inlets on water terminals, supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals, and exhaust or return supply or outside air inlets or outlets on terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, and louvers. H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow. I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch mains. J. Branch Main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals. K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Follow procedures and methods published by one or more of the following: 1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 2. Individual manufacturer requirements and recommendations. B. Maintain qualified personnel at project for system operation and trouble shooting. TAB contractor shall change sheaves and perform mechanical adjustments in conjunction with balancing procedure. C. Balancing contractor shall be current member of AABC or NEBB. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Before concealment of systems visit the job site to verify and advise on type and location of balancing devices and test points. Make changes as required to balance facilities. B. Place systems in satisfactory operating condition. 1. Adjusting and balancing shall be accomplished as soon as the systems are complete and before Owner takes possession. 2. Prior to balancing, adjust balancing devices for full flow; fill, vent and clean hydronic systems, replace temporary filters and strainers. 3. Initial adjustment and balancing to quantities as called for or as directed by the engineer, to satisfy job conditions. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. All outdoor conditions (Db, Wb, and a description of the weather conditions) at the time of testing shall be documented in the report. 5. Provide sheaves and belts as required to meet system performance requirements for all belt-driven fan motors 10 HP and greater. Adjust and align sheaves to obtain proper settings and operation. Verify motors are not overloading. 6. Installing contractor shall replace balancing cocks, flow balancers and dampers in new systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 7. Identify flow balancers, balancing cocks and dampers in existing systems that cannot be manipulated to satisfy balancing requirements. 8. Traverse main ducts to determine total system air quantities after all outlets have been set prior to final adjustment if the system does not meet design requirements. A sum of room CFM's is not acceptable. 9. If duct construction and/or installation prohibits proper traverse readings, provide coil measurements at main coils and/or fresh air intake traverse with units operating in 100% outside air mode (where applicable). 1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Testing and Balancing agency one complete set of contract documents, change orders, and approved submittals in digital and hard copy formats. B. Controls contractor shall provide required BAS hardware, software, personnel and assistance to Testing and Balancing agency as required to balance the systems. Controls Contractor shall also provide trending report to demonstrate that systems are complete. C. Coordinate meetings and assistance from suppliers and contractors as required by Testing and Balancing agency. D. Provide additional valves, dampers, sheaves and belts as required by Testing and Balancing agency. E. Flag all manual volume dampers with fluorescent or other high-visibility tape. F. Provide access to all dampers, valves, test ports, nameplates and other appurtenances as required by Testing and Balancing agency. G. Installing contractor shall replace or repair insulation as required by Testing and Balancing agency. H. Have the HVAC systems at complete operational readiness for Testing and Balancing to begin. As a minimum verify the following: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. f. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. g. Pumps are started, and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. i. VFD start-up is complete and all safeties have been verified. j. System readiness checklists are completed and returned to Testing and Balancing agency. I. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during Testing and Balancing. J. Maintain a construction schedule that allows the Testing and Balancing agency to complete work prior to occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide tools, ladders, recording meters, gauges, thermometers, velometers, anemometers, Pitot tubes, inclined gauge manometers, mangnehelic gauges, amprobes, veltmeters, psychrometers and tachometers required. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six (6) months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine Bid Documents and submittals and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of any questions regarding balancing. 1. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper Testing and Balancing of systems and equipment. 2. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. B. Prepare a Testing and Balancing Strategies and Procedures Plan that includes: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. C. Prepare system-readiness checklists, as described in the AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, for use by contractors in verifying system readiness for Testing and Balancing. These shall include, at a minimum: 1. Airside: a. All ductwork is complete with all terminals installed. b. All volume, smoke and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. All fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Permanent electrical power wiring and VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. j. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 2. Hydronics: a. Piping is complete with all terminals installed. b. Water treatment is complete. c. Systems are flushed, filled and air purged. d. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. e. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. f. All shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100% open. g. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. h. Pump gauge connections are installed directly at the pump inlet and outlet flange or in discharge and suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. i. Permanent electrical power wiring and VFD start-up is complete and all safeties are verified. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. D. Examine construction and notify Owner's Representative and Engineer of outstanding issues related to balancing, as part of "Examination Report" submittal. 1. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. 2. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean permanent filters are installed, and controls are ready for operation. 3. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected, configured by the controls contractor and functioning. 4. Examine strainers to verify that Mechanical Contractor has replaced startup screens with permanent screens and that all strainers have been cleaned. 5. Examine two-way valves for proper installation and function. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 6. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. 7. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. 8. Examine air vents to verify that mechanical contractor has removed all air from all hydronic systems. 9. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, weld-o- lets, and manual volume dampers prior to pressure testing. Note the locations of devices that are not accessible for testing and balancing. 3.2 TESTING OF AIR/WATER SYSTEMS A. Air Systems: Prior to performing any demolition work, Testing and Balancing Contractor shall provide airflow and static pressure readings at existing HVAC air inlets and outlets within the areas of work and where specified on the drawings. Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit results to engineer in writing per the requirements of this specification. No demolition work shall be performed prior to written Engineer review of existing airflow conditions. B. Water Systems: Add description specific to project, include scope for pumps, mains, flow, differential pressure, etc. 3.3 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure and record the operating speed, water flow, and TDH of each pump. 3. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 4. Check the refrigerant charge. 5. Check the condition of filters. 6. Check the condition of coils. 7. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap. 8. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 9. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Air balance each air outlet. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan- speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 10 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set- point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return-and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal- unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 11 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the conditions but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static- pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that the adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record the final fan performance data. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and any manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of required coil and heat exchanger gpms with pump design flow rate. B. Verify that hydronic systems are ready for testing and balancing: 1. Check liquid level in expansion tank and verify that tank is set to specified pressure for system fill and expansion. 2. Check that makeup water has adequate pressure to highest vent. 3. Check that control valves are in their proper positions. 4. Check that air has been purged from the system. 5. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 6. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 12 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 1. Measure total water flow. a. Position valves for full flow through coils. b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump total dynamic head (TDH) or exchanger pressure drop. 2. Measure pump TDH as follows: a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves or fittings. b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gauge heights. d. On single stage centrifugal pumps, verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. e. With all valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. B. Adjust flow measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. C. Adjust flow measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows. 1. Measure flow at all terminals. 2. Adjust each terminal to design flow. 3. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design flow. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 13 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows: 1. Verify that the differential pressure (DP) sensor is located per the Contract Documents. 2. Determine if there is diversity in the system. B. For systems with no diversity: 1. Follow procedures outlined for constant-flow hydronic systems. 2. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint. 3. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with VFD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow VFD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump data under both conditions. 4. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. C. For systems with diversity: 1. Determine diversity factor. 2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved by the design Engineer. 3. Follow procedures outlined for constant flow hydronic systems. 4. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance the terminals that were just opened. 5. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system DP setpoint. 6. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with VFD at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100% and allow VFD to control system DP setpoint. Record pump data under both conditions. 7. Mark all final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at the terminals: 1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after all flows have been verified. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 14 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Zero to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Minimum Outside Air: Zero to plus 10 percent. 4. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 5. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 6. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.11 FINAL TEST & BALANCE REPORT A. The report shall be a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, items outstanding, and any deviations found during the Testing and Balancing process. The final report also provides a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and/or operations personnel. All measurements and test results that appear in the reports must be made on site and dated by the technicians or Test and Balance Engineers. B. The report must be organized by systems and shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Title Page: a. AABC or NEBB Certified Company Name. b. Company Address. c. Company Telephone Number. d. Project Identification Number. e. Location. f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project Number. j. Date of Report. k. Certification Statement. CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 15 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 l. Name, Signature, and Certification Number. 2. Table of Contents. 3. National Performance Guaranty. 4. Report Summary: a. The summary shall include a list of items that do not meet design tolerances, with information that may be considered in resolving deficiencies. 5. Instrument List: a. Type b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial Number e. Calibration Date C. Required air side data - Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Motors: a. RPM b. BHP c. Full load amps d. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts e. Shaft diameter f. Complete nameplate data 2. Fans: a. Cfm b. RPM c. Suction static pressure d. Discharge static pressure e. Sheave sizes, number and size of belts, key sizes, shaft, diameter f. Complete nameplate data g. Sketch of system's inlet and outlet connections h. Location of test port 3. Duct: Traverse Zones a. Cfm b. Static Pressure 4. AHU - (In both minimum O.A. and economizer modes): a. Minimum outdoor air Cfm b. Total discharge and return Cfm CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 16 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 c. Static profile thru unit d. Complete nameplate data 5. Coil: a. Entering air temperature (DB/WB) b. Leaving air temperature (DB/WB) c. Static differential d. Face velocity and area e. Cfm f. Complete nameplate data 6. VAV Boxes: a. Minimum Cfm b. Maximum Cfm 7. Registers/Grilles/Diffusers: a. Cfm b. Set, adjust and record air flow pattern 8. Filter Banks: a. Nameplate data b. Static pressure drop D. Required Fluid Data: Test, adjust and record the following: 1. Heat Transfer Devices: Including, but not limited to air handlers, convectors, fin tube radiation sections, unit ventilators, fan coils, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, heat pumps, heat exchangers. a. GPM (coil and bypass) b. Entering water temperature c. Leaving water temperature d. Water pressure drop e. Complete nameplate data f. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature 2. Pumps: a. Check rotation b. GPM c. Pump off pressures (suction and discharge) d. Running suction pressure e. Running discharge pressure f. Running load amps g. RPM - motor h. Complete nameplate motor and pump i. Marked up pump curve illustrating final operating conditions CORNELL SECTION 23 05 93 Ithaca, New York TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 120 Maple Ave TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 17 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 E. One (1) copy of the final test and balance report shall be sent directly to the Engineer of Record. Provide five (5) additional copies to the Contractor. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 07 10 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation and related Work as required in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit product data, product description, manufacturer's installation instructions, types and recommended thicknesses for each application, and location of materials. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 232010 - Piping Systems and Accessories. B. Section 233100 - Sheet Metal and Ductwork Accessories Construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Insulation, jackets, adhesive, and coatings shall comply with the following: 1. Treatment of jackets or facing for flame and smoke safety must be permanent. Water-soluble treatments not permitted. 2. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives on the exterior surfaces of ducts, pipes, and equipment, shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Asbestos or asbestos bearing materials are prohibited. 4. Comply with Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 5. All adhesives, coatings and sealants used for insulation in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits as called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 6. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA or NAIMA Insulation Standards. CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 7. Insulation shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value, out-of-package R value, flame spread and smoke developed indexes in accordance with the Energy Conservation Code of New York State. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass: Knauf, Manville, Owen-Corning, Certainteed. (Board, Blanket and Liner) B. Polyisocyanurate: Dow Trymer 2000XP, HyTherm. C. Adhesives, Coatings, Mastics, Sealants: Childers, Foster. 2.3 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID FIBERGLASS TYPE) A. Glass Fiber: Knauf 1000248 Pipe Insulation meeting ASTM C 547, ASTM C 585, and ASTM C 795; rigid, molded, noncombustible. B. 'K' Value: ASTM C 335, 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature installed value. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000°F. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ/SSL conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. D. Field-Applied PVC Fitting Covers with Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Proto Corporation 25/50 or Indoor/Outdoor, UV-resistant fittings, jacketing and accessories, white or colored. Fitting cover system consists of pre-molded, high-impact PVC materials with blanket type fiberglass wrap inserts. Blanket fiberglass wrap inserts shall have a thermal conductivity ('K') of 0.26 at 75°F mean temperature. Closures to be stainless steel tacks, matching PVC tape, or PVC adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in pre-forming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges. 2.4 PIPE INSULATION (RIGID POLYISOCYANURATE TYPE) A. Preformed Rigid Polyisocyanurate Insulation: Cellular foam complying with ASTM C591, rigid molded, non-combustible. 2 lb./ft3 nominal density. Maximum thermal conductivity (k) shall be 0.19 BTU-in/ft2 hr. °F at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature; 300°F. B. Vapor Retarder Jacket; Dow Saran Vapor Retarder Film and Tape C. Covering Jacket; White Kraft outer surface bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with fiberglass yarn. CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.5 PIPE INSULATION (FLEXIBLE TYPE) A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, foam material. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Maximum thermal conductivity (k) shall be 0.25 BTU-in/ft2 hr. °F at 75°F mean temperature. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer. B. Insulation shall have a flame-spread index of less than 25 and a smoke-developed index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN/ULC S-102, "Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 2.6 DUCT INSULATION A. Duct insulation shall have a thermal resistance (R) value identification mark by the manufacturer applied no less than every 10 feet, as per the Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket: 1. Knauf Duct Wrap meeting ASTM C 553 Types I, II and III, and ASTM C 1290; Greenguard compliant; flexible, limited combustible. 2. 'K' Value of 0.27 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature (Faced): 250°F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: FSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 4. Installation: Maximum allowable compression is 25%. Securement: Secured in place using outward cinching staples in combination with appropriate pressure- sensitive aluminum foil tape. 5. Density: Minimum 1.0 PCF. C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board 1. Knauf Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigid. 2. 'K' Value of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature. Maximum Service Temperature: 450º F. 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I, or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type II. 4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12 in. on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape. [ a. Concealed Areas: Minimum 3 lb./ft.3. CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 b. Exposed Areas: 6 lb./ft.3 minimum density for duct less than 8 ft. - 0 in. above finished floor. D. Polyisocyanurate Board: Johns Manville ISO 3 foil face closed cell polyisocyanurate core bonded to a triple laminated foil facing on both sides. Comply with ASTM C1289 Type I Class I. "K" value: 0.17 BTU in/(hr. sq.ft. degree F) at 75 deg. F. 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Piping: 1. Alumaguard Jacketing: Self adhesive, 60 mil thick, rubberized bitumen, foil faced membrane. Polyguard Products, Inc. Alumaguard 60, or equal. B. Ductwork: 1. Alumaguard Jacketing: Self adhesive, 60 mil thick, rubberized bitumen, foil faced membrane. Polyguard Products, Inc. Alumaguard 60, or equal. 2.8 COATINGS, MASTICS, ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Used in conjunction with reinforcing mesh to coat insulation on below ambient services temperatures. Permeance shall be no greater than 0.08 perms at 45 mils dry as tested by ASTM F1249. Foster 30-65 Vapor Fas; Childers CP-24, or approved equal. B. Lagging Adhesives: Used in conjunction with canvas or glass lagging cloth to protect equipment/piping indoors. Foster 30-36 Sealfas; Childers CP-50AMV1 Chil Seal, or approved equal. C. Weather Barrier Mastic: Used outdoors to protect above ambient insulation from weather. Foster 46-50 Weatherite; Childers CP-10 Vi Cryl, or approved equal. D. Fiberglass Adhesive: Used bond low density fibrous insulation to metal surfaces. Shall meet ASTM C916 Type II. Foster 85-60; Childers CP-127, or approved equal. E. Insulation Joint Sealant: Used a vapor sealant on below ambient piping with polyisocyanurate and cellular glass insulation. Foster 95-50; Childers CP-76, or approved equal. 2.9 MATERIALS AND SCHEDULES A. See Exhibits at the end of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials shall be installed by skilled labor regularly engaged in this type of work. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry standards. CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Locate insulation and cover seams in the least visible location. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, ends and surfaces of insulation. No glass fibers shall be exposed to the air. C. All pipe or duct insulation shall be continuous through hangers, sleeves, walls, ceiling or floor openings, or sleeves unless not allowed by fire stop system. Refer to Section 230500 "Basic Requirements" for firestop systems. D. Provide thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces and after piping, ductwork and equipment (as applicable) have been tested. Do not cover pipe joints with insulation until required tests are completed. E. All cold surfaces that may "sweat" must be insulated. Vapor barrier must be maintained; insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Extra care must be taken on piping appurtenances to insure a tight fit to the piping system. For piping systems with fluid temperatures below ambient, all vapor retarder jacket (ASJ) seams must be coated with vapor barrier coating. All associated elbows, fittings, valves, etc. must be coated with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh to prevent moisture ingress. Valve extension stems require Elastomeric insulation that is tight fitting to the adjoining fiberglass system insulation. Pumps, strainers, air separators, drain valves, etc. must be totally encapsulated with Elastomeric insulation. F. Items such as boiler manholes, handholds, clean-outs, ASME stamp, and manufacturers' nameplates, may be left un-insulated unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of these items. Provide neatly beveled edges at interruptions of insulation. G. Provide protective insulation as required to prevent personnel injury: Piping from zero to seven feet above all floors and access platforms including hot (above 140°F) piping and any other related hot surface. H. All pipes shall be individually insulated. I. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. 3.2 PIPE INSULATION A. Insulate piping systems including fittings, valves, flanges, unions, strainers, and other attachments installed in piping system, whether exposed or concealed. B. Insulation installed on piping operating below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor retarder. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. C. Hanger Shields: Refer to Section "Piping Systems and Accessories". CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. Metal shields shall be installed between hangers or supports and the piping insulation. Rigid insulation inserts shall be installed as required between the pipe and the insulation shields. Inserts shall be of equal thickness to the adjacent insulation and shall be vapor sealed as required. 1. Pre-Insulated Type: Butt insulation to hanger shields and apply a wet coat of vapor barrier cement to the joints and seal with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape. 2. Field Insulated Type: Provide Hamfab Co. "H" blocks per manufacturers recommended spacing between pipe and shield. 3. Tape shields to insulation. E. Joints in section pipe covering made as follows: 1. All ends must be firmly butted and secured with appropriate butt-strip material. On high-temperature piping, double layering with staggered joints may be appropriate. When double layering, the inner layer should not be jacketed. 2. Standard: Longitudinal laps and butt joint sealing strips cemented with white vapor barrier coating, or factory supplied pressure sensitive adhesive lap seal. 3. Vapor Barrier: For cold services, Longitudinal laps and 4 in. vapor barrier strip at butt joints shall be sealed with white vapor barrier coating. Seal ends of pipe insulation at valves, flanges, and fittings with white vapor barrier coating. When using polyisocyanurate or cellular glass on below ambient piping/duct, seal all insulation joints with insulation joint sealant. F. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 1. Hot Services and Domestic Cold Water: Premolded fitting insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjacent pipe insulation. 2. White PVC jacketing, with continuous solvent weld of all seams. Tape all fittings. G. For piping exposed to the elements, jacketing shall be aluminum with a factory applied moisture barrier. Fitting covers shall be of similar materials. The insulation and jacketing shall be held firmly in place with a friction type Z lock or a minimum 2 in. overlap joint. All joints shall be sealed completely along the longitudinal seam and installed so as to shed water. All circumferential joints shall be sealed by use of preformed butt strips; minimum 2 in. wide or a minimum 2 in. overlap. Butt strips shall overlap the adjacent jacketing a minimum 1/2 in. and be completely weather sealed. Jacket at ells and tees shall be mitered, or pre-manufactured fitting jackets shall be provided, with additional aluminum holding bands, as required. All joints shall be sealed watertight using specified metal jacketing sealant as recommended by the manufacturer. CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Provide external thermal insulation for duct. Not required where ducts have internal acoustical insulation. Make special provisions at dampers, damper motors, thermometers, instruments, and access doors. Apply as follows: 1. Rigid Board Type: Impale board over mechanical fasteners, welded pins or adhered clips, 12 in. to 18 in. centers; minimum of two rows per side. Secure insulation with washer clips. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Staple all joints. Seal breaks and joints in vapor barrier with 4 in. wide matching tape and 4 in. glass-fab applied with specified vapor barrier coating. Apply tape over corner beading where exposed. 2. Flexible Blanket Type: Install Duct Wrap to obtain specified R-value using a maximum compression of 25%. Installed R-value shall be per ECC of NYS. Firmly butt all joints. The longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder must be overlapped a minimum of 2 in. Where vapor retarder performance is required, all penetrations and damage to the facing shall be repaired using pressure- sensitive foil tape, and coated with vapor barrier coating prior to system startup. Pressure-sensitive foil tapes shall be a minimum 3 in. wide and shall be applied with moving pressure using a squeegee or other appropriate sealing tool. Closure shall have a 25/50 Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating per UL 723. Duct wrap shall be additionally secured to the bottom of rectangular ductwork over 18 in. wide using mechanical fasteners on 18 in. centers. Self-adhesive clips are not acceptable. Care should be exercised to avoid over-compression of the insulation during installation. 3. Exterior Ductwork: Self Adhering Cover: Membrane shall be a pre- manufactured self adhering product with an UV resistant, embossed facing. Water vapor transmission of the installed product shall be .020 perms or less. Product shall be suitable for continuous use in low temperatures of -10°F. Manufacturers shall be Flex-Clad 400, MFM Building Products Corp. or Alumaguard 60, Polyguard Products, Inc. 3.4 EXISTING INSULATION A. Patch existing insulation damaged during the course of the work. CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 EXHIBIT "I" - PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS Hot water and glycol/hot water (200°F and lower) Glass fiber 2 in. and Larger: 2 in. 1-1/2 in. and Smaller: 1-1/2 in. Indoor Refrigeration Piping (Suction and liquid lines) Polyisocyanurate All Sizes: 1-1/2 in. Outdoor Refrigeration Piping (Suction and liquid lines) Polyisocyanurate All Sizes: 2 in. Cover with Alumaguard jacketing applied per manufacturer's recommendations CORNELL SECTION 23 07 10 Ithaca, New York INSULATION 120 Maple Ave INSULATION 23 07 10 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 EXHIBIT "II" - DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS SERVICE INSULATION MATERIAL THICKNESS REMARKS HVAC Supply Within mechanical rooms or exposed at 8 feet or less above finished floor: Rigid fiberglass Concealed: Flexible fiberglass ……………..……..1-1/2 in. ……………..………….2 in Min. installed R value of 5 Min. installed R value of 5 Outdoor Rerturn Ductwork Polyisocyanurate board ………...………………..2 in. Min. installed R value of 8 Cover with Alumaguard jacketing applied per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 23 07 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 09 23 - BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The Building Automation Control System (BACS) is configured as a network with control functions at multiple levels, and with multiple points of operator control and supervision. The BACS includes centralized head-end computers, the Energy Management and Controls System (EMCS) workstations, data transmission systems, field panels and controllers, necessary interfacing controls, sensors and actuators. The controllers contain microprocessors and other supporting electronics that perform local control functions and execute application programs without requiring communications with the centralized head-end computers or workstations. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Drawings. Provide a complete Direct Digital Control System, to perform the functions described in this Section. Provide wiring and conduit required to connect devices furnished as a part of, or accessory to, this automatic control system. Control wiring is defined as wiring up to and including 120 volts. Install wiring in accordance with requirements of "Electrical Wiring" in Section 230504 and the National Electrical Code. Provide all required devices for proper system operation, including special electrical switches, transformers, relays, pushbutton stations, etc. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The complete automatic temperature control system shall be comprised of pneumatic control devices with a microprocessor based Direct Digital Control System. All work shall be installed only by skilled mechanics employed by the temperature control contractor or subcontractor. B. The Temperature Control Subcontractor/Supplier shall have a minimum of five years experience in systems of similar size, type and complexity installed within a 100 mile radius. C. The Temperature Control Subcontractor/Supplier shall have a local service department (within a 50 mile radius) and have available a minimum of three factory trained technicians within a 24 hour period. D. All components shall be fully tested and documented to operate as a complete system. E. Supplier must guarantee that all replacement parts will be carried in stock for a period of 10 years minimum from the data that the system is commissioned. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, a brochure containing the following: 1. Detailed piping and wiring control diagrams and systems description for each system under control. 2. Detailed layout and nameplate list for component control panels and DDC panels. 3. Submit a valve scheduled showing size, pressure drop configuration, capacity, and locations. Provide apparatus Bulletins and data sheets for all control system components. 4. A complete listing of input and output points, control loops and/or routines, including time of day functions, and facilities management system functions for each controlled system. This listing shall include point logical names, identifiers, and alarmable ranges. 5. Provide as part of a separate submittal a hard copy of all graphics showing system components, sensor locations, setpoints and fixed/variable data. Engineer shall review and approve graphic format prior to final acceptance of system. 1.5 WORK INCIDENTAL TO TEMPERATURE CONTROL CONTRACTOR A. The temperature control contractor shall furnish the following materials, installation by the Mechanical Contractor: 1. For piping work: a.) Control valves in piping. b.) Immersion sensing wells in piping systems. c.) Valved pressure taps. 2. For sheet metal work: a.) The Mechanical Contractor shall provide access doors to other means of access through ducts or ceilings and walls for service and adjustment of controllers, valves, and dampers. B. Control manufacturer shall furnish written details, instructions and supervision for the above trades to Ensure proper installation size, and location of any equipment furnished for installation by others. C. Free-standing panels shall be supported from "Unistrut," securely fastened to walls. D. Temperature Control Contractor is responsible for providing Ethernet data drops at main building controller. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 1.6 CONTROL SYSTEM GUARANTEES A. Guarantee the new control system to be free from defects in material and workmanship, for a period of one year after final acceptance. Guarantee System to: 1. Maintain temperatures within 1°F above and below setting. 2. Humidity devices shall maintain relative humidity conditions within 3% of span 0-100% RH. B. Provide one year maintenance service of control components, to start concurrently with the guarantee specified above. Such service shall include software updates and 24-hour, 7-day emergency and seasonal inspection and adjustment of operating controls and replacement of parts or instruments found deficient and defective during this period. C. The Contractor will provide monitoring of the DDC system as soon as the system is operating and then for a minimum of one (1) year (24 hours/day, 7 days/week) after the acceptance date. A monthly report will be sent to the Owner with a description of general system status and any alarms or off-normal conditions. D. The Contractor will guarantee future availability of continuous, 24-hour, 7-day a week service for the systems through available maintenance contracts. 1.7 SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT AND CALIBRATION A. When the Work has been completed, completely adjust and calibrate the control system. Review the operation of each system input and output, control loops and/or software routings, timing functions, operator entered constants and facilities management functions and observe that they perform their intended functions. Provide a complete values and points log, printed every hour, for one week to demonstrate control functions and programming. Provide one point log for summer operation and one winter. When above procedure has been completed and the control system is operating satisfactorily, submit a letter with one copy of completed values and points log to the Owner's Representative advising them that the control system is 100% complete and operates in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. After review and approval of points log by the Engineer, the control system subcontractor shall schedule a technician on site for field review of system components, operation and graphics as part of final system appearance. 1.8 POINT TYPE DEFINITIONS A. Point types used throughout this document are defined as follows: 1. Digital Input (DI): An on/off indication that has a maximum cycle rate of 1 Hz. This is typically sensing a contact closure. 2. Digital Output (DO): A contact closure on the controller that will cause an action in the system. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Binary Value (BV): A network-visible binary point whose value is determined by a controller computation. 5. Analog Input (AI): A continuously varying voltage or amperage signal that is varied by a sensor in relation to a sensed variable. This signal is processed in the controller after an analog-to-digital converter on the controller that converts the analog signal to a digital value. 6. Analog Output (AO): A continuously varying voltage or amperage signal that is generated from the controller after digital-to-analog conversion. The voltage or amperage signal will be used, for instance, to drive a modulating actuator or reset a hardwired setpoint on a packaged device. 7. Analog Value (AV): A network-visible analog point whose value is determined by a controller computation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. This section defines requirements for the sensors, controllers, computers, and generally the components that make up the system and the means and methods by which they are installed. B. Software and Hardware Updates - At the end of the first six months, and during the second six months, the Controls Contractor shall update the equipment and any controllers, servers, workstations and HMI Web servers with the latest modifications and improvements in software, firmware, and hardware that the manufacturer may have incorporated in the furnished equipment. C. Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the use of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration. D. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must be suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a cabinet in an exposed location). 2.2 CONTROLLERS A. General: The control system shall consist of an inter-network of controllers. It is intended to allow cost-effective application of manufacturers’ standard products while maintaining the integrity and reliability of the control functions commensurate with their application. B. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in stand-alone fashion, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that are shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand-alone functionality. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as outside air temperature, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. The design professional shall specifically indicate point groupings for stand-alone capability. Examples of required functional point groupings are as follows: 1. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include humidity, emergency power source indication, terminal based reset parameters, and smoke modes. 2. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system such as pumps, flow meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves etc. This excludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include outside air temperature and humidity, emergency power source indication, and terminal based reset parameters. 3. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including dampers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any outside air that may be necessary for control. D. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. E. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. F. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non-volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. G. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. H. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self-diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 I. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. 2.3 SENSORS A. General 1. The following indicates basic requirements for the I/O devices. 2. All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in control panels 5' above finished floor. B. Temperature Sensors 1. Sensor Resolution - When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise). 2. Room Temperature Sensor - These shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base. a. Sensing element – RTD or thermistor +/- 0.8°F accuracy at calibration point; b. Provide set-point adjustment and appropriate cabling where indicated for zones. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS system; c. Provide an occupancy override button on the room sensor enclosure and appropriate cabling where indicated (this shall include all office spaces). This shall be a momentary contact closure; d. Provide the sensor with an alphanumeric display. e. Provide sensor with communications jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Single Point Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of a sensing element, junction box for wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. The temperature range as required for resolution is indicated above. The sensor probe shall be stainless steel. a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 4. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensor - These shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element for each, two square feet of coil/duct face area. Temperature range shall be as required for resolution as indicated above. a. Sensing element - RTD or thermistor +/- 0.5°F accuracy at calibration point. 5. Liquid Immersion Temperature Sensor a. These shall include brass or stainless steel thermowell, sensor and connection head for wiring connections; b. Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point. c. The temperature range shall be as required for resolution of 0.3°F; 6. OA Sensors a. These shall consist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. On major/critical systems, one outside air temperature sensor shall be provided for each system; and one sensor shall be provided per mechanical room, or building-level controller. Generally, these shall be located on a north wall of the building and installed with stand-offs. On 100% outside air systems, locate the sensor in the outside air plenum. b. Sensing element - RTD, thermistor, or integrated circuit, +/- 0.4°F accuracy at calibration point. C. Pressure Sensors - The pressure transducers will be either diaphragm or strain gauge types: 1. Air Differential Pressure Transmitters: a. Applications: Duct static pressure, air flow VP, filter DP, Fan DP, etc.; b. Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and span adjustments; CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full scale for static and 0.25% for air velocity; d. Acceptable Manufacturers (Airflow): Air Monitor, Paragon; e. Acceptable Manufacturers (Filter DP): Dwyer; f. Acceptable Manufacturers (General and Static Pressure): Mamac, Setra and Veris Industries 2. Air Differential Pressure Sensor: a. General: Pressure transducers shall be either diaphragm or strain gauge types. b. Applications: Duct static pressure, filter DP, etc. c. Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and span adjustments. d. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full scale for static and 0.25% for air velocity. e. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Filter DP: Dwyer 2) General and Static Pressure: Mamac, Setra, Veris Industries 3. Air Differential Pressure Switches: a. Cleveland Controls, Inc., products shall be used. The switches shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. All switches shall be mounted in accessible and, to the extent possible, vibration- free locations (i.e., not on duct work). D. Current Sensors (CS) 1. For Constant Speed Motors: a. CS shall be provided for status indication of constant speed motors; b. Switch shall indicate loss of status when current falls below an adjustable trip point; c. CS shall include LED indication of status; d. Acceptable Manufacturer: Veris Industries CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. For Variable Speed Motors: a. Typically, status indication that indicates VSD or bypass operation shall be derived from contacts on the VSD. The VSD must be specified to include this option; b. Otherwise, a current switch shall be provided for status indication. The switch shall be microprocessor based and suitable for use on a VSD; c. Self-adjusting trip setpoint; d. Factory programmed to detect belt loss undercurrent conditions; e. CS shall include LED indication of status; f. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hawkeye. 2.4 CONTROL VALVES A. General 1. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. 2. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be provided for all control valves. General guidelines are indicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and flow. Valves with a CV greater than 30 may be pneumatically actuated, but should only be used if a cost benefit analysis shows they are preferred. Actuator positioning requirements are as follows for each type, if used: a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC; 3. The BACS output to modulating valves shall be analog. B. Water 1. General - Modulating water valves will generally be ball valves with an equal percentage characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. 2. Coil Valves a. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against 120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed"; CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 10 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 b. Valves shall all be two-way; c. V-port ball valve; d. 1/4 turn; e. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated; f. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon; g. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; valves 4" and larger shall have a single operator. h. Flow characteristics: Equal percentage; i. Ball and Stem shall be stainless steel; j. Fail positions shall generally be as follows: 1) Pre-heat coils in Air Handling Units: normally open spring return k. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belimo and Valve Solutions 2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Dampers shall be applicable for the rated pressure and velocity service. Damper structural rating shall exceed extreme anticipated conditions like fan deadhead. B. Modulating dampers shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. Except where size dictates a single blade, dampers shall always be opposed blade. When a large section of damper is to be connected to a single jackshaft, size limitations shall be followed. This will prevent excessive damper area or, more importantly, length from being connected to a single jackshaft. Typically, the manufacturer’s recommendation shall be sufficient for specifying a limit to the size of a damper bank that may have field fabricated jackshaft connections. C. Whenever possible, dampers shall have external crankshafts to allow the connection of the damper actuator outside of the air stream. This will allow for easier access to the actuators for maintenance. D. Outside air control dampers shall be low leakage dampers with damper seals. E. Output to modulating control dampers shall be analog. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin 2. Greenheck CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 11 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Nailor. 2.6 ACTUATORS A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two- position action and adequate close off rating as required. B. For AHU/Duct mounted dampers: 1. Actuators shall be electronic. 2. Standard Electronic Actuators: Shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full cycles at full torque and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have a positive positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall be within 90 seconds. Where fail positions are required, provide spring return on the actuator with adequate close off force. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Belimo 2.7 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports. 7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 12 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Power Supplies 1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off. Operating temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC 2. The BACS Contractor shall certify in writing at the time of shop drawing submittal that the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. 3. Class II transformers shall be used. C. Panel Fabrication 1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 6. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel. 2.8 CONTROL WIRING A. General: 1. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O wiring shall be twisted shielded cable. For communications, the BACS equipment manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply. 2. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression fittings. 3. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway. 4. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 13 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 5. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT. 6. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 7. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHU’s shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 8. Wire shall be unspliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 9. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 10. For sensors with twisted shielded pair cable, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor. 11. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. 12. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls-related work. B. Responsibilities - The BACS contractor wiring responsibilities shall include the following: 1. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions (as scheduled on the drawings) as required to report these alarms and functions to the BACS head- end. 2. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls, except as noted below. 3. The electrical trade shall provide "lock-out stop" control wiring. 4. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade. 5. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically excluded from the electrical trade work. 6. ATC contractor shall provide all power supply wiring for all ATC supplied components. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 14 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 3.1 GENERAL A. This section of the guideline defines the requirements for the documentation of the installed systems. The BACS vendor shall generally provide the documentation covered herein. 3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in this section shall be provided updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s specific conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and met. B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1) Automated Logic Corporation 2) Alterton 3.3 DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. Hard Copy (General): Paper copies of the indicated deliverables shall be provided as directed by the project manager. Quantities shall be enumerated in the contract documents. At a minimum, three sets of hard copies shall be maintained; one at the facility, one in the HVACR shop, and one in the project maintenance manual. B. Hard Copy (Control Panels): Each control panel on the project shall include an as-built hard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. In addition, see Operation and Maintenance Materials. C. Electronic Copy: All submittal and as-built documents shall be provided electronically, to the HVACR shop. Different documents may be in different formats, however each shall be provided in one of the first two formats as well as in the format in which the document was originally created, if it is different. 1. Microsoft Office format (Word, Excel, etc.) 2. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). 3.4 SUBMISSIONS A. Submittals: BACS documentation indicated herein shall be submitted for approval of the design professional and the project manager who shall get review and feedback information from the HVACR Shop. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 15 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. As-Built Drawings: As-built documentation as indicated herein shall be maintained and submitted to reflect the final installed condition of the BACS. The as-built documents shall be kept up to date throughout the warranty period and submitted as final at the end of the warranty period. One set of documents and files shall be provided to be stored locally at the new facility and two sets shall be provided to be stored centrally. 3.5 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED A. Control Schematics: Control schematics shall be utilized to graphically indicate the systems, show the schematic configuration of the systems and location of control devices, define the point names and addresses (as applicable), and define the setpoints for control elements. Control schematics are required both as part of the contract documents (generated by the design professional), shop drawing submittals, and as-built document submittals. The following shall be included in the controls schematics at a minimum: 1. Point names. See Design & Construction Standard 15956 for requirements. 2. Point addresses (not applicable to the contract documents). 3. Point type. 4. Normal position of output devices. 5. Device ranges. 6. Initial design intent setpoints modified as refined during construction/ commissioning for as-built submittals. 7. Bill of materials listing all devices and manufacturer numbers (not applicable to the contract documents). 8. Legend of device symbols. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device, panel, controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements. Provide these as a part of the shop drawings and as-built submittal. C. Valve Schedules: Either with the control schematic or separately in shop drawing submittal and as-built submittal provide a valve schedule listing the following: 1. Size. 2. CV. 3. Design maximum flow. 4. Pressure drop at design maximum flow. 5. Position of valve at design condition. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 16 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 6. Manufacturer. 7. Model/product number. 8. Close off rating. 9. Normal positions. 10. Valve characteristic. 11. Valve turndown. 12. Actuator information. 13. Design controlled circuit pressure differential range (coordinated with the submittals). Valves shall be selected such that they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” Valve sizes shall be picked as close as possible to meet the design pressure drop. The minimum CV shall be no less than 1.9 on all valves (See Section III, 3.04 “Control Valves” for additional information). D. Control System Architecture Diagram: Provide a system architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN. E. See Contract Drawings for detailed Control Sequence of Operations. F. Points List: A detailed point list shall be provided in tabular form either with the control schematics or separately. Indicate all physical and virtual points and organize by system/sub-system. Include names, descriptors, addresses (when known) and point types with applicable range as a minimum. These shall be provided electronically in either a database format or in a spreadsheet format. G. Alarms and Alarms List: Either as part of the points list or as a separate list, an alarms list shall be provided. The list shall include the alarm point name, point type, and alarm parameters. All analog control loops shall include an adjustable setpoint deviation alarm based upon error and time. The alarm parameters shall be the state the point is in to cause a particular alarm. An example of a point in this list is as follows: 1. Supply air temp (AI) +/-5°F from setpoint. H. Floor Plans: Provide a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPS’s, etc., located and identified. All network components (repeaters, routers, etc.) shall also be identified on the floor plan drawings. All BACS network wiring shall be shown and identified on the floor plan drawings. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 17 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 I. Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Shop drawings and as-built submittals shall include detailed wiring diagrams. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. These shall be submitted with shop drawing and as-built submittals. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all wiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate from return fan components and devices, etc.). J. Sample Graphics and Trends: If the project includes web-based graphics and trends for the use of interfacing to the BACS, the vendor shall submit for approval draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the project. Design professional and project manager, after consultation with the HVACR Shop, shall approve the graphics. K. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Provide Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials generally in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following: 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory. 2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral. 3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software. 4. All submittals with as-built information (product data, shop drawings, control logic documentation, hardware manuals, software manuals, installation guides or manuals, maintenance instructions, and spare parts lists). As-built panel drawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systems controlled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system schematic and detailed panel wiring diagram (as detailed above). Also included (typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors, etc.). PART 4 - BACS INFRASTRUCTURE 4.1 CONFIGURATION OF SYSTEMS A. The control panels/enclosures housing the controllers will be located on each floor, to the extent possible, to share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of home-runs to terminal equipment. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 18 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Control panels shall be located in the equipment rooms, where practicable, and in locations such that the ambient conditions are between 50 and 90°F and 10 to 85% relative humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges shall have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged covers shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces. C. The HVACR Shop must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintain building integrity similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Field panels will be located outside of user areas where practical. If field panels must be located in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided. 4.2 CONTROLLERS A. The controllers provided pursuant to this guideline shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as stated in this section. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation contained in the project documents. While this specification contains several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example, it may be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large controller or several smaller ones. Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system architecture or controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc. B. Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented, rather than prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers with differing capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used: 1. Building-level controller. These are controllers that are connected to the campus backbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be applied to other building-wide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 2. System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single large piece of equipment such as an air handler or chiller and a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC). 3. Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of "unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan coil units, etc. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 19 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Real-time operating system software. 2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (with the exception of field-level controllers). 3. Controller diagnostic software. 4. DDC software. 5. Alarm processing and buffering software. 6. Energy management software. 7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. 8. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendor shall request in writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing. D. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. E. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The BACS vendor shall provide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner- accessible SQL database. F. Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 20 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 G. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. H. Web-based Graphics: In the event that a web server is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, the following screens shall be provided. 1. Floor Plan Screens. a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. b. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors and VAV boxes associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHU’s etc.) on the floor plan screens. c. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen. d. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic. e. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens. f. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 2. System Schematic Screens. a. Provide graphics for each air handling system. Indicate OA temperature and relative humidity, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 21 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 b. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. c. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic. d. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. e. Provide a graphic for each hydronic system. f. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. g. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. h. Link screens to all schedules and setpoints. I. Alarm Programming: Alarms shall be “intelligent” based upon the algorithms in this section. 1. In general, alarm programming related to DDC controlled equipment should reside at the controller level along with the functional programming for equipment control. a. Intrinsic alarming associated with AI, AV, DI or DV objects (or any of the other 23 BACnet objects that support intrinsic alarming) shall only be used where the alarm is valid regardless of the state of the associated equipment or where there is a ready means for automatically suppressing alarm generation when the associated equipment is operationally secured. b. Alarm points shall be separate BACnet objects (e.g., DV or EEO) actuated by associated alarm programming. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 22 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 c. Alarm objects shall have descriptive BACnet object names. BACnet alarm object names shall end in “Alarm”. For detailed information on proper point naming conventions, see Cornell University Facility Services, Design and Construction Standards, 15956 Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability. d. If it is necessary for the alarm to have latching functionality, the user shall be provided easy unlatching capability from within the DDC system if appropriate, taking into account equipment safety concerns. This is in addition to any local alarm reset. e. Alarms designated for monitoring by EMCS shall be set up in the DDC system to report to the EMCS alarm server. 2. Analog Deviation Alarms: Analog deviation alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and the controlled variable setpoint (whether calculated or fixed). a. When controlled variable deviates from setpoint above or below user adjustable high or low alarm thresholds, the alarm shall be activated. b. High and low alarm threshold values shall have associated adjustable deadbands (hysteresis values) for alarm clearing conditions as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm threshold or rises above the low alarm threshold. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays for active equipment operation. d. Alarm programming shall include startup delays to prevent nuisance alarms during equipment startup. e. Analog deviation alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured. 3. Analog High Limit Alarms: Analog high limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and a user adjustable high limit alarm value. a. When controlled variable rises above the user adjustable high limit, the alarm shall be activated. b. High alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm limit. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. High limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 23 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. Analog Low Limit Alarms: Analog low limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and a user adjustable low limit alarm value. a. When controlled variable falls below the user adjustable low limit, the alarm shall be activated. b. Low alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable rises above the low alarm limit. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. Low limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 5. Binary Run Status Alarms: Status alarms shall be based upon the comparison between run status and equipment command where applicable. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. 6. Binary Alarming: Alarms shall be triggered upon associated BI changing state to the non-normal or alarm state. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. b. Binary alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 7. Steam Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Temperature Alarming: Steam shell and tube heat exchangers shall have two temperature alarms associated with them. a. Operational Supply Temperature Deviation Alarm when heat exchanger is in operation. b. High Supply Temperature Alarm that is always enabled whether or not the heat exchanger is operational or not, so as to monitor for steam control valve leak by. PART 5 - BUILDING SYSTEMS 5.1 GENERAL A. This section of the guideline defines general physical Input/Output (I/O) requirements, sequences, and by inference some degree of system requirements related to how the BACS is applied to the building areas and systems. This section is organized by “element” of the building and systems and generally presented from higher to lower level elements. Strict adherence to these requirements will inevitably result in duplicate I/O. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 24 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 5.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. The BACS shall provide for seamless integration with the control of the VFDs and associated systems. The interface shall be hardwired (point-by-point wiring to applicable terminations on the drives interface board) for start/stop, status and speed signals. The status shall be determined via contacts from the drive. The drive specification must be coordinated to ensure that the status contacts are available and are a true feedback indication that the motor is running. The speed signal shall be 0-10VDC. Digital communications via a controller LAN shall be used to gather all other available diagnostic information. 5.3 MOTOR STARTERS A. An HOA switch shall be provided with the starter. In the hand position the motor shall start and run continuously unless a safety device trips; in the off position the motor shall stop; in the auto position the BACS shall control the motor per described sequences of operation. B. Status shall be monitored by the BACS, preferably with a current sensor. Motor status shall be monitored via an adjustable de-bounce time. The BACS shall annunciate a “failure” alarm whenever the motor is commanded to run and status is not proved within an adjustable de-bounce time. In the failure mode, the run command shall remain, except on headered systems for which the run command will be removed requiring manual acknowledgement. In no case shall a loss of status coincident with a loss in power be alarmed as a failure. The BACS shall include controller arrangement and/or points or programming as required to accomplish the above. PART 6 - COMMISSIONING, TRAINING AND WARRANTY 6.1 COMMISSIONING A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing, documentation, and training shall be required. B. The BACS contractor’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include: 1 Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning activities. 2 Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and function contained within the BACS. 3 Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the subcontractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format. 4 Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5 Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 25 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 6 Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing. 7 The BACS contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 8 The Contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from PDC. The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point. 9 All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to the Owner’s representative. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. 6.2 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the control manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The amount of training that shall be provided shall match the size of the project (e.g., no less than eight hours for small projects and up to 80 hours for large projects). B. The contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software-oriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses. C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. This training only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. 6.3 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. B. The period of one (1) year shall be extended with respect to portions of the work first performed after substantial completion by the period of time between substantial completion and the actual performance of the work. CORNELL SECTION 23 09 23 Ithaca, New York BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 26 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. The Contractor shall provide all recommended preventative maintenance of the materials, equipment, and workmanship as necessary and as described in the operating and maintenance manuals during the warranty period. In addition, the Contractor shall provide two (2) semi-annual service visits (i.e., one visit during the peak cooling season and one visit during the peak heating season) to test and evaluate the performance of the equipment. The Contractor shall provide a written report of the test and evaluation results. The service visits shall include but not be limited to: 1 Checking and, if necessary, correcting the calibration of the sensors, transducers, and transmitters for air flow, liquid flow, pressure, temperature, and humidity; 2 Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation of the dampers and damper actuators; 3 Checking and, if necessary, correcting the operation (i.e., monitoring and command) of the system points. END OF SECTION 23 09 23 CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 20 10 - PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 078413 - Penetration Firestop Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Not Required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be new, marked with manufacturer's name and comply with applicable ASTM and ANSI Standards. B. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for piping in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 2.2 STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40 weight; black or galvanized finish as called for; ends chamfered for welding or roll grooved for grooved mechanical; connections. B. Fittings: Same material and pressure class as adjoining pipe. 1. Welded Fittings: Factory forged, seamless construction, butt weld type, chamfered ends. Where branch connections are two or more sizes smaller than main size, use of "Weldolets", "Thredolets", or "Sockolets" are acceptable. Mitered elbows, "shaped" nipples, and fabricated reductions and fabricated branch connections are not acceptable unless specifically required and reviewed by the Engineer. Socket weld type, 2000 psi wp, where required. 2. Threaded Fittings: Cast or malleable iron, black or galvanized, as required; drainage type where called for. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Shop Fabricated Connections and Fittings: a. Shop Fabricated Branch Connections: Fabricated branch connections constructed in strict conformance to the appropriate ASME B 31 Code of Construction may be acceptable as reviewed by the Engineer. All fabricated connections shall be constructed under controlled shop conditions using automated equipment. Calculations for all fabricated connections demonstrating conformance to ASME code and project design criteria shall be prepared and submitted for acceptance prior to fabrication. Certified welding procedures, shop quality control procedures and certifications of welders and inspectors shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to fabrication. C. Flanges, Unions and Couplings: 1. Threaded Connections: a. Flanges: Cast iron companion type; for sizes 2-1/2 in. and larger. b. Unions: Malleable iron, bronze to iron seat, 300 lb. wwp; for sizes 2 in. and smaller. c. Couplings: Malleable iron, 150 or 300 lb. wwp, based on system pressure. Steel thread protectors are not acceptable as couplings. 2. Welded Connections: a. Flanges: Welding neck type. b. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents and working temperatures and pressures. c. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Gauge and Instrument Connections: Nipples and plugs for adapting gauges and instruments to piping system shall be IPS brass. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B88; Type L, hard temper. Soft temper only where specified. Plans show copper tube sizes. B. Tees, Elbows, Reducers: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze; ANSI B16.8 solder end connections. C. Unions and Flanges: 2 in. and smaller use unions, solder type, cast bronze, ground joint, 150 lb. swp: 2-1/2 in. and over use flanges, cast bronze, companion type, ASME drilled, solder connection, 150 lb. swp. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. Solder Materials: No-lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. E. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Willard Industries "Solder Safe (silver bearing), Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. 2.4 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS - PRESSURE-SEALED JOINTS A. Pipe: Type 304/304L, Schedule 10S, stainless steel conforming to ASTM A312 with plain ends. B. Couplings and fittings shall be formed of precision cold drawn stainless steel pipe with synthetic rubber O-ring seals. C. O-ring seals shall be molded of synthetic rubber, Grade HNBR suitable for potable water up to 210°F or Grade EPDM suitable for water up to 250°F. D. Fitting ends shall be pressed onto pipe using only a tool specifically designed for this purpose. Pipe ends must be fully inserted into the coupling and fitting housing up to the pipe stop. 500 psig maximum CWP rating. E. Fittings: Elbows, tees, laterals, reducers, adapters as required. Same construction as couplings. F. Design Basis: Victaulic Vic Press 316, Shurjoint, Viega Pro Press Stainless. 2.5 COPPER DRAINAGE TUBE AND FITTINGS - SOLDER JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B306, Type DWV, hard temper. B. Fittings: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.29 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.23; solder end connections. C. Solder Materials: No lead solder, using alloys made from tin, copper, silver and nickel. D. Make: Harris "Stay-Safe 50" and "Bright", Engelhard "Silverbright 100", Canfield "Watersafe" or approved equal. 2.6 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS - BRAZED JOINT A. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type K , hard temper. B. Tees, Elbows and Reducers: Wrought copper, ANSI B16.22 or cast bronze, ANSI B16.18. C. Unions and Flanges: Unions for 2 in. and smaller. Brazed type cast bronze ground joint, 150 lb. swp; flanged for 2-1/2 in. and larger, brazed type, cast bronze, companion type, gasketed and bolted, ASME drilled 150 lb. swp. D. Brazing Materials: Class BcuP-2 for brazing copper to brass, bronze or copper. Harris, Inc. Stay-Silv 0 or approved equal. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.7 DIELECTRIC PIPE FITTINGS A. Description: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. B. Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum pressure to suit system fluid pressures and temperatures with flange insulation kits and bolt sleeves. C. Waterway Fittings: 300 psi maximum working pressure at 230°F, male threaded or grooved ends, electroplated ductile iron or steel body with LTHS high temperature polyolefin polymer liner. D. Make: EPCO, Capitol Manufacturing, Watts, Victaulic, or approved equal. E. The use of brass valves, brass nipples (3 in. and larger) and Shurjoint epoxy coated transition coupling IPS-CTS may be used for dielectric isolation. Dielectric transition fittings shall be Shurjoint Model DE30-GG for sizes 2 in. through 8 in., which shall provide effective insulation between the steel and copper systems to avoid galvanic local cell and stray current problems. The dielectric transition fitting shall be made of ductile iron per ASTM A536 Gr. 65-45-12, electric deposition coated, with a virgin PP (propylene) lining. 2.8 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Type L hard temper deoxidized, dehydrated, and sealed copper tubing, refrigerant grade. B. Refrigerant grade wrought copper fittings. Long radius elbows. C. Factory made suction traps, Melco Type PT. D. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994 and ASME/ANSI B31.5. E. Make: Mueller, Howell Metal, Cerro, Cambridge-Lee, Universal Tube. 2.9 HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers, Inserts, Clamps: B-Line, Grinnell, Michigan Hanger, PHD Manufacturing, Anvil, Hilti. B. Hangers: 1. Adjustable, wrought malleable iron or steel with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Copper plated or PVC coated where in contact with copper piping. Hot- dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. 2. Adjustable ring type where piping is installed directly on hanger for piping 3 in. and smaller. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Adjustable steel clevis type for 4 in, and larger, and where insulation passes through hanger. 4. Hangers sized to permit passage of insulation through the hanger for and refrigerant piping. 5. Nuts, washers and rods with electroplated zinc or cadmium finish. Hot-dipped galvanized finish for exterior locations. C. Hanger Shields: 1. Pre-Insulated Type: a. Insulated pipes shall be protected at point of support by a 360° insert of high density, 100 psi waterproof calcium silicate, encased in a 180° sheet metal shield. Insulation insert to be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and extend 1 in. beyond sheet metal shield. Insulation shall be provided with a factory installed ASJ. 2. Field-Insulated Type: a. #18 USSG, galvanized steel shields, minimum 120° arc. Provide ICA- HAMFAB-BLOCK, 18# density molded fiberglass inserts, between pipe and hanger shield to maintain proper spacing for insulation. Insulation inserts shall extend 1 in. beyond the sheet metal shields. Material shall comply with ASTM E84 25/50, have a thermal conductivity of K=.30 (stable) and have a service temperature of -120°F to +650°F. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3. Shield Sizing: PIPE SIZE SHIELD LENGTH MINIMUM GAUGE 1/2 in. to 3-1/2 in. 9 in. 20 4 in. 9 in. 20 4. Hanger shield gauges listed are for use with band type hangers only. For point loading (roller support), increase shield thickness by one gauge, and length by 50%. D. Spacing Schedule: PIPE SIZE STEEL PIPE COPPER PIPE PLASTIC PIPE HANGER ROD SIZE 3/4 to 1 in. 8 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 1-1/4 to 2-1/2 in. 10 ft. 6 ft. 3 ft. 3/8 in. 3 to 4 in. 12 ft. 10 ft. 4 ft. 1/2 in. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 E. Inserts: Carbon steel body and square insert nut, galvanized finish, maximum loading 1,300 lbs., for 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. rod sizes. Drill through decking for hanger rods and secure devices with integral support plate strap with sheet metal screws. Devices shall have a safety factor of four. F. Beam Attachments: 1. C-Clamp, locknut, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes 2 in. and smaller. 2. Center load style with clamp attachments that engage both edges of beam, electroplated finish, UL listed, FM approved, for pipe sizes larger than 2 in., refer to "Supports" for additional requirements. 3. Welded beam attachments may be considered only upon the review and acceptance of the structural engineer of record with written confirmation of weld meet configuration, location and service/pipe size submitted to the Mechanical Engineer for review. G. Supports: 1. Provide intermediate structural steel members where required for hanger attachment. Secure member to structure. Select size of members based on a minimum factor of safety of four. 2. For Weights Under 1000 lbs.: Insert, "U" shaped channel, beam clamps or other structurally reviewed support. The factor of safety shall be at least four. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. 3. For Weights Above 1000 lbs.: Drill through floor slabs and provide flush plate welded to top of rod or provide additional inserts and hangers to reduce load per hanger below 1000 lbs. 4. Make: Hilti, ITW Ramset, Phillips "Red Head", or approved equal. H. Trapeze Hangers: 1. For use on 1-1/2 in. and smaller piping only. 2. Hangers shall be supported with rod sized with a safety factor of four. 3. May be manufactured type "U" shaped channel, or suitable angle iron or channel. Round off all sharp edges. 4. Securely fasten piping to trapeze with "U" bolt or straps, dissimilar metals shall not touch, use isolation gaskets. 5. Make: B-Line, Kindorf, Unistrut, or approved equal. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.10 PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Escutcheon Plates: Provide escutcheon plates on uninsulated piping in exposed and finished areas. Steel or cast brass polished chrome, split hinge type with setscrew, high plates where required for extended sleeves. 2.11 SLEEVES A. Standard Type: 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves shall be used for sleeves in horizontal and vertical applications through structural surfaces. Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 1 in. beyond both sides of the structure surface being penetrated. The sleeve shall be sized to account for the total diameter of the service, inclusive of insulation and the appropriate annular space for firestopping installation or requirements of the sealing element manufacturer. 2. Schedule 40, PVC sleeves or sheet metal sleeves for nonstructural surfaces and existing construction. Sheet metal sleeves shall be 18 gauge minimum and braced to prevent collapsing. Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 1/2 in. beyond both sides of the non-structural vertical surface being penetrated. The sleeve shall be sized to account for the total diameter of the service, inclusive of insulation and the appropriate annular space for firestopping. 2.12 FIRESTOP SYSTEM FOR OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALL FLOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Materials for firestopping seals shall be listed by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Firestop Systems". The system shall meet the standard fire test for Penetration Firestop Systems designated ASTM E814. Firestop system shall be provided at locations where piping passes through fire rated wall, floor/ceiling, or ceiling/roof assembly. Minimum required fire resistant ratings of the assembly shall be maintained by the Firestop System. Installation shall conform with the manufacturer's recommendations and other requirements necessary to meet the testing laboratory's listing for the specific installation. 2.13 PIPING MATERIALS AND SCHEDULE A. See Exhibit "A", "Schedule of Piping Materials" at end of this Section for (HVAC) piping. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Equipment and systems in accordance with laws, codes, and provisions of each applicable section of these specifications. Accurately establish grade and elevation of piping before setting sleeves. Install piping without springing or forcing (except where specifically called for), making proper allowance for expansion and anchoring. Arrange piping at equipment with necessary offsets, union, flanges, and valves, to allow for easy part removal and maintenance. Offset piping and change elevation as required to coordinate with other work. Avoid contact with other mechanical or electrical systems. Provide adequate means of draining and venting units, risers, circuits and systems. Install drains consisting of a tee fitting with a 3/4 inch ball valve with hose end cap and chain, at low points in hydronic piping system mains, and elsewhere as required for system drainage. B. Conceal piping unless otherwise called for. Copper tubing shall be cut with a wheeled tubing cutter or other approved copper tubing cutter tool. The tubing must be cut square to permit proper joining with the fittings. Ream pipes after cutting and clean before installing. Cap or plug equipment and pipe openings during construction. Install piping parallel with lines of building, properly spaced to provide clearance for insulation. Make changes in direction and branch connections with fittings unless submitted and accepted per Part 2. Do not install valves, union and flanges in inaccessible locations. Provide trap seal of adequate depth on drain pans. C. Provide reducers at all control valves, where control valve is smaller than pipeline size. Reducers for steam control valves shall be eccentric type. Provide unions at each side of every control valve and reducers directly adjacent to the unions. D. Provide reducers at all balance valves, where balance valve is smaller than pipeline size. 3.2 PIPING OVER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall route piping to avoid installation directly over electric equipment, including, but not limited to panels, transformers, disconnects, starters, motor control center, adjustable speed drives and fused switches. B. Piping shall not be installed in the dedicated electric and working space as defined by NEC 110. Dedicated electrical space is generally equal to the depth and width of electrical equipment, and extends 6 ft. above the electrical equipment, or to a structural ceiling. Dedicated working space is a minimum of 30 in. wide or the width of equipment (whichever is larger) a minimum of 6 ft.-6 in. tall, with a depth of 3ft. to 9 ft. depending on the voltage. 3.3 WATER AND GLYCOL SYSTEMS A. Top connection for upfeed, bottom or side connection for downfeed. Grade off level; up in direction of flow and down toward drain. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.4 REFRIGERATION PIPING A. Fittings brazed with silver brazing alloy. Guarantee refrigerant charge for one year from date of final acceptance. Provide for flexibility at compressor connections. Piping and system shall meet the requirements of Mechanical Refrigeration Safety Code, ANSI B9.1. Clean piping, then pump-down and evacuate system to 0.1 in. VAC break vacuum with dry nitrogen and re-evacuate to 0.1 in. VAC and hold for four (4) hours; then charge system. Charge with refrigerant as recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 HANGERS, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping shall not be supported by wires, band iron, chains, or from other piping. Support each pipe with individual hangers from concrete inserts, welded supports, or beam clamps of proper configuration and point loading design requirements for each location including the designated safety factor. Trapeze hangers are acceptable for racking of multiple pipes of 1-1/2 in. or less in size. Follow manufacturer's safe loading recommendations. Suspend with rods of sufficient length for swing and of size as called for, using four nuts per rod. Provide additional rustproofed structural steel members, where required for proper support. Provide oversized hangers where insulation/supports must pass between pipe and hanger. Only concentric type hangers are permissible on piping larger than 2-1/2 in., "C" types are permitted for piping 2-1/2 in. and smaller. Provide riser clamps for each riser at each floor. 3.6 HANGERS ATTACHED TO JOISTS A. Individual hangers may be suspended directly from the bottom chord panel point provided that the sum of the concentrated loads within the chord panel does not exceed 100 pounds and the attachments are concentric to the chord. (Eccentrically loaded joists using beam clamps or other attachment methods are not acceptable.) B. For nominal concentrated loads between panel chords, which have been accounted for in the specified uniform design load for the joists, this Contractor is to provide struts to transfer the load to a panel point on the opposite chord as reviewed and acceptable by the Structural Engineer of Record. 3.7 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Solder Connections: Nonacid flux and clean off excess flux and solder. B. Brazed Connections: Make joints with silver brazing alloy in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove working parts of valves before applying heat. "Walseal" fittings may be used; if sufficient alloy is showing, face braze such joints. C. Threaded Connections: Clean out tapering threads, made up with pipe dope; screwed until tight connection. Pipe dope must be specific for each application. D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type and thickness for service applications. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 10 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 E. Dielectric Pipe Fittings: Provide dielectric protection devices at ALL equipment connections where dissimilar metals meet. In addition, provide dielectric unions in all open type piping systems (condensing water, domestic water, etc.) where dissimilar metals are to be joined. Dielectric protection devices are not required in typical closed systems such as heating water, chilled water, heat pump loop, etc. except for the equipment connections. Dielectric protection systems are not required for air or gas systems. 3.8 HANGER SHIELDS A. Provide at hangers for refrigerant piping. Pre-insulated type or field-insulated type at Contractor's option. 3.9 SLEEVES A. Provide for pipes passing through floors, walls or ceilings. B. Pre-Insulated Type: Required for refrigerant piping. C. Standard Type: Provide for piping, except as called for. 3.10 SLEEVE PACKING A. Seal void space at sleeves as follows: 1. Interior Locations: Firmly pack with fiberglass and caulk. 2. Exterior Walls and Below Grade Cored Holes: Use sealing element. 3. Fire Rated, Partitions and Floor Slabs: Use fire rated sealing elements, materials and methods. Provide per manufacturer's instructions to maintain firestop. 4. Waterproofed Walls and Floors: Use waterproof sealing element, device, or compound. 3.11 ESCUTCHEON PLATES A. Provide polished chrome escutcheon plates for uninsulated exposed piping passing through floors, walls or ceilings in finished areas. 3.12 CLEANING HOT WATER AND CHILLED WATER AND GLYCOL SYSTEMS A. Treatment chemicals for hydronic systems should be clearly defined: 1. Cleaning of Newly Installed Systems: a. Step 1: Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during the cleaning and treatment process; CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 11 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 b. Step 2: Fill system and add standard 12% hypochlorite bleach for a residual of 2-3 parts per million (ppm) chlorine. This should require approximately one quart of bleach per 10,000 gallons of water. Test for concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Clean strainers and dead end piping legs, then drain to sanitary sewer; c. Step 3: Fill system and add a general dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and microbiological matter at a concentration of 500-1000 parts per million (ppm) or approximately seven gallons of product per 10,000 gallons of water. Test for concentration. Circulate solution for a minimum of eight hours. Flush system using bleed and feed until the bleed water pH and iron levels are consistent with the feed domestic water levels. Clean strainers and dead end piping legs; d. Step 4: Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Pipe Shop before proceeding to chemical treatment. 2. Treatment Chemicals for Non Glycol Systems – After cleaning and inspection, immediately add a molybdate based corrosion inhibitor. Acceptable corrosion inhibitors shall include a combination of sodium molybdate, sodium hydroxide, tolytriazole and organic polymers. Test for residual concentrations as follows: Molybdate: 100 ppm; pH: 8.3-9; Tolytriazole: 5 ppm. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Pipe Shop prior to final acceptance. 3. Treatment Chemicals for Glycol Heating Systems – After cleaning and inspection, drain system then refill with Metro PG#36 propylene glycol (PG) solution at a concentration of 40% propylene glycol to 60% water. The water to be added to glycol solutions shall meet manufacturer’s standards for quality. Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Pipe Shop prior to final acceptance. 4. For systems with water treatment, provide permanent signage on hydronic systems treated with chemicals that include the following information: Chemical type, concentration, and system volume; Direction to drain system to sanitary drain. Chemical type, concentration and system volume shall be stenciled on the system expansion tank in a visible location. Unable to back-check - Specs not submitted as part of package. 5. Treatment Chemicals – All materials proposed for application must have the prior approval of Environmental Health and Safety, Facilities Engineering and the Facilities Management Pipe Shop. In order to thoroughly evaluate the products performance, it is recommended that the following be submitted by the treatment vendor: Material Safety Data Sheets for all products that are to be applied, which shall contain the complete formulation. Further documentation of qualitative composition must be included if Material Safety Data Sheets do not supply all product(s) components; Product Data Sheets specifying overall product description and application guidelines; Methods of analysis for determining product residuals. Proposals should specify specific qualitative and quantitative procedures of evaluating actual product levels. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 12 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 They should also include recommended parameters for all products, expressed in either terms of parts per million or milligrams per liter; Expected performance levels of products; this should include expected corrosion rates, expressed in mils per year. If the product is of a biostatic nature, what levels of biological growth should be expected if the product is applied at recommended dosages; Provisions should be submitted for the removal for any unused chemicals. 3.13 TESTS A. Test piping and accessories before insulation, connection to existing piping or concealment. Repeat as many times as necessary to prove tight system. Notify Owner's Representative at least seven days in advance of each test. Isolate valves and equipment not capable of withstanding test pressures. Make leaks tight; no caulking permitted. Remove and replace defective fittings, pipe or connections. Furnish necessary pumps, gauges, equipment, piping, valving, power and labor for testing. Certify that tests have been successfully completed. B. Schedule of Test Requirements: 1. Hot and Glycol Water: Hydrostatic, 100 psig at high point of system; two (2) hours duration. 2. Refrigeration: a. After installation, charge system with dry nitrogen to manufacturer's recommended pressure. b. System shall hold this charge with no pressure drop for 24 hours. 3. Test: No change in pressure under stable temperature conditions. 4. Equipment: Test at working pressures. 3.14 PIPE LINE SIZING A. Pipe sizes called for are to be maintained. Pipe sizing changes made only as reviewed by Owner's Representative. Where discrepancy in size occurs, the larger size shall be provided. CORNELL SECTION 23 20 10 Ithaca, New York PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave PIPING SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES 23 20 10 - 13 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 EXHIBIT "A" - PIPING MATERIALS (HVAC) SERVICE PIPE MATERIALS FITTINGS CONNECTIONS Hot water heating Schedule 40, black steel Malleable iron and butt weld Screwed 2 in. and smaller; Welded 2-1/2 in. and larger Hot water heating (optional) Type L copper Wrought copper, solder end No-lead solder for 2 in. and smaller; 95/5 for 2-1/2 in. and larger Refrigerant Type K refrigerant grade hard temper, deoxidized copper Wrought copper, solder end Sil-Flo "5" silver brazing Vent, overflow, drain Schedule 40, galvanized steel or Type M copper Cast iron drainage type or wrought copper Threaded or solder END OF SECTION 23 20 10 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 21 10 Ithaca, New York WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 120 Maple Ave WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 23 21 10 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 21 10 - WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data on water system specialties. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and accessories shall be rated for a minimum of 125 psi wwp, and 250°F temperatures. Manufacturer's written installation procedures shall become a part of these specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOW BALANCERS A. Balancing and flow meter stations suitable for use on heating and cooling systems. Constructed for 125 psi and 250°F. B. 6 in. and Smaller: Calibrated balance valve with provisions for connecting a portable differential pressure meter. Flow balancer is to be suitable as a service valve. Meter connections to have built-in check valves. An integral pointer shall register degree of valve openings. Valve shall have internal seals. 1. Balance valve sizes shall be based upon gpm range rather than pipe size. Balance Valve Size GPM Range 1/2 in. Up to 2.5 3/4 in. 2.5 - 4.5 1 in. 4.5 - 10 1-1/4 in. 10 - 15 1-1/2 in. 15 - 30 2 in. 30 - 60 2. Design Equipment: Bell & Gossett "Circuit Setter" 3. Manufacturers: Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, Tour & Anderson, Oventrop Hydrocontrol, Watts. CORNELL SECTION 23 21 10 Ithaca, New York WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 120 Maple Ave WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 23 21 10 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.2 STRAINERS A. Cast semi-steel body or cast iron construction for steel piping and bronze body construction for copper piping; equipped with removable, monel or stainless steel water screen; maximum pressure drop 2 psi with free area at least four times area of pipe. Provided with blow-off outlet. B. Sizes 5 in. and Smaller, Y-Pattern Strainer: 125 psig working pressure; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 in. and larger, threaded connections for NPS 2 in. and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. C. Sizes 6 in. and Larger, Basket Strainer: 125 psig working pressure; flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel basket and bottom drain connection. D. Design Equipment: Mueller. E. Manufacturers: Elliott, Keckley, Mueller, Webster, Watts, Spirax-Sarco. 2.3 AIR VENTS A. Manual air vents shall be a 3/4 in. ball valve with bronze body, nickel plated bronze ball, hose end, cap and chain, Watts B6000CC. Only manual vents are acceptable on glycol systems. B. Automatic air vents shall be float type, 35 psig rated, Armstrong No. 502CV OR float type, 150 psig rated, Armstrong No. 75 or Spirotop. Provide unit with an appropriate rating, as necessary for location. Do not use automatic air vents on glycol systems. C. High Capacity Automatic Air Vent: 1. Cast iron body. 150 psig rated. Stainless steel float. 2.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE AND PUMP CONNECTIONS (BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL) A. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) shall be constructed of annular corrugated stainless steel close-pitch hose with stainless steel overbraid. The corrugated metal hose, braid(s) and a stainless steel ring-ferrule/band (material gauge not less than .048 in.) shall be integrally seal-welded using a 100% circumferential, full-penetration TIG weld. Fittings shall be attached using a 100% circumferential TIG weld. B. Braided stainless steel pump and pipe connector(s) must be suitable for operating temperatures up to 850°F. The rated working pressure of the braided metal hose must have a minimum 4:1 safety factor. C. Each braided stainless steel connector shall be individually leak tested by the manufacturer using air-under-water or hydrostatic pressure. D. Braided stainless steel connectors shall carry a three (3) year warranty when installed in accordance with all specifications and installation instructions as described by the manufacturer. CORNELL SECTION 23 21 10 Ithaca, New York WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 120 Maple Ave WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 23 21 10 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 E. End fittings shall be flat-faceplate steel flanges with 150# ANSI drilling, and outside diameter, carbon steel MPT ends, flanged by Schedule 40 grooved ends or increasing ends. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: Flexhose Pumpsaver or equivalent Keflex, Metraflex, Mason-Mercer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain detailed instructions from each manufacturer for proper method of installation. 3.2 COMPRESSION TANKS A. Pitch connection to heating system 1 in to 5 ft. minimum up toward tank. Provide shutoff valve in piping connection to system and 3/4 in. hose end drain valve on tank. Provide supporting steelwork, hangers, and suspension racks. Provide water make-up connection, petcocks and tank fitting. 3.3 SYSTEM FILLING A. After cleaning, fill each system from low point. B. With pumps off, vent mains, risers, run-outs, and units, working consecutively from low to high point of building. Obtain approximately 2 psi at highest point. Obtain proper air cushion in compression/expansion tanks. 3.4 AIR VENTING A. Provide where specifically called for in piping details and at all points in piping systems where air may collect due to changes in piping elevation. 1. Manual air vent assembly consisting of 1-1/4 in. x 4 in. air collection chamber with 3/4 in. hose end ball valve with cap and chain. Only manual air vents are acceptable on glycol systems. 2. Automatic air vent with a ball valve for the purpose of isolation and service or replacement. Do not use automatic air vents on glycol systems. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, automatic air vents shall only be installed in Mechanical Rooms. Pipe high capacity air vent discharge down to floor. CORNELL SECTION 23 21 10 Ithaca, New York WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 120 Maple Ave WATER SYSTEMS SPECIALTIES 23 21 10 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Equipment Vents: 1. When equipment is above mains: Connect run-outs or risers to upper quadrant or top of mains. Install vent assembly concealed within enclosure, consisting of 1 in. diameter by 4 in. to 6 in. long air collection chamber with 1/4 in. soft copper tube to manual valve. Mount securely near bottom of enclosure, but not fastened to enclosure. For individual units, radiators, fan convectors and units with return grilled: Provide screwdriver operated manual valve, operated from discharge grille or access door. Drill enclosure and position valve for operating without removing enclosure. 2. When equipment is below mains: Connect piping run-outs or risers to bottom or lower quadrant of mains. Vent assembly not required in unit. Provide means of purging and draining each unit if required. Use tees instead of ells at low point of run-outs. 3.5 STRAINERS A. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 in. nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 in. and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 in. 3.6 FLOW BALANCERS A. Where flow balancers are smaller than pipe line size, provide reducers directly adjacent to flow balancers. B. Provide on zone or riser returns, on each hydronic unit and where called for. Meter connection points shall not point downward. END OF SECTION 23 21 10 CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 1 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 31 00 - SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in compliance with latest edition of the following standards. 1. SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible Ductwork. 2. SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard. 3. SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 4. NFPA Standards, Bulletin 90A, 96, 101. 5. Plans and Specifications which exceed the requirements in any of the referenced standards. 6. Mechanical Code of New York State, Chapter 6. B. All sheet metal shall be fabricated and installed by an experienced Contractor specializing in this type of work. C. All ductwork and fittings shall have a computer generated label affixed to the exterior surface of each section, detailing all applicable information including the duct dimensions, gauge, reinforcement type/class and connection type by systems manufacturer. Galvanizing thickness shall be clearly stenciled on each duct section. D. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Ductwork Shop Drawings. B. Duct Access Doors. C. Flexible Duct. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 2 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 D. Submit a complete shop standard manual including miscellaneous materials, and construction details for all shop fabricated materials including, but not limited to, volume dampers, turning vanes, duct sealant, equipment flexible connections, access doors, flexible duct, acoustical duct lining, etc. 1.4 GENERAL A. All adhesives, sealants, primers and paint used for ductwork in the interior of the building shall comply with the maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits called for in the current version of U.S. Green Building Council LEED Credits EQ 4.1 and EQ 4.2. 1.5 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION A. Duct systems are to be classified and constructed per the SMACNA Velocity-Pressure classification system as follows: 1. All ductwork shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 2 in. w.g. (unless stated otherwise) for the following systems, as applicable: a. Supply duct downstream of terminal units. b. Typical low pressure supply ductwork. c. Typical return ductwork. d. Typical low pressure exhaust ductwork. 2. Supply duct upstream of terminal units shall be constructed for a minimum pressure class of 3 in. w.g. unless otherwise stated or required as per below. 3. Pressure classes above 3 in. w.g. shall be provided as follows, based upon the external static pressure as scheduled for each specific fan. Scheduled External Static Pressure Pressure Class Over 3 in. up to 4 in. w.g. 4 in. w.g. Over 4 in. up to 6 in. w.g. 6 in. w.g. Over 6 in. up to 10 in. w.g. 10 in. w.g. 1.6 DUCTWORK SHOP DRAWINGS A. Prepare minimum 1/4 in. scale drawings: 1. Detailed ductwork shop drawings shall include size, layouts and pressure classifications. Any ductwork installed without benefit of review by the Engineer of Record may be subject to replacement at the expense of the Contractor. 2. Constructed from actual field inspections and measurements so as to assure a complete job. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 3 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 3. Incorporate dimensions of actual equipment proposed for use on the project. 4. Showing adequate sections, elevations, and plan views and indicating the bottom of ductwork elevations from the finished floor. 5. Indicating all volume dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, damper access doors and other accessories required for a completed project. B. Call to the attention of the Engineers immediately, any major deviations from the Contract Drawings, which must be made. All deviations shall be documented in writing. C. Indicate roof, wall and floor opening dimensions and locations shown on shop drawings. D. Submit prints to each Contractor of the other trades for review for interference's and coordination with their work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise called for, provide materials in accordance with Exhibit I at the end of this section. 2.2 SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. Manufactured of hot dip galvanized steel, conforming to ASTM A653 and A924, with G90/Z275 coating or aluminum conforming to ASTM B209 as noted. Gauges per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. B. Transverse and longitudinal duct seams reinforcement shall conform to appropriate tables and figures per SMACNA Velocity-Pressure Classification for duct construction. 1. Transverse joints shall be sealed with duct joint sealant. "Ductmate" or "Nexus" 4-bolt connection systems may be used in lieu of standard construction. 2. Field assembled longitudinal seams shall be sealed with duct sealant. Factory or shop fabricated rolled or machine pressed longitudinal seams does not require sealant. C. Corner closures shall be required as described and illustrated by SMACNA Duct Construction Standards. D. Throat radius on all elbows shall not be less than the dimension of the duct plane of radius. Where this cannot be maintained, use shorter radius with internal guide vanes, or square elbow with turning vanes. E. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA Standards for size and system class of ductwork being used. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 4 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 F. Any transformations shall not reduce the ductwork cross-sectional area. Maximum angle in straight duct, 20° for diverging flow and 30° for contraction flow. Transformation from square to round or flat to oval seams welded or brazed. 2.3 DUCTWORK SEALING A. SMACNA Duct Sealing Classification shall be used for duct systems using the following criteria: 1. Ductwork and all plenums with pressure class ratings shall be constructed to seal Class A, as required to meet the requirements of SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and with standard industry practice. 2. Openings for rotating shafts shall be sealed with bushings or other devices that seal off air leakage. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used. 3. All connections shall be sealed, including but not limited to spin-ins, taps, other branch connections, access doors, access panels and duct connections to equipment. 4. Sealing that would void product listings is not required. 5. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed. B. Duct sealant for indoor applications shall be non-fibrated, water based, Hardcast Iron- Grip IG -601, Ductmate PRO Seal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP146. C. Duct sealant for outdoor applications shall be fibrated, water based, Hardcast Versa-Grip VG-102, Ductmate Fiberseal, Foster 32-17 or Childers CP148. D. Sealants and tapes shall be listed and labeled in accordance with UL 181A or UL181B and marked according to type. 2.4 TURNING VANES A. Provide in mitered elbows as shown on contract drawings. Vanes 36 in. or longer shall be double wall air foil type. All turning vanes shall be installed as per the latest SMACNA Standards. Turning vane size and spacing shall be as per SMACNA. Turning vane spacing greater than SMACNA Standards is not acceptable. B. Turning vanes shall be Harper or equivalent double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. C. Turning vane front and back panels shall be securely locked together with adequate crimping to prevent twisting of vane. Vane shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of tensile load when secured according to the manufacturer's instructions. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 5 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 D. Rails for mounting turning vanes shall have self locking, friction fit tabs designed to facilitate proper alignment of vanes. Tab spacing shall be as specified in Figure 4-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". Rail systems with non-compliant tab spacing shall not be accepted. E. Acoustical Turning Vane: Shall be used in applications that require quiet operating systems. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. F. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries PRO-Rail Turning Vane or approved equal. 2.5 DAMPERS IN DUCTWORK A. Blade Type Volume Dampers: Constructed per SMACNA, one gauge heavier than duct material, securely fastened to 3/8 in. sq., cold rolled steel operator rod. Provide Ventlock 637/638 elevated dial regulator for insulated ductwork. B. Multiple Blade Type Volume Dampers: Provide multiple blade volume dampers in ductwork above 12 in. in height. 1. Heavy duty, manual balancing dampers suitable for application in HVAC systems with velocities to 1,500 ft. per minute, open position and max. pressure of 3 in. w.g. close position. Ruskin MD 35 or equivalent. 2. Fabrication: a. Frame: 5 in. x minimum 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hat- shaped channel, reinforced at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gauge U-channel. 3. Blades: a. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves. b. Action: Opposed. c. Orientation: Horizontal. d. Material: Minimum 16 gauge equivalent thickness, galvanized steel. e. Width: Nominal 6 in. 4. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame. 5. Linkage: Concealed in frame. 6. Axles: Minimum 1/2 in. diameter, plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically attached to blade. 7. Control Shaft: 3/8 in. square plated steel. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 6 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 8. Finish: Mill galvanized. a. Actuator: Hand quadrant for 3/8 in. square extended shaft. b. Hand Quadrant Standoff Bracket: 2 in. standoff for insulated ductwork. c. Oillite bearings. d. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness, minimum 12 in. length. C. Fire and Smoke Dampers: See "Fire and Smoke Dampers" Section. D. Automatic Air Dampers: Furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section 230923 and installed by this Contractor. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO FANS AND EQUIPMENT A. Basis-of-Design: Ventfabrics, Inc. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Ductmate Industries, Inc., Duro Dyne Inc., Elgen Manufacturing, Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, water and mildew resistant UL Standard 214. D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip [3-1/2 in.] [5-3/4 in.] wide attached to two (2) strips of 2-3/4-in. wide, 0.028-in. thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 in. thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/in. in the warp and 440 lbf/in. in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250°F. G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 7 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-in. movement at start and stop. 2.7 ACCESS DOORS A. General: 1. Provide access doors of adequate size to allow easy access to the equipment that will require maintenance. Provide insulated or acoustically lined doors to prevent condensation where applicable. 2. Manufacturer to provide an installed neoprene gasket around perimeter of access door for airtight seal. 3. Systems 3 in. w.g. or less shall utilize a hinged, cam, or hinged and cam square framed access door. 4. Systems 4 in. w.g. and above shall utilize a sandwich type access door. Construct doors in accordance with Figure 7-3 of the 2005 SMACNA Manual, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal & Flexible" Third Edition. 5. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Sandwich" style door or approved equal. 6. All access doors shall be continuous piano hinged type, unless noted otherwise. 7. Non-hinged only allowed where clearance to ceiling does not allow a full 90° swing. 8. Double panel insulated type when used in insulated duct. 9. Single panel uninsulated type allowed in un-insulated duct. 10. Pressure rated according to system in which being installed. Door-to-frame and frame-to-duct gasketing. 11. Provide specified Seal Class A or B ductwork sealing around frame, and hand adjust the latch tension for proper seal, on all access doors other than sandwich panel (Ductmate) style. 12. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. or less in depth is 12 in. x 8 in. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 8 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 13. MINIMUM access door size for ducts 12 in. to 18 in. in depth is 18 in. x 14 in. 14. MINIMUM access door size for ducts more than 18 in. in depth is 24 in. x 18 in. 15. In ducts which require multiple section fire dampers due to duct size, provide one access door for each fire damper section. 16. Access doors for fire and smoke dampers shall be permanently labeled with 1/2 in. high lettering reading "SMOKE DAMPER" or "FIRE DAMPER". 17. Grease exhaust duct doors shall be grease and air tight, UL 1978 listed, meet NFPA 96 standards and all mechanical codes. Grease duct access doors can be sandwich type or with a weld on frame, with/without hinge. Approved Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries "Ultimate" style door or approved equal. 18. All grease duct access doors used must be accompanied by independent testing in conjunction with each manufacturer's respective wrap system for high temperature applications. B. Door Types: 1. Medium and High Pressure Systems (3 in. w.g. pressure class and higher): a. Rectangular Duct: Ductmate Industries "Ultimate" Style Door, or equal. b. Round Duct: Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type, or equal. 8 in. x 4 in. for ducts 14 in. and less in diameter. Ductmate Industries Round Sandwich type 16 in. x 12 in. for ducts more than 14 in. in diameter. c. Furnish and install factory supplied protector molding on cut medal edge for all Ductmate access doors. 2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Ventlock 699 or 699-2 based upon insulation thickness. C. Install duct test holes where required for duct traverse testing and balancing purposes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and systems shall be installed in accordance with local and state codes and regulations having jurisdiction. Bracing and hanging of ductwork shall be per SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 9 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 B. Install all ductwork concealed and tight to the structure above unless noted otherwise on shop drawings. Fabricate only after the approval of shop drawings, and in locations to avoid interferences. Ductwork installed without approved shop drawings, which requires removal/modification and/or reinstallation due to conflicts or improper installation shall be repaired at no cost to the Owner. C. Sizes given on contract drawings are inside dimensions. D. Keep openings continuously closed and sealed with protective plastic wrapping during construction to prevent entrance of dirt and debris. E. Extend access openings, damper rods and levers, to outside of external insulation make systems airtight. F. No piping, conduit or other obstruction to airflow is permitted in ductwork. G. Provide necessary openings, hanger inserts, framing, chases, and recesses, not provided by other trades. H. Exposed exhaust or return registers and grilles shall be flush with face of duct; exposed supply registers and grilles shall be mounted outside airstream with 45° shoe-tap extension collars. I. Provide 14 gauge sleeves for ducts passing through Mechanical Room floors. Set sleeves 4 in. above finished floor in Mechanical Rooms, seal watertight to floor. J. Where a return or exhaust duct is shown to be left open ended, provide hardware mesh screen at opening. K. Do not utilize flexible ductwork or connection in any way to connect variable or constant volume boxes to ductwork. 3.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. Provide flexible connections for the intake and discharge connections of duct connected to fans and air handling equipment. B. Round connections are to be made with adhesive and metal drawbands with ends tightly bolted. C. Rectangular connections shall be made with material securely held in grooved seam between flanges. Attach with adhesive and mechanical fasteners on 6 in. centers. D. Connections shall be made with a minimum of 2 in. space between duct and equipment collars, installed in line, and with 1 in. excess material folded so as not to interfere with airflow through connection. E. Mechanically fastened and sealed, with specified duct sealant, at duct and equipment connections. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 10 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 3.3 TURNING VANES A. Install only in square elbows of equal dimensions. B. Install as per latest SMACNA Standards. C. Secure vane runners to duct with spot welding, riveting or sheet metal screws. D. When installing in ductwork with internal insulation. 1. Install runners in ductwork inside insulation and bolt through insulation and duct sides, welding bolts to insure rigid installation. Provide build-outs for duct Velocity-Pressure classes above 2 in. w.g. 3.4 CLEANING DUCTWORK AFTER INSTALLATION A. All ductwork on the project shall meet the SMACNA Duct Cleanliness For New Construction Guidelines, "Advanced Level" of duct cleanliness for production, delivery, storage and installation of ductwork. B. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Any cleaning of duct systems shall comply with recommendations of NAIMA and NADCA. C. Prior to installation or shipment to the jobsite, all duct ends and openings must be covered prior to transporting with a dual Polyethylene protective film. Film must be securely affixed to protect against dirt and debris and must be translucent to facilitate inspection of interior surfaces without removing film. Film must have a minimum elongation of 600%, contain no VOC and leave no residue on duct after removal. D. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries ProGuard, or approved equal. E. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal, or where ductwork is to be painted. F. Clean rubbish and dirt from system before fans are turned on. G. Keep openings continuously closed during this construction period. H. Pay damages resulting from dirt blown on painted or other finished surfaces. I. Repair or replace damaged fan wheels, dampers, or other system parts damaged as a result of dirt. J. Clean system as many times as required until the entire system is dirt free. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 11 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 3.5 TEST OF DUCTWORK A. Conduct duct leakage tests per SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and per the requirements of the Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State, for all ductwork systems designed to operate at static pressures in excess of 3.0 in. w.g. Representative sections totaling no less than 25% of the total duct area, per system, for the designated pressure class shall be tested as well as all associated ductwork located out-of-doors. All areas shall be as selected by the Engineer. Positive pressure leakage testing is acceptable for negative pressure ductwork. When leakage above stated limits occurs, ascertain location of leaks and repair as required. Repeat tests as required to obtain allowable leakage rates. Prepare a report similar to that suggested by SMACNA and submit for review. Duct testing shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner's Representative. B. Provide test reports indicating pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure and leakage rate. C. Ductwork not required to be tested for leakage, shall be checked and guaranteed to meet the standards of the specified SMACNA Duct Sealing Classifications. Air balancing and testing shall be used to determine satisfactory operation of duct systems. Balancing reports indicating excessive leakage amounts shall be required to rebuild, repair or seal ductwork having excessive leakage. 3.6 DAMPERS AND AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide volume dampers at all air outlets, diffusers, grilles and as noted on plans. Provide volume dampers at all low pressure supply, return and exhaust, branch ducts and as noted on the plans. B. Provide dampers necessary to permit proper balancing of air quantities. Comply with code requirements for smoke and fire control. Prevent introduction of uncontrolled outside air into building through roof and wall openings. C. When dampers are installed in acoustically lined ductwork, install with insulated "build- outs" per SMACNA. D. Install fire and smoke dampers in accordance with "Fire and Smoke Dampers" Section and applicable codes. E. Install all dampers furnished as part of "Building Management System" Section. 3.7 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide for access to upstream side of duct mounted reheat coils, dampers, damper motors, fire dampers, smoke dampers, smoke detectors, control devices, fan bearings, and equipment requiring periodic inspection or service. Provide labels for fire and smoke dampers as called for in Part 2 - Products. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 12 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 3.8 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Provide per SMACNA, same material as duct. Hanger bands to extend down sides and turn under bottom 2 in. Minimum two metal screws per hanger. Angle iron on larger duct spaced per building structural system but not greater that 8 ft. Provide extra support angles as required. 3.9 SMOKE DETECTION A. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by Division 26 "Electrical" 28 "Electronic Safety and Security". This Contractor shall install detectors located in ductwork. Clearly indicate locations of smoke detectors on the sheet metal shop drawings. B. Increase duct size at smoke detectors, where required for proper installation, per smoke detector manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate minimum duct size required with Division 26 "Electrical" 28 "Electronic Safety and Security". C. in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.10 DUCT SEALING A. Preparation: 1. Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease and loose of foreign matter that could impair adhesion, using soap and water or solvent. 2. Allow surfaces to dry completely before proceeding. B. Installation of Sealant System: 1. Apply sealant system to duct joints, fasteners, and seams in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply sealant by brush, putty knife or caulk gun, to full coverage. Remove excess adhesive immediately. 3. Completely seal duct joint, fasteners and seams without voids, to a minimum 20 mil thick wet film. 4. Apply and store at ambient temperature of 40°F to 100°F; and protect from freezing until dry. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Allow duct sealant system to cure a minimum of 72 hours before operating the system. 2. Do not apply external duct insulation or coatings until the joints have been inspected by the Owner's Representative. CORNELL SECTION 23 31 00 Ithaca, New York SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION 120 Maple Ave SHEET METAL AND DUCTWORK 23 31 00 - 13 RTU Replacement ACCESSORIES CONSTRUCTION April 18, 2014 EXHIBIT I - DUCTWORK MATERIALS SERVICE MATERIAL SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Supply, return, vent, relief, outside and exhaust Lock forming quality, galvanized steel ASTM A653 and A924, galvaneal/paint grip if not insulated and exposed Joints and features as called for Exterior ductwork Galvaneal/paint grip (ready for paint) if not insulated, otherwise same as above Horizontal top surfaces crossbrocken for positive water drainage, Ductmate joints, seal Class A, and outdoor duct sealant per spec Accessories, dampers and air turns Same material and gauge as parent duct --------------- END OF SECTION 23 31 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 33 13 Ithaca, New York FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 120 Maple Ave FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 23 33 13 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 33 13 - FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data, types, schedule of sizes, locations, and installation arrangements of all dampers. B. Submit manufacturer's UL listed installation details for each mounting arrangement. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide work in accordance with the latest requirements of the Mechanical Code of New York State UL 555, UL 555S and UL555C. Fire dampers shall be Underwriter's Laboratories classified and labeled. Smoke dampers and operator assemblies shall be Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) classified and labeled as an assembly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE DAMPERS A. Curtain type damper of galvanized steel (304 stainless steel for ductwork containing shower room exhaust, wet location exhaust, and corrosive fume exhaust) construction with fusible link, 20 gauge frame and 24 gauge blades. UL listed and labeled. 1. 100% free area with welded head. 2. Square, rectangular, round or oval duct connection as required by duct connections. 3. 1-1/2 hour rated dampers for walls or floors rated less than three hours. Three- hour rated dampers for three and four hour walls or floors. 4. With factory fabricated sleeve with fixed and slip flanges. 5. Fusible link temperature rating of 165°F. B. Design Equipment: Ruskin Model IBD2 Style B. C. Make: Ruskin, Air Balance, National Controlled Air, Prefco, Venco, Greenheck, Nailor. CORNELL SECTION 23 33 13 Ithaca, New York FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 120 Maple Ave FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 23 33 13 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.2 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Airfoil multiblade type damper of galvanized steel construction suitable for installation in high velocity duct systems up to 3000 fpm and 4 in. s.p. with 16 gauge hat channel frame with corner reinforcement and blades equivalent to 14 gauge, silicone rubber blade edge seals, stainless steel bearings and flexible stainless steel jamb seals. UL listed and labeled. 1. UL listed 120 volt electric motor operator. Operator to be mounted outside of the air stream. 2. Square, rectangle, or round as required. Duct transitions for dampers in oval ducts. 3. With factory fabricated sleeve with fixed and slip flanges. 4. Class I leak rating of 4.0 cfm/ft2 at 1 in. w.g. (8.0 cfm/ft2 at 4 in. w.g.) 5. 1-1/2 hour fire rated. Fusible link temperature rating of 165°F. 6. Provide with damper position indicator switch package. B. Design Equipment: Ruskin FSD60. C. Make: Ruskin, Air Balance, National Controlled Air, Greenheck, Nailor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LOCATIONS A. Provide fire dampers in all one, two and three hour rated wall and floor penetrations. B. Provide smoke dampers as called for in penetrations of smoke barriers. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide sleeve, angles, and access doors for installation in accordance with the latest requirements of SMACNA, NFPA, UL and damper manufacturer. B. Provide sheet metal access doors with labels, as called for in Specification Section 233100 in ductwork for dampers and accessories. C. Install dampers square and free from racking. D. Do not compress or stretch the damper frame into the duct or opening. E. Provide bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure. Attach multiple damper section assemblies together in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install support mullions as reinforcement between assemblies as required. CORNELL SECTION 23 33 13 Ithaca, New York FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 120 Maple Ave FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS 23 33 13 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 F. Division 26 "Electric" will provide signal wiring and power wiring for smoke dampers. Refer to "Building Management System" Section for additional requirements. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by Division 26 "Electric". Install detectors located in ductwork within 5'-0" of the damper. Increase duct size at smoke detectors, where required for proper installation, per smoke detector manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate minimum duct size and length for smoke detectors required with Division 26 "Electric. G. Provide insulation end seal fittings for double wall ductwork where same connects to damper assembly. 3.3 CERTIFICATION A. Contractor shall certify that dampers are accessible for servicing, are installed properly, and are operational. Submit three (3) copies of signed certification to the Owner's Representative for review. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide damper tags and charts. 1. Fasten tag to ductwork adjacent to the dampers. 2. Number each damper and make chart listing. a. Number. b. Location. c. Air system in which they are installed. B. Submit three (3) copies of chart to the Owner's Representative for review. END OF SECTION 23 33 13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 41 00 Ithaca, New York AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 23 41 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 41 00 - AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation designed in Contract Documents. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as detailed on the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Filter product data including certification date, pressure drops at the scheduled airflow, schedule of filter sizes for each system. All filter accessories, including framing systems, fastening clips, manometers, and differential pressure gauges. B. Provide product test reports for each listed efficiency including all details as prescribed in ASHRAE Standard 52.2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 52-76, and UL Standard 586-Class II requirements. Filters shall also comply with requirements of applicable State and federal agencies. Filters shall not exceed a flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development rating of 50. B. Housing manufacturers shall be the same manufacturer as the filter manufacturer. C. Manufacturer shall provide evidence of facility certification to ISO 9001: 2008. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MAKES A. Viledon, Camfil-Farr, Filtration Group and Tri-Dim Corporation 2.2 MEDIUM EFFICIENCY AIR FILTERS (MERV 8 PLEATED TYPE) A. Filters shall be medium capacity extended surface pleated air filters. B. Filters shall be available in standard nominal depths 2". C. Filter shall be the Camfil Farr 30/30, or an approved equal. D. This type of filter is employed as a pre-filter in dry environments. E. Media shall be 100% synthetic or polyester/cotton blend, mechanical media that does not support microbial growth. CORNELL SECTION 23 41 00 Ithaca, New York AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 23 41 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 F. Frame shall be a heavy duty, high strength, moisture resistant paperboard with a cross member design that increases filter rigidity and prevents breaching. Frame shall be made with 100% recycled paperboard with an average of 35% post-consumer content. Frame shall be recyclable. G. Filters shall have a paperboard or expanded metal support grid bonded to the air- exiting side of the filter to maintain pleat uniformity and prevent fluttering. Paperboard and metal support grid shall be recyclable and contain a significant amount of post-consumer and pre-consumer content. H. Filters shall be MERV 8 in a medium capacity configuration when fully tested in accordance with the ASHRAE 52.2-2007 Test Standard. I. Initial resistance of filters shall not exceed the following, based on the following face velocities: Filter Depth Airflow Velocity Init Pressure Drop 1" 375 fpm 0.23" w.g. 2" 500 fpm 0.31" w.g. 4" 500 fpm 0.27" w.g. J. Filters shall have a recommended maximum final resistance of 1.0" w.g. 2.1 LOW-PRESSURE DROP CARTRIDGE-TYPE FINAL FILTERS A. Air filters shall be high-efficiency ASHRAE pleat-in-pleat V-bank disposable type assembled in a compact and secure enclosing frame. B. Filter media shall be of microfine glass formed into uniformly spaced pleats separated by fiberglass thread separators and formed into a minipleat pack design. Each minipleat pack shall be assembled into a V-bank configuration with an appropriate number of packs to obtain required pressure drop. The media packs shall be bonded to the inside periphery of the enclosing frame with a fire-retardant phosphorus-free sealant. The enclosing frame shall include galvanized steel channels bonded to the media pack to prevent air bypass. Extruded aluminum supports shall be placed on the air entering and air exiting sides to promote uniform airflow and assist in structural support. Rigid plastic end caps shall be mechanically fastened to the top and bottom of the enclosing structure to ensure a rigid and durable filter. C. The filter shall include an integral header for installation in a standard 1 in. nominal filter track. D. The filter shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value as follows when evaluated under the guidelines of ASHRAE Standard 52.2-2007. 1. Camfil-Farr Durafil MERV 11; initial resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.30" w.g at an airflow of 500 fpm. E. Filter shall be rated by Underwriters Laboratories as UL Class 2. F. Design Equipment: Camfil-Farr Riga-Flo. CORNELL SECTION 23 41 00 Ithaca, New York AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 120 Maple Ave AIR FILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 23 41 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.2 MAGNEHELIC GAUGE A. 3-7/8 in. diameter white dial diaphragm actuated air filter gauge. Guaranteed accurate to ± 2% of full scale. Pointer zero adjustment. Provide all accessories including adapters, mounting panel, pressure tips, fittings, tubing, and vent valves. B. Range: 1. Pre-filters; 0-1 in. wc, Dwyer Model 2001 2. Final filters; 0-2 in. wc, Dwyer Model 2002 C. Design Equipment: Dwyer Magnehelic Series 2000 with air filter gage accessory package. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide one set of spare filters of each type for each system requiring a filter. Install first set of filters when units are initially installed (as opposed to started). Change filters as required during construction period to maintain systems in a clean manner throughout the construction period. Remove dirty set and install one clean set prior to Owner occupancy. If original filters do not required replacement, as determined by Owner's Representative, then deliver final set to Owner and obtain receipt. B. Install supports, filters and gages in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 MAGNEHELIC GAUGES A. Provide for each filter set. END OF SECTION 23 41 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 23 73 13 - AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services as required for the complete installation as shown on the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit unit performance including capacity, nominal and operating performance. B. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options. C. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations. Indicate unit shipping split locations, and split dimensions, installation and operating weights including dimensions. D. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. E. Submit data on electrical requirements. Include safety and start-up instructions. F. Submit sound data certified to ARI 260. 1.3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Units may be shipped fully assembled or disassembled to the minimum module size in accordance with shipping or jobsite requirements. B. The units must be rigged and lifted in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. All unit openings must be sealed to prevent the entrance of construction dust. D. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated (if applicable), condensate properly trapped, piping connections verified and leak-tested, belts aligned and tensioned, all shipping braces removed, bearing set screws torqued, and fan has been test run under observation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The units shall consist of the AHU modules as shown on the plans. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Air handling units to fit intended use and location as called for. Capacity, size and arrangement, static pressure, brake horsepower, component parts and accessories as called for and as necessary to obtain required results and allow for proper maintenance. Ratings based on standard Test Code for Centrifugal Fans, adopted jointly by AMCA and ASHRAE. Each size fan to be supplied shall be tested in the manufacturer's laboratory under simulated installation conditions. Ratings based on test, not on interpolated or extrapolated calculation. Guaranteed full capacity delivery through duct systems finally installed and under conditions listed. Guaranteed sound power level ratings not exceeding those of design equipment or as scheduled. C. Source Limitations: Obtain modular indoor air-handling units through one source from a single manufacturer. D. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to the applicable ARI Standard and shall be listed and labeled by ARI. E. More than one manufacturer is listed as make, Contractor must be certain that equipment submitted fits properly into indicated space conditions, same as design equipment. F. Motors shall conform to the requirements of Specification Section 230513 Motors. G. Drives: 1. All motors and drives shall be factory-installed and run tested. All motors shall be installed on a slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension. Slide base shall be designed to accept all motor sizes offered by the air-handler manufacturer for that fan size to allow a motor change in the future, should airflow requirements change. Fan sections without factory-installed motors shall have motors field installed by the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with installation of motor and drive, alignment of sheaves and belts, run testing of the motor, and balancing of the assembly. 2. Equipment manufacturer furnish V-belt drives as recommended by drive manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. a. 200 % of motor rating, when motor is 10 HP and larger and /or subject to frequent starting, 150% of motor horsepower on motors less than 10 horsepower. b. Motors 5 HP and Larger: Minimum of two (2) belts, matched belt sets for multiple belt drives. c. Cast iron or cast steel pulleys, test holes in belt guards for speed checks. Provide shaft guards where shafts extend beyond belt guard. 3. Motor pulleys: a. Fixed sheave-type only. b. 5 HP and Smaller: "A" section, 2.6 in. minimum pitch diameter. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 c. 7-1/2 HP to 20 HP: "B" section, 4/6 in. minimum pitch diameter. d. 25 HP and Larger: "C" section, 7.0 in minimum pitch diameter. e. Drive ratio not over 4:1. 2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Unit Base: 1. Rooftop Units: a. Base shall be welded supporting the entire length and width of the unit. Units shipped in one piece shall have at a minimum six points of lift. These lift points shall be designed to accept standard rigging devices. b. The unit base design shall allow unit to rest on top of roof curb when field installed. Entire length and width under base shall be sealed in the field with curb gasketing for weather tight seal. c. Galvanized steel roof mounting curb with wood nailing strip, and neoprene gasket shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer. If unit requires external piping cabinet, a separate curb shall be supplied for support of the external cabinet. B. Casing: 1. Outdoor Units: a. All panels shall be double wall construction. Interior and exterior panels shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Panel insulation system shall provide a minimum R-value of 12. Insulation shall conform to NFPA 90 requirements. b. Panels shall be fully removable to allow for a proper way to thoroughly clean panels and to access internal parts. If panels are not removable, then manufacturer shall provide access sections with doors between all internal components to ensure access and cleanability of the air handler. c. Access doors shall be constructed with a double-wall of solid G90 galvanized steel interior panel. Gasketing around the full perimeter of the access door shall be used to prevent air and water leakage. Preferred door handle shall not penetrate door casing with single-handle latch. d. Perforated interior liner with fiberglass insulation shall be applied to sections as specified on the schedule. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 e. External surface of unit casing shall be prepared and factory coated with a minimum 1.5 -mil enamel finish or equal. Unit casing exterior with factory coating shall be able to withstand a salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117 for a minimum of 500 consecutive hours. Unit casing will be provided with manufacturer's standard color. f. Unit roof shall be sloped a minimum .25 in. per foot either from one side of unit to other or from center to sides of the unit. Roof assembly shall overhang all walls of units by 2 in. minimum. g. For units with outside air requirements, manufacturer shall provide inlet hood with high performance sine wave moisture eliminator to prevent water carryover into unit casing from outside air. Hoods shall be sized for 100% economizer cycle. If eliminator is not factory provided, contractor shall be responsible for field supplying and installing in manufacturers standard outside air inlet hood (s). If louvers are provided, then louvers shall be tested by an Independent AMCA approved laboratory for water carryover and air pressure drop in accordance with AMCA Standard 500, and testing reports shall be supplied with the submittal data. 2. Provide in fan and cooling coil, positioned to be able to view the condensate pan sections: a. Provide marine lights; UL listed for wet locations. Light shall be complete with bulb and junction box b. To facilitate inspection of internal components, provide sealed tempered glass view windows. C. Fan Section(s): 1. Provide supply and return fan section(s) as shown on the plans. 2. Fan types shall be AF double width, double inlet centrifugal fans as indicated. Fans shall be designed and suitable for class of service indicated in the unit schedule. Fan shaft to be properly sized and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Fan shafts shall be solid and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. Fans shall be statically and dynamically tested as an assembly at the required RPM to meet design specifications. Key fan wheels to fan shaft to prevent slipping. 3. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated pillow-block ball bearings selected for L- 50 400,000 - for plug fans hour average life per ANSI/AFBMA 9. Extend both grease lubrication fittings to drive side of unit with plastic tubes and zerk fittings rigidly attached to drive-side bearing support. 4. Vibration levels shall be factory tested for VAV applications. Special balancing and structural components shall be provided to minimize harmonic vibrations. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 5. Mount fans on isolation bases. Internally mount motors on same isolation bases and internally isolate fans and motors with 2 in. spring isolators. Install flexible canvas ducts between fan and casings to ensure complete isolation. Flexible canvas ducts shall comply with NFPA 90A. 6. Fan sections shall have full height, double wall, hinged doors on drive side for inspection and maintenance of internal components. 7. For fan sections controlled by variable frequency drives, balance at speeds between 25% and 100% of design RPM. 8. Belts shall be enclosed as required by OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910 to protect worker from accidental contact with the belts and sheaves. D. Filter Section: 1. Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings. Filter section shall have filter guides and access doors extending the full height of the casing to facilitate filter removal. Provide filter block-offs as required to prevent air bypass around filters. Filters shall be removable from both sides of filter sections. 2. Filter type, efficiency, and arrangement shall be provided as defined in project plans and schedule. Filters shall be removable from both sides of filter section(s). 3. Refer to the filter specification 23 4100 for filter requirements. 4. Manufacturer shall provide one set of startup filters and an additional set of operational filters. 5. Provide magnehelic gauge across the pre and final filter bank. E. Coils: 1. Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casing to ensure that if condensate forms on the header or return bends, it is captured by the drainpan under the coil. 2. Coils shall be manufactured with plate fins to minimize water carryover and maximize airside thermal efficiency. Fin tube holes shall have drawn and belled collars to maintain consistent fin spacing to ensure performance and air pressure drop across the coil as scheduled. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded and bonded to fin collars for maximum thermal conductivity. Use of soldering or tinning during the fin-to-tube bonding process is not acceptable due to the inherent thermal stress and possible loss of bonding at that joint. 3. Construct coil casings of stainless steel. End supports and tube sheets shall have belled tube holes to minimize wear of the tube wall during thermal expansion and contraction of the tube. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. All coils shall be completely cleaned prior to installation into the air-handling unit. Complete fin bundle in direction of airflow shall be degreased and steam cleaned to remove any lubricants used in the manufacturing of the fins, or dirt that may have accumulated, in order to minimize the chance for water carryover. 5. On stacked cooling coils, intermediate drain pans shall be installed between the coils. Intermediate drain pans shall have drop tubes to guide condensate to the main drain pan, thus preventing flooding of lower coils that would result in moisture carryover. 6. Hydronic Coils: a. Supply and return header connections shall be clearly labeled on outside of units such that direction of coil water-flow is counter to direction of unit airflow. b. Coils shall be proof tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 300 psig air pressure under water. c. Headers shall be constructed of round copper pipe or cast iron. Tubes shall be copper. Fins shall be aluminum. 7. Refrigerant Cooling Coils: a. Refrigerant suction and liquid connections shall be clearly labeled on outside of units. b. Coils shall be proof tested to 450 psig and leak tested to 300 psig air pressure under water. After testing, insides of tubes shall be air dried, charged with dry nitrogen, and sealed to prevent contamination. c. Refrigerant suction and liquid headers shall be constructed of copper tubing. Suction and liquid connections shall penetrate unit casings to allow for sweat connections to refrigerant lines. d. Tubes shall be copper. Fins shall be aluminum. e. Coils shall have equalizing type vertical distributors sized in conjunction with capacities of coils. F. External Piping Enclosure: Piping enclosure shall be supplied by the manufacturer factory assembled and shall be of the same construction as the main unit casing. Piping cabinet shall be external to the unit and be shipped separate for field installation in order to facilitate piping of the unit coil(s). Piping cabinet to cover unit sections as specified on schedule and shall have access door(s), or removable panels, as specified. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 G. IAQ Drain Pans: 1. Insulation shall be encased between exterior and interior walls. Units with cooling coils shall have drain pans under complete cooling coil section that extend beyond the air-leaving side of the coil to ensure capture of all condensate in section. Cooling coil drain pans shall be sloped in 2 planes, pitched toward drain connections to ensure complete condensate drainage when unit is installed level and trapped per manufacturer's requirements. 2. Units with heating coils shall have a drain pan under complete heating coil section sloped in 2 planes and pitched toward drain connections to ensure proper drainage during cleaning and to capture water in the event of a coil failure. 3. Furnish a drain pan in the outside air intake section. 4. All drain pan connections supplied by unit manufacturer including, piping, and piping connections extending from stainless steel drain pans shall be constructed of stainless steel. The contractor is responsible to ensure the unit is installed level, trapped in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, and visually inspected to ensure proper drainage of condensate. 5. Flat drain pans shall be acceptable in sections that may have incidental, but not continuous contact with moisture. Flat drain pans shall be accessible for cleaning. H. Dampers 1. All dampers shall be internally mounted. Dampers shall be premium ultra low leak and located as scheduled. Dampers shall be Ruskin CD60 double-skin airfoil design or equivalent for minimal air leakage and pressure drop. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 CFM/square foot at one-inch water gauge and 9 CFM/square foot at 4 in. water gauge. All leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA Publication 500. Manufacturer shall submit brand and model of damper(s) being furnished. 2. Provide dampers to modulate the volume of outside air, return air and exhaust air as shown. Damper blades shall be galvanized steel, housed in a galvanized steel frame and mechanically fastened to an axle rod rotating on bearings. Blade seals are required to assure tight closure. All dampers shall be rated for a maximum leakage rate of less than 1 percent of nominal CFM at one-inch w.g. Configure the dampers as shown on the plans: a. OA/RA Mixing Module. b. Return fan economizer. 3. For units with outside air requirements, manufacturer shall provide inlet hood with high performance sine wave moisture eliminator to prevent water carryover into unit casing from outside air. Hoods shall be sized for 100% economizer cycle. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 I. Access Sections: 1. Access for inspection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fans sections shall be provided. The unit shall be installed for proper access. Procedure for proper access, inspection and cleaning of the unit shall be included in the maintenance manual. Access section shall have double wall, hinged, removable access doors on one sides of sections. J. Factory-Installed Variable Frequency Drive/Line Break Switch: 1. Combination Variable Frequency Drive/line break switches shall be properly sized, mounted, wired to the fan motor, and commissioned by the AHU manufacturer. Combination VFD / line break switches shall include the VFD, a circuit breaker disconnect, a H-O-A switch, a manual speed control dial, and a control transformer. Factory mounting will facilitate temporary heating, cooling, ventilation, and / or timely completion of the project. 2. Variable Frequency Drives: The VFD shall be a high performance pulse width modulated (PWM) AC drive that generates a sine-code, variable voltage / frequency, three phase output for optimum speed control. The inverter section shall utilize only intelligent power modules (IPM's) to generate an 8 kHz PWM output to ensure a low audible magnetic motor noise (@ 60 Hz) of less than 2 dB (@ 1 meter) above across the line operation. Power electronics shall provide at least 96% efficiency. The VFD shall be digitally based using a common microprocessor control logic circuit board for the horsepower ratings. All programming shall be maintained in non-volatile RAM memory so the program will be maintained when power is removed. A digital operator keypad and display shall provide local control and readout for: run/stop, speed, reset, volts, amps, kilowatts, and diagnostics. Output current overload should be rated at 110% of motor FLA for one minute. The VFD shall have the following minimal protective features: current limited stall prevention, auto restart after momentary power loss, speed search for starting into rotating motor, anti-windmill w/DC injection before start, phase-to-phase short circuit protection, and ground fault protection. Ambient service temperature rating of -10 to 50 degrees C, and humidity rating to 95% non-condensing. The VFD shall be UL508C listed and CSA certified and shall conform to applicable NEMA, ICS, NFPA, IEC, and ISO 9001 standards. 3. Enclosure: VFD/Line Break Switch shall have full metal enclosures. Enclosures shall be weather tight and completely recessed inside the standard unit casing. The door should be identical construction to the access doors on the air handler. A manual shut down switch shall be located on the outside of the access door. 4. Factory Mounting: VFD/Disconnect shall be factory-mounted on the drive side of the air handling unit fan section. Ensure four feet of clearance to access panel. 5. Factory Wiring: VFD / disconnects shall be wired to fan motor per required NEC, UL, and NFPA 90 requirements. Units with factory-mounted controls shall also include power wiring from the VFD control transformer to the control system transformers. Also a binary start-stop signal and an analog speed signal shall be wired complete from the direct digital controller to the VFD. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 6. Factory Commissioning: Trained factory personnel shall ensure proper operation of the VFD by a thorough factory test. Testing shall include "Hypot" test of unit wiring to insure that no weaknesses exist in VFD, wiring, or motor. VFD should be energized and fan run at 22 Hz, 40 Hz, and 60 Hz to insure VFD will operate throughout usable range of drive and that the fan rotation is correct. If VFD has bypass, fan will additionally be tested in bypass position to insure bypass is operational. 7. Acceptable Variable Speed Drive Manufacturers: a. ABB, Yaskawa, Eaton/Cutler Hammer, Square D. K. Design Equipment for Air Handling Units: 1. Penthouse (Rooftop) Units: Daikin Applied 2. Makes: Daikin Applied, Trane, York by Johnson Controls, Carrier. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and compatible with intent of the respective system performance requirements. B. Provide vibration isolators in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as called for. Provide necessary steel supporting framework for equipment requiring same. Braced against swaying. C. Change pulley sizes as many times as necessary, as part of Contract, to make systems deliver specified quantities of air. D. Provide 6 in. high concrete pads for all floor mounted air-handling units. E. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. Do not block access doors or coil pull-space with piping. F. Pan Drains: 1. Connect condensate drain pans with full-size piping. 2. Construct trap with offset dimension and seal depth per manufacturer's recommendations. Install cleanouts at changes in direction. 3. Indoor Units: Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. G. Start-Test-Check: 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. CORNELL SECTION 23 73 13 Ithaca, New York AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 120 Maple Ave AIR HANDLING UNITS (PENTHOUSE) 23 73 13 - 10 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 3. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 4. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 5. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water and test coils and connections for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 6. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 7. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 8. Verify that specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters. 9. Verify that cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain. 10. Verify that the cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal. 11. Clean air-handling units internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face. 12. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing modular indoor air handling and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters. END OF SECTION 23 73 13 CORNELL SECTION 26 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ROUGHING A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in contract work, equipment locations, etc., as part of a contract to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. Before installing, verify exact location and elevations at work site. DO NOT SCALE plans. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require an important rearrangement, report same to Owner's Representative for review. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. B. Install work so that items both existing and new are operable and serviceable. Eliminate interference with removal of coils, motors, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at controllers, motor starters, valve access, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Provide new materials, including new piping and insulation for relocated work. C. Coordinate work with other trades and determine exact route or location of each duct, pipe, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Obtain from Owner's Representative exact location of all equipment in finished areas, such as thermostat, fixture, and switch mounting heights, and equipment mounting heights. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. Mechanical and electrical drawings show design arrangement only for diffusers, grilles, registers, air terminals, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, and other items. Do not rough-in contract work without reflected ceiling location plans. D. Before roughing for equipment furnished by Owner or in other contracts, obtain from Owner and other Contractors, approved roughing drawings giving exact location for each piece of equipment. Do not "rough in" services without final layout drawings approved for construction. Cooperate with other trades to insure proper location and size of connections to insure proper functioning of all systems and equipment. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare roughing drawing as follows: 1. Existing Equipment: Measure the existing equipment and prepare for installation in new location. 2. New Equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, then prepare roughing-in-drawings. If such information is not available in time, obtain an acknowledgement in writing, then make space arrangements as required with Owner's Representative. 1.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL INSTALLATION A. Provide materials that meet the following minimum requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. 3. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the NEC. 1.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each trade shall include their required cutting and patching work unless shown as part of the General Construction Contract. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, for additional requirements. Cut and drill from both sides of walls and/or floors to eliminate splaying. Patch cut or abandoned holes left by removals of equipment or fixtures. Patch adjacent existing work disturbed by installation of new work including insulation, walls and wall covering, ceiling and floor covering, other finished surfaces. Patch openings and damaged areas equal to existing surface finish. Cut openings in prefabricated construction units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.4 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, and elsewhere throughout building. If concealment is impossible or impractical, notify Owner's Representative before starting that part of the work and install only after his review. In areas with no ceilings, install only after Owner's Representative reviews and comments on arrangement and appearance. 1.5 CHASES A. New Construction: 1. Certain chases, recesses, openings, shafts, and wall pockets will be provided as part of General Construction Contract. Mechanical and Electrical Contracts shall provide all other openings required for their contract work. 2. Check Architectural and Structural Design and Shop Drawings to verify correct size and location for all openings, recesses and chases in general building construction work. 3. Assume responsibility for correct and final location and size of such openings. 4. Rectify improperly sized, improperly located or omitted chases or openings due to faulty or late information or failure to check final location. 5. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves and inserts. Extend all sleeves 2 in. above finished floor. Set sleeves and inserts in place ahead of new construction, securely fastened during concrete pouring. Correct, by drilling, omitted or improperly located sleeves. Assume responsibility for all work and equipment damaged during course of drilling. Firestop all unused sleeves. 6. Provide angle iron frame where openings are required for contract work, unless provided by General Construction Contractor. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. In Existing Buildings: 1. Drill holes for floor and/or roof slab openings. 2. Multiple pipes smaller than 1 in. properly spaced and supported may pass through one 6 in. or smaller diameter opening. 3. Seal voids in fire rated assemblies with a fire-stopping seal system to maintain the fire resistance of the assembly. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at fire rated assemblies. Extend sleeves 2 in. above floors. 4. In wall openings, drill or cut holes to suit. Provide 18 gauge galvanized sleeves at shafts and fire rated assemblies. Provide fire-stopping seal between sleeves and wall in drywall construction. Provide fire stopping similar to that for floor openings. 1.6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Penetrations Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire-stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion, and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Plastic pipe/conduit materials shall be installed utilizing intumescent collars. 6. Provide a submittal including products intended for use, manufacturer's installation instructions, and the UL details for all applicable types of wall and floor penetrations. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP. 3. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts. 4. Carborundum Fyre Putty. 5. 3-M Fire Products. 6. Hilti Corporation. 1.7 SUPPORTS A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support contract work. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For precast panels/planks and metal decks, support mechanical/electrical work as determined by manufacturer and the Engineer. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity. B. Equipment, piping, conduit, raceway, etc. supports shall be installed to minimize the generation and transmission of vibration. C. Materials and equipment shall be solely supported by the building structure and connected framing. Gypboard, ceilings, other finishes, etc. shall not be used for support of materials and equipment. 1.8 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide access panels for required access to respective Contract work. Location and size shall be the responsibility of each Contract. Bear cost of construction changes necessary due to improper information or failure to provide proper information in ample time. Access panels over 324 square inches shall have two cam locks. Provide proper frame and door type for various wall or ceiling finishes. Access panels shall be equal to "Milcor" as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Co., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Provide Contractor for General Trades with a set of architectural plans with size and approximate locations of access panels shown. 1.9 HVAC EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Contractor is responsible for draining, filling, venting, chemically treating and restarting any systems which are affected by work shown on the Contract Documents unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Provide final hot water, glycol and drain connections to all equipment as required by the equipment. Provide final connections, including wiring, controls, and devices from equipment to outlets left by other trades. Provide equipment waste, drip, overflow and drain connections extended to floor drains. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 00 Ithaca, New York BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 120 Maple Ave BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 05 00 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 C. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all valves, piping, piping accessories, traps, pressure reducing valves, gauges, relief valves, vents, drains, insulation, sheet metal work, controls, dampers, as required. 1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Provide complete power connections to all electrical equipment. Provide control connections to equipment. Heavy duty NEC rated disconnect ahead of each piece of equipment. Ground all equipment in accordance with NEC. B. Provide for Owner furnished and Contractor furnished equipment all power wiring, electric equipment, control wiring, switches, lights, receptacles, and connections as required. END OF SECTION 26 05 00 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 26 05 01 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included, and show only approximate locations of equipment, fixtures, panelboards, conduits, and wiring devices. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. The general run of electrical feeders, branch circuits, and conduits, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Exact routings of conduit shall suit the job conditions. B. Circuit designations, in the form of "Home Runs" on branches, indicate the designation of the branch circuit, the size and the quantity of branch circuit conductors, and the panel board or interconnection box from which the branch circuit is served. C. Make measurements at the site and in the building during construction for all systems installed as the work progresses in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents, ducts, conduit, and boxes will fit in the space available. Maintain headroom and if in unfinished areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure and "out-of-the-way" as physically possible. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements. In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and /or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. D. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. B. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following equipment, materials and products, including all fittings and accessories: 1. Conduit 2. Expansion Fittings 3. Wireway and Wire Trough 4. Channel Support Systems 5. Conductors 6. Cables 7. Cable Termination and Splice Kits 8. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets 9. Wiring Devices Including Dimmers 10. Water Proofing Seals 11. Flashing, Sealing, Firestopping Materials 12. Salvageable Materials 1.4 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS A. Salvageable materials will be reviewed and identified by the Owner. Instruction shall be given to the Contractor whether the Owner will remove salvageable materials, or whether Contractor is to remove and deliver salvageable materials to a designated site. B. Items normally accepted as salvage by the Owner: 1. Circuit breakers 2. Disconnects (100 AMP and up) 3. Luminaires 4. Fire protection equipment PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conduit, Raceway and Tubing: 1. Rigid Metal Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or electro-galvanized steel, UL listed "rigid metal conduit." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equivalent CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electro-galvanized steel; UL listed "electrical metallic tubing." a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) Approved equivalent 3. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed one continuous length of electro- galvanized, spirally wound steel strip with interlocking convolutions and interior surfaces free from burrs and sharp edges. Shall be UL listed "flexible metal conduit" or "liquidtight flexible metal conduit" as required. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Republic Conduit 2) Allied Tube and Conduit 3) Wheatland Tube Company 4) American Flexible Conduit Company 4. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit (Schedule 40 for concrete encasement, Schedule 80 for direct burial or where exposed) shall be UL listed "rigid non-metallic conduit" for application in underground, encased, and exposed applications in accordance with Article 352 of the National Electrical Code. The conduit shall be made from polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall be rated for 90ºC conductors. Conduit and fittings shall be tested in accordance with the testing requirements defined in NEMA TC-2, NEMA TC-3, UL-651 and UL-514. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Carlon 2) Heritage Plastics 3) PW Eagle 5. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit, prior to coating shall conform to the specifications for Rigid Metal Conduit, above. The conduit shall have hot dipped galvanized threads, and the threads and the inside of the conduit shall be urethane coated. The exterior of the conduit shall be PVC coated to a minimum thickness of 40 mils. All coated conduit shall conform to NEMA standard RN01. The conduit shall be bendable without damage to the interior or exterior coatings. All fittings and couplings shall be PVC coated to a minimum thickness of 40 mils on the exterior, and the interior and threads shall be urethane coated. All screws shall be stainless steel. The installed conduit system shall provide a continuous grounding path. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Robroy Industries 2) Ocal Incorporated CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3) Perma-Cote 4) Approved equivalent B. Conduit Fittings: 1. Fittings for rigid metal conduit shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2 in. and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2 in. and larger. Connectors shall also have insulated throat up to and including 1 in. size. For sizes 1-1/4 in. and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast, pressure cast fittings shall not be used. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) O.Z. Gedney 2) Steel City 3) Thomas & Betts 4) Crouse-Hinds 5) Carlon 2. Expansion Fittings shall be watertight, combination expansion and deflection type designed to compensate for movement in any direction. Fittings shall have flexible copper braid bonding jumpers, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel bands, use aluminum body fittings for rigid aluminum conduit. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Crouse-Hinds, Type "DX" 2) O.Z./Gedney, Type "DX" 3) Approved equivalent C. Wireway and Wire Trough: 1. Wireway and Wire Trough shall be hinged cover type wireway with provisions for full lay-in along the entire length of run. Wireway shall be steel, enclosed with gray enamel finish. Provide JIC sectional NEMA dust resistant, oil tight type where subjected to moisture, in Pump Rooms, Mechanical, Electric and Fan Rooms, exterior walls, Wood Shop, and Maintenance Shop, and similar locations. Size to meet NEC fill requirements or larger as noted on Contract Documents. Provide knockouts along runs. Recess in wall where required for flush mounted equipment. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports, supports, etc., to meet installation requirements. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Square D "Square Duct" 2) General Electric 3) Hoffman 4) Meco CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 D. Channel Support Systems: 1. Channel Support Systems shall be provided for racking up conduit, trapeze suspensions, cable racks and panel racks. Provide necessary accessories such as bolts, screws, anchors, connection plates, and straps as required to perform the necessary functions. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Unistrut 2) Globe 3) Kindorf 4) B-Line E. Conductors and Cables: 1. Conductors shall be insulated for 600 volts, unless otherwise noted, and shall be standard AWG and kcmil sizes. Conductors shall be 98 percent copper, thermal plastic or cross-linked polymer insulated, heat and moisture resistant. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used for fire alarm system wiring. Conductor sizes No. 18 AWG and smaller shall be a solid single strand; No. 16 AWG and larger shall be multiple stranded. Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except smaller sizes may be used for communications and special systems. Conductor sizes shall be as called for. Conductors shall be labeled with UL seal and be marked with the manufacturer's name, wire size and insulation type. Insulation for all 600 volt conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN or Type XHHW, unless otherwise noted. Luminaire fixture wire shall conform to the latest Underwriters Laboratories requirements. Flexible cords and cables for general portable use shall be Type "SO" or "SJO." Cables for special use shall be of the type specified for the application. a. Color Coding: 1) All circuits shall be color coded according to the following schedule. Three Phase 120/208V Three Phase 277/480V Ground Green Green Neutral White Gray A or L1 Black Brown B or L2 Red Orange C or L3 Blue Yellow CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 b. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) General Cable 2) Prysmian 3) South Wire 4) Okonite 5) Senator F. Terminal Lugs and Connectors: 1. "Split-bolt" Connectors shall be solderless type. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Kearney 3) O.Z./Gedney 4) Thomas and Betts 5) Anderson 2. "TWIST ON" Connectors shall be spiral steel spring type and insulated with vinyl cap and skirt. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) 3-M Company "Scotch-Lock" 2) Ideal "Wing-Nuts" 3) Approved equivalent 3. Ground Connectors shall be exothermic type. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Cadweld 2) Thermoweld 3) Approved equivalent G. Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes and covers shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2-1/2 in. deep, unless restricted by the surroundings, 4 in. square or octagonal, with knockouts. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. Minimum box size shall be as indicated in Article 314 of the National Electrical Code for the conductors and devices installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Steel City CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2) Raco 3) Appleton 4) Crouse Hinds 2. Pull and junction boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of raintight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated in Article 314 of the National Electrical Code for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Keystone 3) Approved equivalent H. Terminal and Equipment Cabinets: 1. Terminal and equipment cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel with removable endwalls. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel, flush or surface type (as indicated) with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges, flush lock, and grey baked enamel finish. Boxes and front shall be UL listed and shall be minimum 35 in. H x 24 in. W x 6 in. D. Provide removable insulated plywood terminal board mounted on inside back wall of cabinet. a. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) Square D "Mono-Flat" 2) Approved equivalent I. Wiring Devices: 1. Wiring Devices (toggle switches, key switches, receptacles, dimmers, occupancy sensors) shall be specification grade as a minimum. Switch handle and receptacle shall be as directed by the Architect. Provide device cover plates of satin finish type 302 stainless steel in finished areas and Yorkville "Invisoplage" for round or octagonal boxes only in unfinished areas. Provide neoprene gasketed PVC box with raintight cover while in use as manufactured by Tay- Mac, Carlon, Intermatic or equal for switches and receptacles designated "WP". a. Although only one manufacturers model number has been noted in each device description, acceptable manufacturers are: 1) Pass and Seymour CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2) Hubbell 3) Arrow Hart 4) Leviton 2. Toggle Switches: a. UL verified to meet latest Federal Specification WS-896, NEMA WD-1 and UL Test 20. b. 20 ampere, 1-pole, 277 volt: P&S 20AC1. c. 20 ampere, 2-pole, 277 volt: P&S 20AC2. d. 20 ampere, 3-way, 277 volt: P&S 20AC3. e. 20 ampere, 4-way, 277 volt: P&S 20AC4. f. 20 ampere, 1-pole, 277 volt: w/neon pilot light: P&S 20AC1-RPL. g. 20 ampere, 2-pole, 277 volt: w/neon pilot light: P&S 20AC2 - RPL. h. 20 ampere, 3-way, 277 volt: w/neon pilot light: P&S 20AC3 - RPL. 3. Key Switches: a. 20 ampere, 1-pole, 277 volt: P&S 20AC1-L. b. 20 ampere, 2-pole, 277 volt: P&S 20AC2-L. c. 20 ampere, 3-way, 277 volt: P&S 20AC3-L. d. 20 ampere, 4-way, 277 volt: P&S 20AC4-L. 4. Pilot Lights: a. 120V, P&S 437 b. 277V, P&S 438 5. Receptacles: a. Back and side wiring options which accept No. 14 to No. 10 AWG solid and stranded conductors. One (1) piece plated steel or brass mounting strap. Bronze contacts. Meet requirements of Federal Specification W- C-596 and UL 496. b. NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex receptacle: P&S 5362, Hubbell HBL5352, Leviton 5362. c. NEMA 6-20R (250V - 20A): 1) Normal use, Hubbell 5461, brown. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 d. NEMA 6-30R (250V - 30A): 1) Normal use, Hubbell 9330, black. e. NEMA 10-30R (125/250V - 30A): 1) Normal utility, Hubbell 9350G, black face. f. NEMA 10-50R (125V/250V - 50A): 1) Normal utility, Hubbell 7962-G, black face. g. NEMA 14-30R (125/250V - 30A): 1) Normal utility, Hubbell 9430, black face. h. NEMA 14-50R (125/250V - 50A): 1) Normal utility, Hubbell 9450, black face. NOTES: 1. Color Coding - Add suffix GRY for hospital service switches (grey handle). 2. Color Coding - Use basic brown color for Medical Center and River Campus switches (brown handle). 3. Keyed switches - add suffix "L". i. NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex G.F.I., 6ma trip receptacle: P&S 2091S. j. NEMA 14-30R, 30 ampere, 125/250 volt, dryer receptacle: P&S 3864. k. NEMA 14-50R, 50 ampere, 125/250 volt, range receptacle: P&S 3894. l. NEMA 5/6-20R, 20 ampere 125/250 volt, duplex, combination: P&S 5890. m. NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex receptacle, melamine construction, yellow color, corrosion resistant: P&S CR6300. n. NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere duplex, 125 volt, orange color, isolated ground: P&S IG6300. o. NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere duplex, 125 volt, metal oxide varistor, surge suppression receptacle: P&S 6362 - SP. p. NEMA 5-20R, 20 ampere, 125 volt duplex, hospital grade: P&S 9300- HG. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 10 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 q. NEMA 5-15R, 15 ampere, 125 volt duplex, tamper resistant: P&S SG- 62. r. NEMA 5-15R, Clock Hanger Outlet - 15 ampere, 125 volt with hanger plate: P&S S3713-I. s. 20 ampere, 125 volt, duplex, weather-proof: Crouse Hinds WLPD-5-20. t. 30 ampere, 600 volt, 3-wire, 2-pole welding receptacle: Crouse Hinds ARE3322 W/APJ3385 plug (surface mount), Crouse Hinds AR332 W/APJ3385 plug (flush mount). u. 30 ampere, 600 volt, 4-wire, 3-pole welding receptacle: Crouse Hinds AREA 3422 W/APJ3485 plug (surface mount), Crouse Hinds AR342 W/APJ3485 plug (flush mount). v. 60 ampere, 600 volt, 3-wire, 2 pole welding receptacle: Crouse Hinds ARE 6323 W/APJ6385 plug (surface mount), Crouse Hinds AR632 W/APJ6385 plug (flush mount). w. 60 ampere, 600 volt, 4-wire, 3-pole, welding receptacle: Crouse Hinds ARE6424 W/APJ 6485 plug (surface mount), Crouse Hinds AR642 W/APJ 6485 (flush mount). J. Waterproofing Seals: 1. Provide expanding link type seal, for installation between duct/conduit, and sleeve or core-drilled hole in concrete. 2. Make: Link Seal, manufactured by Thunderline Corp. K. Flashing, Sealing, Fire-stopping: 1. Fire-Stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: a. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems". The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. b. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where piping, tubing, conduit, electrical busways/cables/wires, ductwork and similar utilities pass through or penetrate fire rated wall or floor assembly. Provide fire- stop seal between sleeve and wall for drywall construction. c. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 11 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 d. The methods used shall incorporate qualities, which permit the easy removal or addition of electrical conduits or cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Dow Corning Fire-Stop System Foams and Sealants b. Nelson Electric Fire-Stop System Putty, CLK and WRP c. S-100 FS500/600, Thomas & Betts d. Carborundum Fyre Putty e. 3-M Fire Products PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise noted, wiring for all systems indicated in the contract documents shall consist of insulated conductors installed in raceways. Raceways shall be continuous from outlet box to outlet box and from outlet box to cabinet, junction or pull box. Secure and bond raceways to all boxes and cabinets so that each system of raceways is electrically continuous throughout. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, install all wiring in the following raceway system: 1. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Dry Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Wiring 600 Volts or Less in Outdoors, Above Grade Locations: Rigid metal conduit. 3. Wiring 600 Volts or Less Installed Below Grade, in Concrete Floor Slabs or Below Ground Floor Slab: Rigid non-metallic conduit encased in concrete with rigid metal conduit bends and penetrations through building floors and walls. 4. All Wiring Installed in Hazardous Locations: Galvanized rigid metal conduit. 5. All Wiring Installed in Corrosive Locations: Schedule 80 rigid non-metallic conduit. PVC coated rigid metal conduit. 6. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connection to all motors, final connection to rotating or vibrating equipment, final connections to dry type transformers and final connections to recessed lighting fixtures. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet or damp locations. Maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 36 in., except that from outlet boxes to lighting fixture maximum length shall be 6 ft. Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metal conduit. 7. Surface metal raceway may be used for surface runs in finished area where concealed conduit cannot be run or where specifically indicated on drawings. Submit detailed description and/or layout for approval prior to roughing. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 12 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Raceways: 1. Sized as indicated on the drawings. Where sizes are not indicated, raceways shall be sized as required by the National Electrical Code in accordance with the quantity, size, and type of the insulation conductors to be installed. Raceways shall be minimum 3/4 in. trade size for branch circuit wiring and minimum 1 in. trade size for all telephone intercommunications, instrumentation, fire alarm, television and computer systems and for all branch circuit "Home Runs" to panelboards. 2. Installed to provide adequate grounding between all outlets and the established electrical system ground. 3. Cut square, free of burrs due to field cutting or manufacture, and bushed where necessary. 4. Installed with exterior surfaces not less than 6 in. from any surface with normal operating temperature of 200°F or higher. 5. Plugged at the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. 6. Concealed throughout except where exposure is permitted by the Owner's Representative. All exposed raceways shall be painted to match existing adjacent surface finish as directed by the Architect. 7. Installed parallel or perpendicular to floors, walls and ceilings where exposed wiring is permitted. 8. Installed with a minimum of bends and offsets. All bends shall be made without kinking or destroying the cross section contour of the raceway. Factory made bends are acceptable and should be considered for raceways larger than 2". 9. Installed with UL approved rain-tight and concrete-tight couplings and connectors. 10. Firmly fastened within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. Raceways shall not be attached to or supported by wooden plug anchors or supported from mechanical work such as ductwork, piping, etc. 11. Installed with a #14 AWG fish wire in all telephone, intercommunication, "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of conductors. 12. Installed with expansion fittings at all building expansion joints such that no undue stress is placed on any electrical raceway due to the proper functioning of expansion joints. 13. Arranged in a neat manner for access and allow for access to work installed by other trades. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 13 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 14. Raceways installed in concrete slabs shall be located so as not to affect structural integrity of slab, and such that conduit shall have a minimum of one inch of concrete cover on all sides. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installing conduit larger than 1 in. trade size in concrete slabs. Raceways in slabs shall be for floor box use only. 15. Raceways installed below ground floor slab shall be encased in concrete with 3 in. minimum coverage on all sides. Where possible, install conduit directly below slab with concrete envelope poured monolithic with slab. Where this is not possible, support raceways and envelop maximum 5 ft. - 0 in. on centers from underside of structural slab by means of galvanized pipe hangers. Pipe hangers shall be coated with asphalt mastic. Installation shall maintain integrity of waterproofing membrane. 16. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. 17. Become familiar with the general construction of the building and place sleeves, inserts, etc., as required. All penetrations through existing floors shall be core drilled and sleeved. 18. Wherever a cluster of four (4) or more raceways rise out of floor exposed, provide neatly formed 6 in. high concrete envelop, with chamfered edges, around raceways. 19. All raceways shall be supported adequately by malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved methods. In exterior or wet locations, supports shall allow not less than 1/4 in. air space between raceway and wall. Firmly fasten raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. The following table lists maximum spacing between conditions, strength of supporting members, etc. 20. Furnish and install such supports at no additional cost to owner. Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet 1/2 in., 3/4 in. Concealed 7 10 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Concealed 8 10 1-1/2 in. and larger Concealed 10 10 1/2 in., 3/4 in. Exposed 5 7 1 in., 1-1/4 in. Exposed 7 8 1-1/2 in. and larger Exposed 10 10 21. Where raceways puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. Coordinate with representative of roofing material manufacturer. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 14 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 22. At each flush mounted panelboard, terminal cabinet, control cabinet, etc., provide four (4) spare 3/4 in. raceways from panelboard, etc., to an area above the nearest accessible ceiling space. Make 90° turn above the ceiling, arranged for further continuation of raceway, and cap. 23. Provide a bushing at each conduit termination unless fitting at box where conduit terminates has hubs designed in such a manner to afford equivalent protection to conductors. Provide grounding type insulated bushings on all conduit sizes 1-1/4 in. trade size and larger, and on all feeder raceways regardless of size. Provide standard bushings for conduits 1 in. and smaller unless otherwise stated. C. Wiring Methods: 1. Conductors shall not be installed until raceway system, including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings, is completed. Verify that all work of other trades which may cause conductor damage is completed. Use only U.L. approved cable lubricants when necessary. Do not use mechanical means to pull conductors No. 8 or smaller. 2. In general, conductors shall be the same size from the last protective device to the load. 3. All wiring systems shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized throughout, following the color-coding specified. Connect branch circuit wiring at panelboards, as required, in order to provide a "balanced" three-phase load on feeders. 4. Provide insulated green ground conductor and white (gray for 277 volt) insulated neutral conductor in each branch circuit. 5. All feeder connections shall be made to bus and other equipment using solderless, pressure type terminal lugs. 6. For splices and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller, use solderless "twist on" connectors having spiral steel spring and insulated with a vinyl cap and skirt. 7. For splices and taps, No. 8 and larger, use solderless "Split Bolt" type connectors or compression fittings. 8. Use cast connections for ground conductors. 9. Make all splices and connections in accessible boxes and cabinets only. 10. Cover uninsulated splices, joints, and free ends of conductor with rubber and friction tape of PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation. Heat shrink sleeves shall be acceptable for crimp type splices. 11. On termination at branch circuit outlets, leave a minimum of 8 in. free conductor for installation of devices and fixtures. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 15 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 12. Feeder conductors shall be continuous from point of origin to load termination without splice. If this is not practical, contact the Owner's Representative and receive written approval for splicing prior to installation of feeder(s). Where feeder conductors pass through junction and pull boxes, bind and lace conductors of each feeder together. For parallel sets of conductors, match lengths of conductors as near equal as possible. 13. Branch circuit conductors installed in panelboards, and control conductors installed in control cabinets and panels shall be neatly bound together using "Ty- Raps" or equivalent. 14. Provide conduit seals and explosion proof devices as indicated on the plans and as dictated by the National Electrical Code for all hazardous locations indicated on the drawings. 15. Lighting fixtures, detectors, etc., in mechanical equipment, boiler and pump rooms shall be installed with exposed wiring after equipment, ductwork, piping, etc., are in place. In general, lighting shall be as located on the drawings; where conflicts exist, locate lights for best distribution. D. Outlet Boxes: 1. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., are placed in position, outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation. Comply with Article 370 of National Electrical Code relative to position of outlet boxes in finished ceilings and walls. 2. Prior to installation, relocate any outlet location a distance of five feet in any direction from location indicated on drawings if so directed by the Owner's Representative. Prior to completion of wall construction, adjust vertical height of any outlet from height indicated if so directed by Owner's Representative. The above modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Where outlets at different mounting heights are indicated on drawings adjacent to each other (due to lack of physical space to show symbol on drawings), install outlets on a common vertical line. 4. Where switch outlets are shown adjacent to strike side of door, locate edge of outlet box approximately 3 in. from door frame. 5. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the approval of the Owner's Representative. 6. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring device(s) to be installed. 7. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled walls shall be installed with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 16 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 8. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed with extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2 in. deep boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. 9. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4 in. square, 1-1/2 in. deep, galvanized sheet metal. 10. Surface wall mounted outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes having threaded or compression type threadless hubs. Exterior boxes shall be cast type with threaded hubs and gasketed cover plates secured by non-ferrous screws. 11. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tile as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet, provide floor outlet with carpet flange. 12. Install a device cover plate over each and every outlet indicated on drawings. Do not install plates until painting, cleaning and finishing of surfaces surrounding the outlet are complete. Install single one-piece multi-gang covers over multi-gang devices. E. Receptacles: 1. Provide 20 ampere 125 volt, duplex receptacles unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Provide hospital grade receptacle for all hospital construction. F. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Access to boxes shall not be blocked by equipment, piping, ducts and the like. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as require by the National Electrical Code. G. Equipment Mounting Heights: Coordinate with architectural interior and exterior elevations. 1. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to device/equipment centerline as follows: a. Toggle switches (up position "on") 46 in. b. Receptacle outlets (long dimension vertical, ground" pole farthest from floor) 18 in. c. Receptacle outlets above counters 8 in. above counters CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 17 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 d. Receptacle outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets above electric baseboard heaters 30 in. e. Receptacle outlets, hazardous areas; also for refrigerators 48 in. f. Receptacle outlets, weatherproof, above- grade 24 in. g. Clock outlets (104 in. AFF or 10 in. below ceiling, whichever is lower) 104 in. h. Telephone outlets 18 in. i. Telephone outlets, wall mounted 46 in. j. T.V. outlet 18 in. k. Fire alarm manual stations 46 in. l. Fire alarm combination audio/visual and standalone visual device (entire strobe lens at heights indicated) 80 in. to bottom of the notification device m. Standalone fire alarm audio device 90 in. (min) to 96 in. (max) n. Distribution panelboards, to top of backbox 72 in. o. Terminal cabinets, control cabinets, to top of backbox 72 in. p. Disconnect switches, motor starters, enclosed circuit breakers. 48 in. 2. Where structural or other interferences prevent compliance with mounting heights listed above, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation. H. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support and erection of motor starters, distribution panelboards, large disconnect switches, large circuit breakers, pendant mounted lighting fixtures, etc. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 18 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2. Panelboards, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, cabinets, large pull boxes, cable support boxes and starters shall be secured to ceiling and floor slab and not supported from conduits. Small panelboards, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduits and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. I. Identification: 1. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on main switchboard, main service disconnects and on all panelboards using designation shown in panelboard schedule. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 2. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates for each circuit breaker in the main distribution panel listing the panelboard or equipment connected to each device. 3. Provide engraved lamicoid identification nameplates on all items of equipment including individual circuit breaker enclosures and disconnect switches, listing the equipment connected to the particular device provided under Specification Section 262000, including, but not limited to: starters, disconnect switches, variable speed drives, circuit breakers, etc. Include voltage, phase, equipment served, voltage source to panel or equipment. 4. Provide complete type written directory for each panelboard listing room number, function, etc, for each circuit breaker. Provide type written updated panelboard directories for existing panelboards affected by this work. 5. Nameplates shall be engraved black, with white core, with Helvetica medium 3/16 in. lettering. 1/8 in. lettering is acceptable where space of 3/16 in. is not available. 6. Identify junction and pullboxes for particular service such as power, lighting, fire alarm, telephone, interphone, public address, nurse call, etc. using stencil lettering on cover. 7. Using dymo tape label all receptacle and switch coverplates, power poles, etc. listing panel designation and circuit number. Dymo tape shall be attached to outside of receptacle or switch coverplates. J. Spare Parts: 1. Deliver to Owner and obtain receipt for spare parts including key switches, fuses, etc. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 01 Ithaca, New York BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 120 Maple Ave BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 01 - 19 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3.2 TESTS A. Branch circuits shall be tested during installation for continuity and identification and shall pass operational tests to determine that all circuits perform the function for which they are designed. For all feeder wiring rated 600 volts or less, provide 1,000 volt "Megger" insulation test prior to energizing feeders. Use a 1,000-volt motor driven megger for all tests. Test voltage shall be applied until readings reach a constant value, and until three (3) equal readings, each one (1) minute apart, are obtained. Minimum megger reading shall be 45 megohms for feeder conductors. Documents test results and submit for approval prior to energizing conductors. END OF SECTION 26 05 01 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CORNELL SECTION 26 05 26 Ithaca, New York GROUNDING 120 Maple Ave GROUNDING 26 05 26 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide grounding system equal to or exceeding the requirements of NEC, latest issue, Article 250 and in the event of a conflict or discrepancy with NEC Article 250, the more stringent requirement shall apply. Raceway system which includes metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, bus ducts, built-up enclosures, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground fault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal nonload current carrying parts of the electrical system. 1.2 QUALITYASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions. etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Conductors: 1. Exposed grounding conductors such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless otherwise called for. 2. Cable size shall be as required by NEC Code, Section 250, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed copper, unless otherwise called for. 3. Provide cable insulation type and color as called for. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Same make as for 600 volt conductors. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 26 Ithaca, New York GROUNDING 120 Maple Ave GROUNDING 26 05 26 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Ground Rods: 1. Provide solid copper or copper clad steel cylindrical rods, 3/4 in. minimum diameter, minimum 10 ft. long. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Copperweld or approved equal C. Connectors, Clamps, Terminals: 1. Provide mechanical connectors and clamps made of silicon bronze. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, NEMA two bolt. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Burndy 2) Anderson 3) T & B 4) Penn-Union 5) Approved equal D. Molded Fusion Welds: 1. Provide fusion welds designed for size and type of cable, rods, structure. Solder prohibited for connections, except for high voltage cable metallic tape shields. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Cadweld 2) Metalweld 3) Thermoweld 4) Approved equal E. Hardware: 1. Provide silicon bronze alloy. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Durium 2) Everdur 3) Approved equal CORNELL SECTION 26 05 26 Ithaca, New York GROUNDING 120 Maple Ave GROUNDING 26 05 26 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Raceway Systems: 1. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, sleeves, brackets, braces, etc. for the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system, the size of the bonding conductor is accordance with NEC Table 250- 122. 2. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type where required by NEC. 3. Conduit which runs to or from all boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-122 connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto. 4. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-122. 5. Where flexible metallic conduit and/or liquid-tight conduit is used, a bonding jumper shall be provided, sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-122. 6. All nonmetallic runs of conduit and/or raceway shall be provided with a system ground conductor sized according to Table 250-122. B. Secondary Electrical Systems: 1. The neutral conductor of low voltage, single and/or polyphase system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected at the transformer neutral bushing, or at the main secondary switchgear to system ground, and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be less than as required by NEC, Table 250-66. 2. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase conductors, to primary side of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to case and secondary neutral bushing, to motors, starters, heating equipment, elevator equipment, panelboards and convenience outlets; insulation shall be same type as phase conductors. 3. Transformer secondary neutral bushings shall be circuited to nearest metallic water pipe, building steel, or ground rod. CORNELL SECTION 26 05 26 Ithaca, New York GROUNDING 120 Maple Ave GROUNDING 26 05 26 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. Equipment grounding conductors, shall extend from the point of termination back to the ground bus of the serving panelboard, switchboard, transformer, or switchgear. 5. The grounding conductors contained in the interstices of interlocked armor cable shall be connected to the ground bus at every equipment termination point and to each other and to system ground; ground at every splice location. 3.2 TESTS A. Grounding: 1. Grounds and grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding following values: a. For grounding non-current carrying metal parts associated with secondary distribution system 25 Ohms 2. Providing grounding tests to verify the above values. Where these values are not met, add additional ground rods or connections in order to meet these values. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 26 20 00 - ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide a complete distribution system as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship, that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc., correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. Where "or equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electrical Code), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), state codes, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA, UL and IEEE Standards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following equipment, materials, products, etc.: 1. Dry type transformer(s) including shielded and linear load transformer(s). 2. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards. 3. Over-Current Device Information. 4. Enclosed circuit breakers. 5. Motor starters, contactors and relays. 6. Disconnect switches. 7. Motor control centers. 8. Adjustable Speed Drives. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 9. Submit settings and adjustments for Starters as recommended by starter and motor manufacturers, as follows: a. Where reduced voltage autotransformer type starters are called for, submit Autotransformer voltage tap settings and start-run time delay relay. b. Where "part winding" or "wye start, delta run," starters are called for, submit START-RUN time delay relay setting. c. Where special features are called for, submit voltage taps and settings, resistor adjustments, time delay relay settings. d. Where time delay relays are called for to achieve staggered restarts upon restoration of failed electric power, submit time delay relay settings. 10. Submit documentation of all grounding tests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Dry-Type Transformers: 1. Transformers to be self-cooled ventilated dry type. Transformers that require internal or external fan assisted forced air cooling to obtain ambient air (AA) rated kVA are not acceptable. Transformers 15 kVA and less shall have 185°C insulation system and shall be designed not-to-exceed 115°C rise above 40°C ambient. Transformers 30 kVA and higher shall have 220°C insulation system and shall be designed not-to-exceed 150°C rise above 40°C ambient. Insulation systems shall be U.L. listed. Cores shall be manufactured from a high-grade, non-aging, silicon steel with high magnetic permeabilities, low hysteresis and eddy current losses, and shall be clamped with structural angles and bolted to the enclosure to prevent damage during shipment or rough handling. Remove clamping after installation. Coils shall be copper, vacuum impregnated with non- hydroscopic thermosetting varnish and shall have a final wrap of electrical insulating material designed to prevent injury to the magnet wire. Transformers having coils with magnet wire visible will not be acceptable. 30 KVA, and larger, floor mounted. Under 30 KVA, wall mounted. Provide Mason type ND, Korfund or Vibrex vibration isolation devices for each transformer. 2. Ratings: Shall be as indicated on the "Transformer Schedule" or as noted on the drawings. IEEE #462 and NEMA #TP-1 Standards shall apply. The transformer efficiencies shall meet or exceed the requirements of the Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State. 3. For transformers up to 300 kVA, provide with 6-2-1/2% full capacity taps, 2- FCAN (for connections above nameplate) and 4-FCBN (for connections below nameplate). For transformers above 300 kVA, provide 4-2-1/2% fully rated taps, 2-FCAN and 2-FCBN. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square D (Sorgel) b. Eaton Corporation c. General Electric d. Acme e. Heavy-Duty f. Howard B. Distribution Panelboards (Nominal 600 Volt): 1. Provide distribution panelboards as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" and as located on the drawings. Panelboards shall be equipped with quick make/quick break thermal magnetic, molded case circuit breakers as scheduled. 2. Panelboard bussing and lugs shall be copper. Provide grounding bus in each panelboard, securely bonded to the box. Panelboard bus structure, main lugs, and main breaker shall have current ratings as indicated. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50°C rise above ambient. 3. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. Large permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. 4. Each panelboard, as a complete unit shall have a short circuit rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the Panelboard Schedule. All panelboards shall be fully rated. "Series Ratings" are NOT acceptable. The use of series rating of panelboards for short circuit rating is not acceptable. 5. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets shall be equipped with locks and all locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full-finished steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish. 6. The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Panelboard front shall be door in door construction with full length piano-hinge. Main lugs or main breakers shall be barriered on five (5) sides. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. 7. Panelboards shall be UL listed for use intended. 8. Ratings shall be as indicated in the contract documents. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 9. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square D "I-Line" - Design Make. b. Eaton Corporation "PRL3". c. General Electric "CCB". d. Siemens. C. Branch Circuit Panelboards (480Y/277 volt, 208Y/120 volt): 1. Provide branch circuit panelboard as indicated in the "Panelboard Schedule" and as located on the drawings. Panelboards shall be equipped with quick make/quick break thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers as scheduled. 2. Panelboard bussing and lugs shall be copper. Provide grounding bus in each panelboard, securely bonded to the box. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as indicated. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. 3. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition of connectors or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to the panelboard. Bus connections shall be bolt-on. 4. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the rating shown on the Panelboard Schedule or on the plans. All panelboards shall be fully rated. "Series Ratings" are NOT acceptable. Reducing breaker ratings on the basis of series rating is not acceptable. 5. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be specified in UL Standard 50 cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, stainless steel, cylinder type lock with catch and spring-loaded door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full-finished steel with rust inhibiting iron phosphate sealer and baked enamel finish. Minimum box width shall be 20 in. Provide door-in-door construction. Provide corbin locks keyed to match the Owner's existing system. 6. Ratings shall be as indicted on the Panelboard Schedule. 7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. 480Y/277 Volt: 1) Square D "NF" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL2". 3) General Electric "AE". CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4) Siemens. b. 208Y/120 Volt: 1) Square D "NQOD" - Design Make. 2) Eaton Corporation "PRL1". 3) General Electric "AQ". 4) Siemens. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers below 400 amp frame shall be molded case with inverse time and instantaneous tripping functions, unless indicated otherwise in contract documents. 2. Circuit breakers 400 amp frame and above shall be 100% rated and equipped with adjustable solid state trip units with ground fault, short time, short time delay, long time, long time delay, front adjustable, programmable with handheld unit and instantaneous trip functions as indicated. 3. Branch circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic and trip indicating, and multipole breakers shall have common trip. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V ac or 277 V ac and carry the SWD marking. 4. Ground-Fault circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal- magnetic, 5 milliampere ground fault sensing and trip indicating, and multipole breakers shall have common trip. 5. Arc-Fault circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, and trip indicating, and multipole breakers shall have common trip. a. Sensor shall recognize the unique current or voltage signatures associated with arcing faults and efficiently interrupts the circuit to reduce fire hazards. b. Sensor shall detect persistent low current arcing faults down to 5 amps with associated mitigation of fire hazards in the cords connected to the outlets. 6. Ratings shall be as indicated in the Contract Documents. 7. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square D Micrologic trip unit - Design Make. b. Eaton Corporation Optim 550 trip units for circuit breakers 400 - 1600 amp frame or RMS 610 trip units for 2000 amp frame to 6000 amp frame. c. General Electric Spectra RMS or MicroVersa trip unit. d. Siemens Sentron Sensitrip III trip unit. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 8. Enclosed circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal-magnetic type, ratings as noted, with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism, quick make/quick break action and positive handle indication. Multiple pole breakers shall be common trip type. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pose. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40°C and shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Breakers shall have removable lugs, UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be installed in NEMA 1 general purpose, surface enclosures, unless otherwise noted. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1) Square D 2) Cutler Hammer 3) General Electric 4) Siemens E. Motor Starters: 1. Provide motor starters, disconnect switches, etc. as listed on the Electric Equipment and Control Schedule on the drawings. 2. Starters, contactors and controllers shall comply with NEMA standards having general purpose NEMA 1 or 1B enclosure unless otherwise called for. Provide explosion proof, weather resistant or watertight construction as required. Starters shall be minimum NEMA size 0 with overloads in each phase sized per NEC, motor full load amperage, service factor, and motor operating conditions. 3. Pad lock arrangements shall be provided to lock the disconnect device in the "off" position. Magnetic starters shall be provided with a control power transformer with 120V secondary and primary and secondary fusing and be sized to accept the loads imposed there on. Starters shall have LED type pilot lights. Each starter subject to electrical interlock and/or automatic control shall have necessary auxiliary contacts. 4. Auxiliary Devices: Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights, devices, relays, transformers, selector switches, electric thermostats, auxiliary starter contacts as required for functions called for. Provide separate relay for each speed to operate electric dampers or other devices as required for multispeed motor circuit. 5. Manual Motor Starter: a. Provide all starters with thermal overload(s); and pilot light(s) and handle lock-out provisions. Gang starter with selector switch for multispeed applications. Provide single or 2-pole as required: 1) 120 volt, single-pole, surface mounted: Square-D FG-5P and handle guard. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2) 120 volt, single-pole, flush mounted: Square-D FS-1P and handle guard. 3) 240 volt, two-pole, surface mounted: Square-D FG-6P and handle guard. 4) 240 volt, two-pole, flush mounted: Square-D FS-2P and handle guard. 5) 120 volt, single-pole, two speed, surface mounted: Square-D FG-11P and handle guards. 6) 120 volt, single-pole, two speed, flush mounted: Square-D FF- 11P and handle guards. 7) 240 volt, two-pole, two-speed, surface mounted: Square-D FG- 22P and handle guards. 8) 240 volt, two-pole, two-speed, flush mounted: Square-D FF-22P and handle guards. 9) 120 volt, single-pole, H-O-A selector, surface mounted: Square- D FG-71P and handle guard. 10) 120 volt, single-pole, H-O-A selector, flush mounted: Square-D FS-71P and handle guard. 11) 240 volt, two-pole, H-O-A selector, surface mounted: Square-D FG-72P and handle guard. 12) 240 volt, two-pole, H-O-A selector, flush mounted: Square-D FS-72P and handle guard. 13) 120 volt, single-pole, surface mounted, explosion proof: Square- D FR-1. 14) 240 volt, two-pole, surface mounted, explosion proof: Square-D FR-2. 6. Manual Motor Starter - Speed Controller: Shall be similar to "Manual Motor Starter", above, except two-gang with motor speed control sized to handle motor indicated, with positive full on and full off bypass of speed control unit. 7. Manual Starter with Relay: Shall be similar to "Manual Motor Starter", above, except to include a two-gang box with relay sized for load indicated, and hand- off-automatic switch. Connect relay for 120V operation on load side of starter in "automatic" mode. Coordinate connection of Form C maintained contact for control with Mechanical Contractor. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 8. Combination Magnetic Starter: Shall be similar to "Magnetic Starter", above, except shall include fusible disconnect switch connected ahead of starter. The disconnect handle shall be in control of the disconnect device with the door open or closed. Disconnect handle shall be clearly marked as to whether the disconnect device is "on" or "off". 9. Combination Two-Speed Magnetic Starter: Shall be similar to "Combination Magnetic Starter", above, except with two starters, and six thermal overload units coordinated to match torque and horsepower characteristics of the motor. Starter shall be designed for variable torque operation, and shall be provided with high- low-off-auto selector switch and high and low pilot lights mounted in the cover. Wire for maintained contact unless otherwise noted. 10. Combination Reduced Voltage Magnetic Starter: Shall be similar to "Combination Magnetic Starter", above, except autotransformer closed transition reduced voltage type with autotransformer protection by winding over- temperature device. 11. Packaged Control Unit: Shall be furnished and mounted by others, and installed and connected by Electrical Contractor. Generally consists of one or more starters, disconnect switches and additional control devices prewired. 12. Contactor: Shall be similar to "Magnetic Starter", above, except without thermal overload units. 13. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with contract documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square-D - Design Make. b. Cutler Hammer. c. General Electric. d. Allen-Bradley. e. Siemens. F. Disconnect Switches: 1. Shall be heavy-duty type three-pole, with "Quick Make/Quick Break" operating handle mechanically interlocked with the cover, horsepower and voltage rated to match equipment served. Where indicated switches shall be provided with dual- element, time delay, rejection type fuses. Switches shall be installed in NEMA 1, General Purpose Surface Enclosures, unless otherwise noted. Provide provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Provide neutral bar in single phase or three phase, four wire circuits, and ground bar in all switches. Provide auxiliary contacts where called for. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Square-D- Design Make. b. Cutler Hammer. c. General Electric. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 d. Siemens. G. Adjustable Speed Drive (ASD) with Drive Bypass: 1. The ASD shall be 5 HP minimum size, UL Listed, NEMA standard frame size for horsepower rating indicated including 115% motor service factor. Short circuit rating shall be 42kA minimum. Integral solid state programmable overload relay with selectable time class (10, 20 or 30) shall be provided. 2. Units shall be wall or floor mounted as suitable for the intended location. Units shall be an integral component of a motor control center where indicated. Units shall be in NEMA 1 enclosure. 3. The unit shall be provided with a 120V control power transformer. The control power transformer shall be provided with primary and secondary fusing. 4. Cooling fans shall have removable washable filter. 5. Unit shall be of six (6) pulse design with separate common mode choke on the input and output of the drive, if not already built in the unit to minimize total harmonic distortion. Provide with 5% input line reactor. 6. The allowable conductor length between the unit and the controlled motor shall be 100 feet. Ambient temperature range shall be 0 to 40ºC with a 3300' altitude. 7. Provide a dv/dt filter to minimize voltage doubling at the motor terminals caused by excessively long motor conductors from the ASD. The dv/dt filter shall be installed at the ASD unit, preferably in the same enclosure as the ASD. The dv/dt filter shall be factory installed in the ASD. 8. Door mounted selector switch for Auto-Manual control. In the auto mode, the start command and speed control shall be provided from a remote source. In the manual mode, the start-stop and speed control shall be provided through the door mounted controls. Provide extra contact blocks on the selector switch for monitoring of switch position. 9. Door mounted pushbuttons for start-stop control. Stop pushbuttons shall always be active. Door mounted LED type pilot lights for indication of On (Red) and Off (Green). Door mounted human interface module for programming, display and speed control. 10. Programming shall include: a. One isolated, configurable analog input. b. Two isolated, configurable analog outputs. c. Alarm digital input for automatic shutdown, field configurable for ramped deceleration, full stop and manual/auto reset. Digital input to force unit to a preprogrammed speed for smoke control or other need. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 10 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 d. Four field programmable digital outputs. 11. Field selectable isolated process control interface to enable the ASD to follow 0- 5 mA, 1-5 mA, 4-20 mA, 10-50 mA, 0-8 VDC, 1-4 VDC, or 0-10 VDC grounded or ungrounded signal from a process controller. Provide RS232 or RS485 communication module board. 12. Network connection shall be suitable for unit on/off and speed control. Communication to the building control system shall include actual motor speed verification, amperage, voltage, kW, and kWh. All unit programming functions shall be accessible through network communication. Communication shall be selectable for BACnet, Metasys, Modbus, Lonworks, Profibus and the project building control system. 13. Isolation Disconnect Switch: Provide isolation disconnect switch integral to unit with a provision for padlocking in the "Off" position. 14. Harmonic Analysis: a. A harmonic analysis shall be undertaken before and after the installation of the equipment, by the successful bidder, which shall include current waveform analysis at the source, which feeds the respective ASD's. A report shall be submitted with the shop drawings to show current waveform, Crest Factor, Form Factor, and % THD for both odd and even current harmonics calculated to the 49th Harmonic. b. The successful bidder shall perform actual field measurements of the system harmonics once the ASD equipment is installed and functioning. The report shall be submitted to the engineers for review before final acceptance. Minimum values required are: 1) 1.5 Crest Factor. 2) Form Factor. 3) Current distortion limits shall not exceed the limits of IEEE 519- 1992, Table 10-3 for the Isc/Iload ratio for the power distribution system. 4) Graphic Display of current harmonics as a percentage of the fundamental current to at least the 15th harmonic. 5) Voltage THD: a) If the voltage THD exceeds 5%, the ASD manufacturer is to recommend the additional equipment required to reduce the THD to an acceptable level. 15. Design Make: ABB ACH. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 11 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 H. Fuses: 1. All fuses rated 600 volts and below shall be rejection type dual-element, time- delay type. Provide two (2) complete sets of fuses for all fusible disconnect switches. Deliver spare fuses to the Owner and obtain receipt. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Fuses 600 Amperes and Below: Bussman Type FRS-R (600 volts), Bussman Type FRN-R (300 volts) or equivalent. b. Fuses Rated Above 600 Amperes: Bussman Type KRP-C or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be grounded per the NEC. B. Electrical distribution equipment shall have lugs/terminations suitable for the indicated conductor size. Where conductors have been oversized for voltage drop and where approved by the Engineer it shall be allowed to reduce the conductor size using hydraulically crimpled splice in a box next to the distribution equipment to allow for standard lug termination. C. Install dry-type transformers with adequate clearances for proper ventilation. Bolt floor mounted transformer to floor utilizing vibration isolators. D. Distribution switchboards, motor control centers and floor mounted dry-type transformers shall be mounted on 4 in. high concrete pads which shall extend 3 in. on all sides. Securely bolt the unit to the pads for proper horizontal and vertical alignment. E. Coordinate transformer pad dimensions with transformer manufacturer's requirements. Coordinate transformer pad locations, dimensions and details with General Contractor. F. Motor Starters: 1. Coordinate overload and fuse sizes with Division 23 Contractor. 2. Coordinate termination of control wiring with Division 23 Contractor. G. Adjustable Speed Drives: 1. Set in place controllers on 4 in. high concrete base, on wall or freestanding steel frame as required. Completely erect and assemble, including shipping splits and make respective connections from terminal or terminal strips to any miscellaneous control devices. 2. Provide respective line side power supply connections to load side power terminals. Adjust unit controls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. CORNELL SECTION 26 20 00 Ithaca, New York ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 120 Maple Ave ELECTRIC DISTRIBUTION 26 20 00 - 12 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Adjust unit controls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. A factory-trained manufacturer's service representative shall provide complete start-up services at the site during construction plus a separate (after startup on a 100% correctly operating drive) 4 hour training session for the Owner. Coordinate start-up and controls with Division 23 Contractor. 5. Equipment manufacturer to provide a one (1) year full parts and labor warranty from date of start-up and Owner acceptance. H. Identification: 1. Identify all items of equipment as described in Section 260501 -3.1, Identification. 3.2 ELECTRICAL LOAD TEST A. Conduct a load test prior to request for final payment and comply with the following: 1. Energize maximum normal light and power load for a period of two hours when scheduled. 2. Record voltage at service and at each panel. 3. Measure current in each phase of all feeders. 4. Adjust transformer taps as directed by engineer after review of report. 5. Provide and install all necessary metering equipment. 6. Owner's Representative or Site Representative shall witness the test. 7. Before final acceptance specified test shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative who shall be sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who may direct the performance of such additional tests as deemed necessary in order to determine the acceptability of the systems, equipment, material and workmanship. Additional tests required by the Owner's Representative shall be provided at no additional cost. Protective equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly demonstrated their workability and operation. 3.3 SPARE PARTS A. Deliver loose equipment to the Owner and obtain receipt for fuses, keys to panelboards, etc. END OF SECTION 26 20 00 CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 1 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 SECTION 28 3102 - POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services to perform operations required for the complete installation of an addressable fire alarm system and related Work as required in the Contract Documents. B. Connect all new fire alarm devices into existing FCI7200 Fire Alarm Control Panel. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All methods of construction, details of workmanship that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents, shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated in their respective sections of the specifications. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Equipment types, device ratings, dimensions, etc. correspond to the nomenclature dictated by those manufacturers. All equipment shall be tested at the factory. Unless specified elsewhere, standard factory inspection and operational tests will be acceptable. B. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA-70 (National Electric Code), NFPA-72 (National Fire Alarm Code), National Electric Safety Code (NESC), state code SUCF Directive 26-3, local codes, and requirements of authority having jurisdiction. Work involving the installation and testing of fire alarm system components shall be performed by firms currently licensed by the New York State Department of State Division of Licensing Services. Supervising personnel shall be NICET Level II Certified. C. Equipment shall be designed, manufactured, assembled, and tested in accordance with the latest revisions of applicable published ANSI, NEMA and IEEE Standards. D. Each item of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer and shall bear the UL Label. E. The system provider must: 1. Provide equipment from manufacturers for which they maintain a contract, distributorship, are an agent, or other formal arrangement for which documentation can be produced showing authority to sell and service the equipment in this territory. 2. Demonstrate that they have successfully installed these systems, utilizing their standard products, for a period of five (5) years. 3. Maintain a service organization to provide both normal and emergency service. Emergency service must be available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year and staff must be adequate to respond within 2 hours of an emergency call. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 2 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 4. Maintain adequate spare parts inventory to provide both normal and emergency service. 5. Employ service technicians who are trained in accordance with the systems manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Own and demonstrate proficiency in the use of the required test equipment, tools, etc. for the proper installation, set-up, testing and maintenance of the system. If requested, must provide a listing of tools and/or equipment and where appropriate, certifications in the proper training and use of the tools and/or equipment a. Provide all system programming to deliver a customized system to the Owner ready for use. b. All system programming is to be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. If after preliminary use of the system, and/or training, the increased understanding of the system's features and capabilities necessitates reprogramming to any extent, it is to be performed at no additional cost. 7. Any system being extended or connected to an existing system shall be tested for full functionality prior to beginning work. System shall be signed off by Owner/Engineer as fully functional. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any initiating device (manual station, automatic detector, sensor, or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows: 1. All audible alarm notification appliances within corresponding building shall sound a fire alarm signal until the System Acknowledge Key or the Signal Silence Key is depressed. 2. All visual alarm notification appliances shall flash continuously until the System Reset Key or the Signal Silence Key is depressed. 3. The off-site central monitoring station shall be notified automatically until the System Acknowledge Key or the Signal Silence Key is depressed. The municipal box shall be activated notifying the fire department 4. Shutdown of the corresponding HVAC system equipment shall occur until the System Acknowledge Key or the Signal Silence Key is depressed. 5. Activation of all programmed outputs assigned to the initiating device shall occur until the System Acknowledge Key or the Signal Silence Key is depressed. 6. The alarm shall be displayed on the local Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and the remote annunciator. A printout shall be produced at the FACP. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 3 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 7. The system alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and the remote annunciator until the alarm has been acknowledged. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the control panel and remote annunciator. The LCD display shall show the new alarm information. 8. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the local building control panel and, where applicable, the remote annunciator until the event has been acknowledged. B. Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate the alarm notification appliances. C. The activation of any system smoke detector or sensor shall initiate an alarm verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within a preset time after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within the prescribed time, the system shall resume normal operation. The alarm verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by transponders. D. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the alarm notification appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should an actual alarm occur, all alarm functions would occur as described previously. E. The system shall have a single key that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions including the time of each occurrence. F. The actuation of the "enable walk test" program at the control panel shall activate the "Walk Test" mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur: 1. The off-site central monitoring station connection shall be bypassed. 2. Control relay functions shall be bypassed. 3. Walk test shall be selectable by circuit. Alarms received on normal circuits shall cause the control panel to go into alarm and override the walk test mode. 4. The control panel shall show a trouble condition. 5. The alarm activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible signals to activate for two seconds. 6. The panel shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. 7. The control panel shall automatically return to normal condition if there is no activity on a walk test circuit for a period of 30 minutes. G. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause an audible signal to sound at the Fire Alarm Control Panel and, where applicable, the remote annunciator for four seconds indicating a trouble condition. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 4 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 H. Detection Devices located in elevator lobbies, elevator hoistways and elevator machine rooms which are used for elevator recall shall be connected to the building fire alarm system and shall operate in accordance with ASME A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, Sections 2.27.3.3.2.3 - 2.7.3.2.6. I. Provide all suitable wiring and programming of the FACP for addressable fire alarm system initiating smoke and heat detectors located in the elevator, lobbies, elevation hoistway, and elevator mechanic room such that: 1. Activation of the elevator lobby smoke detector shall trigger an elevator recall signal from the FACP for the elevator to return to the first floor. 2. Activation of the elevator first floor lobby smoke detector, the elevator machine room smoke detector, or the hoistway heat detector, at the bottom of the hoistway, shall trigger an elevator recall signal from the FACP for the elevator to return to the second floor. 3. No fire alarm devices except those previously described, will trigger the described actions. In addition, all the previously described devices shall trigger a building alarm from the FACP. 4. Activation of the smoke or heat detector in the elevator machine room or the heat detector in the hoistway shall trigger a signal from the FACP to flash the firemen's hat in the elevator cab per ASME A17.1. J. Activation of a smoke detector associated with a fire barrier shall initiate the functions described above for other area -type smoke detectors. Also, provide connections between the auxiliary contacts on the smoke detectors and the associated fire barriers such that the fire barriers will be operated upon its respective smoke detector activation. Provide 24 VDC power supplies wiring and accessories for fire alarm system and all supervisory functions required for proper fire barriers operation. K. Provide wiring and equipment such that activation of the heat detectors located in the elevator machine room shall cause 24 VDC from the fire alarm control panel to be applied to the shunt trip coil of the elevator's supply circuit breaker. No fire alarm devices except the heat detectors in the elevator machine rooms will cause the above described actions. Also, activation of these heat detectors shall initiate the functions described above for alarm initiating devices. Provide a Form C contact at the elevator controllers, which shall be normally closed and shall open upon activation of any of these heat detectors; this contact will be used to disconnect the battery-powered emergency return unit if so equipped. Also provide an auxiliary contact on the main line disconnect switch and two (2) #12 in 1/2" C to the elevator controller from this contact for the same purpose. L. Provide a Form C contact at the building's energy management system panel. This contact will activate upon activation of any fire alarm initiating device. This contact will also be controlled by the "drill-fan shutdown - bypass" switch in the ventilation fan shutdown control. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 5 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 1.4 SUPERVISION A. The system shall contain Class B (NFPA Style B) independently supervised initiation device circuits. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. B. Notification appliance circuits shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Z). C. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audible and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. D. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. E. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. All items of equipment and accessories specified under this section. B. Include: 1. Contractor shall submit copies of the installation firms license for approval and post a copy of license on the premises where the work is being performed. a. Work involving installation of Fire Alarm system components shall be performed by firms currently licensed by the NYS department of State Division of Licensing Services. The supervising personnel shall be NICET level 2 certified. 2. Complete equipment list including quantities. 3. Catalog descriptive literature for all equipment. 4. Riser Wiring Diagram showing all devices, wire quantities and sizes. 5. Typical Terminal Wiring Diagram for each type of device. 6. Terminal wiring Diagram for all Fire Alarm equipment. 7. Calculations, including actual equipment loads used to derive battery back-up ampere-hour rating. 8. Complete console enclosure and equipment configuration. 9. Test reports as called for. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 6 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 10. Copies of the fire alarm installation firm's current license. The Contractor shall also post a copy of the license on the premises where work is being performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM TRANSPONDER A. The system shall be totally solid state, be microprocessor based, use digital transmission and shall be field programmable. B. The system shall be modular in design to allow for future expansion with a minimum of hardware additions. C. The transponder shall be located where shown on the drawings. Enclosures shall accept all system items for an aesthetically suitable operator’s console. Enclosures shall be of modular size to allow surface mounting of multiple boxes adjacent to each other, shall have solid metal doors and contain a lock with a key common to all system devices. D. The transponder shall be provided to control operator input/output date transmissions to and from the remote transponders through dual data lines and to perform all software functions as specified hereafter. Data lines shall be standard #18 AWG twisted shielded pair. In normal operation, each line shall be used alternately on intervals to maintain line integrity. Should either data line fail, system shall automatically revert to alternate data line and data line trouble shall be reported to operator. The transponder shall automatically “re-boot” after data line is restored. E. Conditions of the system shall be indicated at the operator interface by LED’s. These conditions shall be alarm, supervisory, trouble and alarm silenced. A LCD shall also be included, which shall consist of a 2 line, 40 character per line display. It shall display “SYSTEM IS NORMAL” with the date and time under normal circumstances. The LCD display shall also indicate type of alarm, point status, number of alarms and location. Through the use of function keys, historical data can also be displayed. F. The transponder shall include a password protected key pad for access to programming and special functions. G. Any event initiated by the transponder due to an alarm input shall be retained in nonvolatile EPROM memory. The transponder shall also have sufficient RAM memory for user programmability as described in this specification section. H. The system shall be totally solid state, be microprocessor based, use digital transmission and shall be field programmable. I. The system shall be modular in design to allow for future expansion with a minimum of hardware additions. J. Design Make: Existing FCI 7200. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 7 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.2 REMOTE PROCESSING UNIT TRANSPONDER (RPU) A. The RPU shall function as a communications interface between the FACP and the point addressable devices, and shall be remote mounted as indicated on the Contract Documents. In the event of failure of the FACP or the RPU processor, the RPU shall continue to function as a single zone or multiple zone supervised local Fire Alarm Control Panel. B. RPU's shall contain their own processors and memory and function independently of the FACP. C. Provide a power supply located in the same cabinet. Provide 24 VDC power for driving audio-visual devices and performing auxiliary functions. The power supply shall include an integral battery charger and monitoring circuits capable of direct connection to the RPU to identify loss of normal AC power and power supply trouble. Sealed lead acid batteries shall be provided and rated to provide sufficient capacity to power the total connected load for a minimum of four hours standby power and ten minutes of audible signals. D. The RPU shall be capable of connecting addressable devices that are uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device. Wiring shall be shielded #18 AWG twisted pair utilized to minimize the effects of transients, EMI, RFI, and other interference. The system must allow up to 2,500 feet wire length to the furthest addressable device. To minimize wiring routing and to facilitate further additions, T-tapping of the communications channel or multiple loop channels shall be supported. E. Enclosures shall be of modular size to allow surface mounting of multiple boxes adjacent to each other, shall have solid metal doors and contain a lock with a key common to all system devices. F. Make: match existing FCI 7200 FACP. 2.3 VENTILATION FAN SHUTDOWN CONTROL A. Complete control package shall be mounted at the Fire Alarm Central Processing Unit location. B. Provide supervised normally closed relays and contactors for connection into the fan motor control circuits ahead of all automatic devices. C. Sequence fan shutdown for every air distribution system over 1000 cfm D. Provide duct detectors in air return systems over 2000 cfm, and in both supply and return systems over 15,000 cfm. E. Provide drill bypass feature, locate switch on Fire Alarm Control Panel and label "DRILL-FAN SHUTDOWN BYPASS". Buzzer shall sound continuously while in bypass mode. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 8 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 F. Provide fan reset feature, locate switch on Fire Alarm Control Panel and label "FAN RESET". 2.4 INTELLIGENT PERIPHERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide intelligent analog smoke and thermal sensors as shown. All intelligent sensors, single I/O modules and multizone I/O boards shall communicate with the RPU over (2) wires (twisted pair). The address shall be dialed in at the sensor by the installer using the rotary switches located in the sensor head or module. Peripherals shall be by same manufacturer as the FACP and RPU. 2.5 INTELLIGENT PHOTO-OBSCURATION SMOKE DETECTOR (SENSOR) A. The Intelligent Photo-obscuration Sensor shall operate on the photo electronic principle and connect with two wires (twisted pair) to the RPU. B. The sensor shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The sensor shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). C. The sensor shall provide advance indication of the analog value of the products of combustion to the control panel indicating that maintenance is required in order to insure normal operation. The sensor sensitivity shall be adjustable per device (within UL limits). D. Sensors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide back box suitable for surface mounting where required. E. The sensor base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector to the base with a concealed socket headscrew to prevent unauthorized tampering. F. Smoke sensors shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. G. All smoke sensors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such Work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. H. Provide wire guard where shown on the Drawings. I. Provide auxiliary relay and separate 24 VDC power to relay for elevator control or smoke hatch control where indicated. 2.6 INTELLIGENT IONIZATION SMOKE DETECTOR (SENSOR) A. The Intelligent Ionization Sensor shall operate on the "ionization" principle and shall connect with two wires (twisted pair) to the RPU. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 9 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. The sensor shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The sensor shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). C. The sensor shall provide advance indication of the analog value of the products of combustion to the control panel indicating that maintenance is required in order to insure normal operation. The sensor sensitivity shall be adjustable per device (within UL limits). D. Sensors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide back box suitable for surface mounting where required. E. The sensor base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector to the base with a concealed socket headscrew to prevent unauthorized tampering. F. Smoke sensors shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. G. All smoke sensors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such Work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. H. Provide wire guard where shown on the Drawings. I. Provide auxiliary relay and separate 24 VDC power to relay for elevator control where indicated. 2.7 INTELLIGENT THERMAL SENSOR A. The Intelligent Analog Thermal Sensor shall connect with (2) wire (twisted pair) to the RPU. B. The sensor shall incorporate a built in type identification so the system can identify the type of sensor. The sensor shall be continually monitored to measure any change in their sensitivity because of the environment (dirt, smoke, temperature, humidity, etc.). C. The sensor shall use dual solid state thermistors and shall monitor the ambient temperature from -10 degrees C, to +60 degrees C and provide a fast response to rapid increase in temperature. The sensor on command from the control panel, shall send data to the panel representing the analog value of the ambient temperature. D. Detectors shall be designed for twistlock mounting to a separate base assembly. Provide back box suitable for surface mounting where required. E. The detector base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector in the base with a concealed socket headscrew to prevent unauthorized tampering. F. Smoke detectors shall be UL 268 listed and FM approved. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 10 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 G. All thermal sensors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. H. Provide wire guard where shown on the Drawings. 2.8 INTELLIGENT MONITOR MODULE A. The Intelligent Monitor Module shall be used to connect supervised conventional initiating device or zone of supervised conventional initiating devices (water flow switches, tamper switches, manual pull stations, (4) wire smoke detectors, conventional (4) wire duct detectors, fire pump alarms, dry chemical fire extinguisher control panels (DCFECP's), etc.) to one of the (2) wire intelligent analog loop RPU's. B. The sensor shall mount in a 4 inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep electrical box and shall be capable of Class "A" or "B" supervised wiring to the initiating device. In order to maintain proper supervision, there shall be no T-taps allowed on Class "A" lines. C. The manual station monitor module (Class "B" only) shall mount behind the Manual Station in a single gang electrical box. D. The Monitor module shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal switches and also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. E. The Monitor Module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled. 2.9 INTELLIGENT CONTROL MODULE A. The Intelligent Control Module shall be used to connect and supervise conventional indicating device or zone of indicating devices that require an external power supply, such as horns, strobes, to one of the (2) wire intelligent analog loop RPU's. B. The Control Module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C), to control Door Holders, Smoke Hatches, Fire Barriers, Air Handling units, etc. The module shall mount in a 4 inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep electrical box and shall be capable of Class "A" or "B" supervised wiring to the indicating or control device. C. The Control Module shall contain an integral LED that shall flash each time the module is polled. D. The Control Module shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal switches and also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. 2.10 MANUAL STATIONS A. Semi -flush noncoded type. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 11 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 B. Break glass, "pull-down" type, double action. C. Indoor construction. D. Bright red finish. E. Key lock for test and reset. F. Provide tamperproof clear lexan protective shield with horn and batteries to produce 85db minimum sound pressure level at 10 feet when shield is raised. Shield shall have activation/deactivation switch with lockout screw, and 400 lb. breaking strength retaining cable. G. Unless directly connected to a central station alarm service, municipal alarm system or local manned fire alarm dispatch station, a clearly legible sign shall be posted above each manual station stating: "LOCAL ALARM ONLY - NOT CONNECTED TO FIRE DEPARTMENT - CALL FIRE DEPARTMENT BY TELEPHONE." H. Provide intelligent monitor module. 2.11 DUCT-TYPE SMOKE DETECTOR A. Detectors shall operate on the "ionization" principle that shall be activated by the presence of combustion products. B. The detector head shall be a plug-in unit containing two ionization chambers, amplifier switching circuit and indicator lamp. The unit shall contain no moving parts. One chamber shall be for fire detection and the second chamber shall function as a reference, to stabilize the detector for changes in environmental temperature, humidity and pressure. It shall be possible to electrically check detectors sensitivity, using a sensitivity test set, or equivalent, and readjust the detectors sensitivity as required. C. The amplifier switching circuit, in the detector head, shall be 100% solid state. It shall operate with a detector line voltage of 22 volts DC. A lamp in the detector shall light to indicate an alarm. The alarm indicator light shall not extinguish until the Fire Alarm Control Panel has been reset. D. The detector base shall have terminals for making all connections; no soldering shall be required. It shall be possible to secure the detector in the base with a concealed socket- head screw to prevent unauthorized tampering. E. Smoke detectors shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. and approved by Factory Mutual Insurance Company. F. All smoke detectors shall be field checked and set to meet the prevailing conditions of the premise. All such Work shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer trained in such procedures. G. Provide complete with sampling tubes. Size sampling tubes for 80% of the width of the duct. Locate in ductwork where shown on the Drawings. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 12 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 H. Provide auxiliary contacts and separate 24 VDC power to relay required for fan shutdown and smoke damper operation. I. Provide a combination remote indicating light/key test switch directly below each duct detector and mount on the underside of the ceiling where the detector is concealed. J. Provide addressable base. K. Duct detector shall report as a supervisors alarm at FACP. 2.12 HORNS A. 24 volts DC. B. Basic grille type. C. Horn shall be rated 104 dB at 10 feet. D. Surface mounted. E. Indoor and Weatherproof (where noted) construction. F. Provide directional projector where noted on the Drawings. G. Provide backbox and grille for recessed installation; 4 in. deep box maximum. 2.13 LIGHT UNIT A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall be as shown on the drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units within building shall flash in synchronization. B. Protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the lens. C. Rated life shall be a minimum of 500 hours of continuous operation. D. Indoor construction. E. Surface or flush single gang box, wall or ceiling mounted as noted on the Drawings. F. Provide surface backbox for surface installation; 4 in. deep maximum. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 13 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.14 COMBINATION HORN-LIGHT UNITS A. 24 volts DC with built-in Xenon Flasher; two watts maximum. Pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with maximum duty cycle of 40%. Candela intensity minimum shall be 75 candela in general areas, 110 candela in sleeping areas or shall be as shown on the drawings. Flash rate minimum 1 Hz, maximum 2 Hz. Units shall have taps for adjusting candela rating. Units within building shall flash in synchronization. B. Single unit combination horn and light, with protruding pyramid shaped lexan lens with reflector and the word "FIRE" imprinted on the cover. C. Horn shall be rated 95 dB at 10 ft. D. Surface, or flush box as noted on the Drawings. E. Indoor construction. F. Provide surface backbox where required for surface installation; 4 in. deep box maximum. 2.15 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Wall mount within a flush box. Maximum depth of 4 in., stainless steel trim. B. Zone annunciation shall be by two line by 40 character LCD display. C. Provide trouble signal with audible buzzer, silencing switch and system reset. All switches shall be inoperable without keyswitch activated. D. Tamper-resistant, locked panel front. E. Provide a framed directory showing the building outline of each floor and each fire alarm zone. All lettering shall be minimum 1/2 in. high. Mount next to remote annunciator. 2.16 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Rated 115 volts AC. B. Holders shall be wall and/or floor mounted adjacent to the doors as noted on the Drawings. C. Wall and floor mounted holders shall be aluminum construction, have 25 pound holding force and shall have all necessary mounting hardware. D. At each door holder location (or pair of door holders where two doors occupy the same opening), provide a flush mounted keyswitch to disable or enable the door holders. (Keyswitches not indicated on drawings). The keyswitch shall be maintained contact, with key removable in the vertical position. Keyswitch shall be tamper resistant, factory prewired brushed stainless steel finish. Provide all wiring to connect to local door holders. Make: Dyna Lock 70001 or equivalent. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 14 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 2.17 BATTERY AND CHARGER A. Standby power shall be provided through 24 volt DC battery and automatic charger. B. Provide lead-calcium batteries, ampere-hour capacity which will allow system to operate 4 hours under supervisory condition and at the end of this period to operate all alarm signals for ten consecutive minutes. C. Provide cell reversal protection. D. Life expectancy shall be ten years minimum. E. Charger shall be self-regulating, solid state, type, automatic with capability to fully charge the discharged battery within five hours. F. Locate charger within the Fire Alarm Central Processing Unit enclosure. Locate batteries in vented enclosure where shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT A. All installations shall be accomplished in a professional manner by qualified personnel regularly engaged in and experienced in this type of Work. Fire alarm installation shall be directed by a person who possesses a state license for installation of fire alarm systems. B. Install all wiring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. All wiring shall be copper and installed a separate and segregated raceway system. D. Provide minimum #16 AWG for station circuits, minimum #14 AWG for signal and detector circuits and minimum #12 AWG for power supply circuits. E. Provide 120 volt circuits to the fire alarm Central Processing Unit enclosure, one for fan shutdown, one for door release. F. Provide one 20 ampere, 120 volt circuit to each sprinkler pre-action alarm panel. Provide all control and power wiring to discharge solenoid valve(s). All 120 volt wiring shall be installed in separate conduit. G. Wiring to all initiation and signal circuits shall be two wire Class B. H. Wiring to all initiating devices shall be by THHN. Tee tapping will be allowed. I. Provide all wiring to sprinkler flow switches, pressure switches, and alarm check valves, installed by others. Maintain supervisory circuitry to the switches. Use sealtight conduit for the last 2 ft. - 0 in. of raceway at the switch. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 15 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 J. Provide all wiring to post indicator valves, OS&Y valves and dry pipe sprinkler system maintenance air pressure switches, provided by others. Wire into the supervisory alarm portion of the fire alarm system. K. Provide all wiring to the smoke dampers installed by others. Wire to the damper junction box with flexible conduit and wire; provide box or boxes as required. Install according to N.E.C. Article 300-22. Smoke dampers shall operate only when its associated smoke duct detector is in alarm. L. Provide all wiring to the EP switch. Wire to the EP switch with flexible conduit and wire; Provide box or boxes if required. Install according to N.E.C. Article 300-22. Smoke dampers shall operate only when its associated duct smoke duct detector is in alarm. M. Provide all power supplies and wiring to smoke relief hatches and fire barriers. Smoke relief hatch or fire barrier shall operate only when its associated smoke detector is in alarm. N. Provide all wiring to duct smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors shall be mounted on the ventilating ductwork. All mounting arrangements, holes cut into ductwork, sealing of openings along with ceiling and access doors for the duct type detectors shall be provided by others. Provide duct detectors along with sampling tubes with end caps. Sequence smoke damper operation thirty seconds after its associated fan has been shut down. Duct detector shall report as supervisory alarm at FACP. O. Provide all wiring required for fan shutdown. Wire normally closed fan relay contacts ahead of all automatic devices. P. Magnetic door holders shall be provided and complete by Division 26. Install all door holders in accordance with installation detail on the drawings. Connect door holders to nearest 120 volt corridor receptacle circuit. Q. Provide 120 volt AC supervisory relays in the Fire Alarm Control Panel enclosure for each magnetic door holder power circuit to insure their associated circuit breakers are in the "ON" position. In the event a circuit breaker is in the "OFF" position, it's associated supervisory relay shall transmit a trouble signal to the FACPU. R. Provide all elevator capture control wiring. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay all costs to modify existing elevator controllers for elevator capture and alternate level capture. S. All wiring shall conform to N.E.C. Articles 725 and 760, and to NFPA-72, "National Fire Alarm Code". T. Detection and initiating equipment shall be listed by UL or approved by FM. U. All surface mounted devices shall be mounted on a special box furnished by fire alarm equipment manufacturer. Total assembly shall be secure, smooth contour and have no protrusions. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 16 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 V. Install wireguards on all detectors and devices where called for. W. Where detectors are installed on wood or masonry surfaces, attach brackets directly to the surface with tamperproof fasteners. Where detectors are installed on suspended ceilings, provide additional supports in the ceiling, such as channel support system, angle iron or additional runner bars. Fasten the additional supports rigidly to the ceiling runner bar system. Attach bracket to the supports with tamperproof fasteners. Install metal spacers between the bracket and supports so that the ceiling tiles will not be a part of the support system. X. Install wall mounted audio/visual signal devices at heights noted in Contract Documents. Where ceiling types are called for, verify ceiling type and mounting height in the field. Provide pendant-mounted devices as required for specified mounting height. Y. An auxiliary fire alarm relay used to control an emergency control device that provides control functions described in this specification shall be located within 3 feet of the emergency control device and all wiring shall be supervised. Z. Label all fire alarm devices and system components (major equipment, conduit, junction boxes and cabling) according to Cornell Standard 16710. 3.2 PROGRAMMING A. Contractor shall provide the cost to cover all system programming, including items particular to this project (such as custom zone descriptions, time delay settings, sensitivity settings, etc.) such that entire system is 100% complete and operating to the Owner's satisfaction. Coordinate all system programming with the Owner. Also, provide programming of the system a minimum of once during the guarantee period to provide changes requested by the Owner. 3.3 TESTING AND INSTRUCTION A. The complete fire protection system shall be fully tested and guaranteed for a period of one year after Owner's Representative written acceptance. B. Provide a minimum of 2 hours of instruction to the operating personnel designated by the Owner's Representative with regard to use and operation of the system. Provide up to three programming modifications. C. Provide 3 sets of keys to all panels, manual stations, etc., to the Site Representative. D. Prior to request for final payment submit a quantity of bound Operator Manuals that shall include as a minimum. 1. Bill of Material. 2. Manufacturer's equipment description for each piece of equipment, each device and each initiation and control module type used. CORNELL SECTION 28 31 02 Ithaca, New York POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 120 Maple Ave POINT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 02 - 17 RTU Replacement April 18, 2014 3. Record Drawings for fire alarm wiring diagrams showing typical connection diagrams for each type of device and a complete riser diagram showing all devices, zones, and wiring requirements. Record Drawings for fire alarm wiring diagram shall show all terminal connections at all panels. 4. Instruction report starting when instruction was given and who was in attendance, signed by Owner's Representative. 5. Submit a written test report from an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer that each device and overall system operation has been 100% tested and approved. 6. Certificate of Completion as described in 2002 NFPA-72, Section 4.5.2. 7. One year warranty statement in accordance with the Basic Requirements Section of these Specifications. 8. All devices shall be pre-tested by the contractor and distributor prior to scheduling final acceptance test with AHS and EH&S. 9. Final test to be done with AHS and EH&S present. Test to be conducted at AHS's and EH&S's scheduling. END OF SECTION 28 3102 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK